911 Turbo Main Manual 144

Umschlag_U1+U4_aussen.fm Seite 1 Mittwoch, 9.
April 2014 3:09 15
911 Turbo
WKD 991 03 21 15
911 Turbo
Owner’s Manual
Umschlag_U2+U3_innen.fm Seite 2 Mittwoch, 9. April 2014 3:11 15
WKD 991 03 21 15 04/14 Orientation guides in the Owner’s Manual Various types of safety instructions are used in
Dr. Ing. h.c. F. Porsche AG is the owner of The orientation guides in the Owner’s Manual are this Owner’s Manual.
numerous trademarks, both registered and highlighted in yellow. h DANGER Serious Injury or Death
unregistered, including without limitation the
Overall Table of Contents
Porsche Crest®, Porsche®, Boxster®, Carrera®, Failure to observe safety instructions in the
Cayenne®, Cayman®, Panamera®, MacanTM, At the start of the Owner’s Manual you will find an “Danger” category will result in serious injury or
Speedster®, Tiptronic®, Tequipment®. overview of the overall contents of the Owner’s death.
VarioCam®, PCM™, PDK®, 911™, 4S®, RS®, Manual.
PTM® and the model numbers and the distinctive Section Contents h WARNING Possible Serious Injury
shapes of the Porsche automobiles such as, the There is a summary of topics with the or Death
federally registered 911 and Boxster automobiles corresponding page numbers at the beginning of Failure to observe safety instructions in the
in the US. The third party trademarks contained each main chapter. “Warning” category could result in serious injury
herein are the properties of their respective or death.
owners. Index
There is a detailed, alphabetical index at the end
Porsche Cars North America, Ltd. and its affiliates h CAUTION Possible Moderate or
believes the specifications to be correct at the of this Owner’s Manual.
Minor Injury
time of printing. However, specifications, standard Safety instructions in the Owner’s Manual Failure to observe safety instructions in the
equipment and options are subject to change
For your own protection and longer service life of “Caution” category can result in moderate or
without notice. Some options may be unavailable
your car, please heed all operating instructions minor injury.
when a car is built. Some vehicles may be shown
and special warnings. These special warnings
with equipment that is not available in the US and
contain important messages regarding your NOTICE
Canada. Please ask your dealer for advice
safety and/or the potential for damage to your
concerning the current availability of options and Possible Vehicle Damage
Porsche. Ignoring them could result in serious
verify the optional equipment that you ordered. Failure to observe safety instructions in the
mechanical failure, serious personal injury or
Porsche recommends safety belt usage and death. “Notice” category could result in damage to the
observance of traffic laws at all times. vehicle.
© 2014 Dr. Ing. h.c. F. Porsche AG
Information
Additional information, tips and instructions are
indicated by the word “Information”. Please read
this information carefully and follow the
instructions.
14_991_Turbo_21.book Seite 1 Mittwoch, 9. April 2014 2:19 14
Dear Owner, A separate Maintenance Booklet explains how h WARNING Alteration or Misuse of
you can keep your Porsche in top driving condition
Thank you for choosing a Porsche 911 Turbo. Vehicle
by having it serviced regularly.
No other car embodies such a unique blend of Any alteration of the vehicle may negate or
A separate Warranty and Customer
legendary heritage and cutting edge innovation. interfere with those safety features built into the
Information Booklet contains detailed
For maximum safety and pleasure, we encourage information about the warranties covering your vehicle. Modifications may be carried out on your
you to read the Owner´s Manual and take time to Porsche. vehicle only if approved by Porsche.
familiarize yourself with the operation of your Your Porsche is intended to be used in a safe
Porsche vehicle before you drive it. For U.S. only: manner obeying the local traffic laws and in the
Always drive within your own unique capabilities as If you believe that your vehicle has a fault which light of driving conditions faced by you, and in
a driver and ensure that anyone else driving your could cause a crash, injury or death, you should accordance with the instructions provided in this
Porsche vehicle does the same. To prevent or immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Owner’s Manual.
minimize injury, always use your safety belts and Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to f Do not misuse your Porsche by ignoring those
always lawfully operate your Porsche vehicle. notifying Porsche Cars North America, Inc. laws and driving conditions, or by ignoring the
Always keep your Owner´s Manual in the car. (Porsche Cars N.A.). instructions in this manual.
If you sell your Porsche vehicle, pass the Owner´s If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open f Do not alter your Porsche. Any alteration could
Manual and other operation manuals on to the new an investigation, and if it finds that a safety create dangerous conditions or defeat safety
owner. problem exists in a group of vehicles, it may order engineering features built into your car.
Should you have any questions regarding the a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
operation or maintenance of your vehicle, please cannot become involved in individual problems NOTICE
call 1-800-PORSCHE or contact your authorized between you and your dealer, or Porsche Cars
N.A.. Risk of damage to the engine due to inadequate
Porsche dealership.
supply of oil.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety
Hotline toll-free at The fitting of racing tires (e.g. slicks) for sporting
1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–9153); events is not approved by Porsche. Very high
cornering speeds can be achieved with racing
go to
tires. However, the resulting transverse
http://www.safercar.gov; acceleration values would jeopardize the
or write to: adequate supply of oil to the engine. Porsche
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Ave, SE, therefore will not accept any warranty or accept
Washington, DC 20590. any liability for damage occurring as a result of
You can also obtain other information about motor non-compliance with this provision.
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov. f Do not fit racing tires (e.g. slicks) for sporting
Your car has thousands of parts and components events on your vehicle.
which have been designed and manufactured in
accordance with Porsche’s high standards of
engineering quality and safety.
1
Regularly check your vehicle for signs of Note to owners Sport tires
damage. In Canada, this manual is also available in French. Sport tires (ultra high performance tires) are
Damaged or missing aerodynamic To obtain a copy contact your dealer or write to: approved for use on public highways and comply
components such as spoilers or underside
Note aux proprietaires with all statutory requirements and safety criteria.
panels affect the driving behavior and
therefore must be replaced immediately. Au Canada on peut se procurer un exemplaire de The design of the tire is also geared towards use
ce Manuel en français auprès du concessionaire on racing circuits (driver safety training courses,
Your car may have all or some of the components
ou du: sports driving schools, Club Sport events) and
described in this manual.
provides distinct advantages here in terms of dry
Should you have difficulty understanding any of
grip and wear compared to conventional road
the explanations of features or equipment installed Porsche Cars Canada, Ltd.
tires.
in your vehicle, contact your authorized Porsche Automobiles Porsche Canada, LTEE
dealer. He/She will be glad to assist you. Also The major features are a reduced tread depth and
check with your dealer on other available options 5925 Airport Road a special tread pattern and carcass.
or equipment. Suite 420 The design features of this sports tire result
Throughout this booklet, left is designated as the Mississauga, Ontario in the following effects compared with other
driver's side of the vehicle, and right as the Canada, L4V 1W1 summer tires when used under normal
passenger's side of the vehicle. driving conditions:
Text, illustrations and specifications in this manual Telephone number for customer assistance: – Sport tires have a smaller tread depth, and
are based on the information available at the time 1-800-PORSCHE / Option 3 thus can reach their wear limit sooner.
of printing. As with all tires, the attainable mileage
depends on the individual driving style and the
It has always been Porsche’s policy to conditions of use.
continuously improve its products. Porsche, – Exercise caution when driving on wet roads,
therefore, reserves the right to make changes in paying special attention to hydroplaning
design and specification, and to make additions or situations (stagnant water, puddles, lane
improvements in its product without incurring any grooves). Sport tires have a lower tread depth
obligation to install them on products previously than normal tires and you must therefore adapt
manufactured. speed accordingly when driving on wet
We wish you many miles of safe and pleasurable surfaces.
driving in your Porsche. – The driver’s skill level must be commensurate
with the vehicle performance levels in the
upper range limits, due to increased safety
risks in the upper range limits.
f Sport tires are not suitable for use in cold,
snowy or icy conditions. At outside
temperatures below 45 °F (7 °C) change to
snow tires.
f Notify anyone using your car of these
characteristics and possible effects.
2
h DANGER Loss of Road Surface Driving on Race Circuit Setting and operating vehicle
Contact, Control over (e.g. Sports Driving Schools, Club components when driving
the Vehicle and Braking
Ability
Sport Events) h WARNING Operating Components
Brake fluid, brake pads and brake disks While Driving
The reduced tire tread depth means that there is
an increased risk of aquaplaning on wet roads. Brake fluid absorbs moisture from the air over Setting or operating the multi-function display,
f When driving on wet or mud-covered roads time. This accumulation of water lowers the radio, navigation system, telephone or other
reduce speed significantly. boiling point and can impair braking action if the equipment when driving could distract you from
brakes are subjected to high temperatures, such the traffic. You could lose control of the vehicle
as can occur on race circuits (sports driving
h DANGER Worn Tires resulting in serious personal injury or death.
school, Club Sport events). f Operate the components while driving only if
Sport tires have a smaller tread depth, and thus The brake fluid should therefore not be more than the traffic situation allows you to do so safely.
can reach their wear limit sooner. 12 months old if the vehicle is driven on race f Carry out any complicated operating or setting
It is important to check tire wear frequently to circuits (sports driving school, Club Sport events). procedures only with the vehicle stationary.
avoid risk of serious personal injury or death from f For more information, see the “ Maintenance”
worn tires. booklet.
f Check tire wear frequently. Wear on the brake pads and brake disks depends
to a great extent on the driving style and driving
conditions. Wear on the brake components is
increased as a result of high temperatures, such
as can occur on race circuits (sports driving
school, Club Sport events).
f Before and after driving on race circuits (e.g.
sports driving school, Club Sport events), it is
important therefore to carry out a professional
inspection of the brake pads and brake disks
for wear.
Racing tires
The fitting of racing tires (e.g. slicks) for sporting
events is not approved by Porsche.
Very high cornering speeds can be achieved with
racing tires. The resulting transverse acceleration
values would jeopardize the adequate supply of oil
to the engine.
Porsche therefore refuses to accept any
guarantee or liability for damage occurring as
a result of non-compliance with this provision.
3
Engine Exhaust Hot Exhaust Pipes Porsche Ceramic Composite Brake

h DANGER
h WARNING Hot Exhaust Pipes (PCCB)
f Please see the chapter “BRAKES”
Engine Exhaust
Inhalation The exhaust pipe is hot when the vehicle is running
on page 152.
Engine exhaust is dangerous if inhaled. and remains hot for some time after the vehicle is
turned off. The high-performance brake system is designed
f To prevent injury, make a point of noting where
Engine exhaust fumes have many components
for optimal braking effect at all speeds and
which you can smell. They also contain carbon
your vehicle’s exhaust pipe is, avoid placing temperatures.
monoxide (CO), which is a colorless and odorless
your legs near the exhaust pipe, and closely Certain speeds, braking forces and ambient
gas.
supervise children around the vehicle during conditions (such as temperature and humidity)
Carbon monoxide can cause unconsciousness
time when the exhaust pipe could be hot. therefore might cause brake noises.
and even death if inhaled.
f Never start or let the engine run in an en- A hot exhaust pipe can cause serious burns. Wear on the different components and braking
system, such as brake pads and brake disks,
closed, unventilated area.
depends to a great extent on the individual driving
It is not recommended to sit in your car for Portable Fuel Containers style and the conditions of use and therefore
prolonged periods with the engine on and the
h DANGER Portable Fuel Container cannot be expressed in actual miles on the road.
car not moving.
Leaks The values communicated by Porsche are based
on normal operation adapted to traffic. Wear
h WARNING California Portable fuel containers may leak, whether they
are full or partially empty. Fuel leaking from a increases considerably when the vehicle is driven
Proposition 65
portable container carried in your vehicle could, in on race tracks or through an aggressive driving
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and style.
f Please consult an authorized Porsche dealer
case of an accident, cause a fire or explosion.
f Never carry additional fuel in portable
certain vehicle components contain or emit
chemicals known to the State of California to about the current guidelines in effect before
containers in your vehicle.
cause cancer and birth defects or other such use of your vehicle.
reproductive harm.
In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and Ground Clearance
certain products of component wear contain or
NOTICE
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other Risk of damage to the vehicle due to lower ground
reproductive harm. clearance.
The vehicle may touch the ground as a result of
reduced ground clearance.
f Drive carefully and slowly on steep slopes
(e. g. parking lots, curbs, uneven roads, lifting
platforms etc.).
f Avoid steep ramps.
4
Dear Porsche Owner, f Be sure the vehicle battery is well charged and In the driver’s seat…
f Check operation of the horn.
cranks the engine properly.
f
A lot has gone into the manufacture of your
f Position seat for easy reach of foot pedals and
Check all doors and lids for proper operation
Porsche sports car, including advanced
and latch them properly.
f
engineering, rigid quality control and demanding controls. To reduce the possibility of injury
Check and if necessary replace worn or
inspections. These engineering and safety from the air bag deployment, you should
cracked wiper blades.
f
features will be enhanced by you… always sit back as far from the steering wheel
See that all windows are clear and
as is practical, while still maintaining full
the safe driver… unobstructed.
f
vehicle control.
f
– who knows her/his car and all controls, Check air intake slots and area between
Adjust the inside and outside rear view mirrors.
f
– who maintains the vehicle properly, luggage compartment lid and windshield.
Buckle your safety belts.
f
– who uses driving skills wisely and always Ensure that these areas are free of snow and
Check operation of the foot and electric
drives within her/his own capabilities and the ice, so the heater and the windshield wipers
parking brake.
f
level of familiarity with the vehicle. work properly.
f
Check all warning and indicator lights with
You will find helpful hints in this manual on how to If a child will be riding in the vehicle, check
ignition on and engine not running.
f
perform most of the checks listed on the following child seat/child seat restraint system to
Start engine and check all warning displays for
ensure that restraints are properly adjusted.
f
pages. If in doubt, have these checks performed warning symbols.
f
by your authorized Porsche dealer. Check all exterior and interior lights for
Never leave an idling car unattended.
f
operation and that the lenses are clean.
f
Lock doors from inside, especially with
Before driving off… Check the headlights for proper aim, and if
children in the car to prevent inadvertent
necessary, have them adjusted.
f
Check the following items first opening of doors from inside or outside.
Check under the vehicle for leaks.
f Turn the engine off before you attempt any f Be sure all luggage is stowed securely.
Drive with doors locked.
checks or repairs on the vehicle.
f Be sure the tires are inflated correctly. Emergency equipment
Check tires for damage and tire wear. It is good practice to carry emergency equipment
f See that wheel bolts are properly tightened in your vehicle.
and not loose or missing. Some of the items you should have are: window
f Check engine oil level, add if necessary. Make scraper, snow brush, container or bag of sand or
it a habit to check the engine oil with every salt, emergency light, small shovel, first-aid kit,
refueling. etc.
f Check all fluid levels such as windshield
washer and brake fluid levels.
5
On the road… grass, brush, spilled fuel or other flammable Break in brake pads and brake disks
f Never drive after you have consumed alcohol
material.
f Make it a habit to check the engine oil with
New brake pads and disks have to be ”broken in“,
or drugs. and therefore only attain optimal friction when the
f
every refueling. car has covered several hundred miles or km.
Always have your safety belt fastened.
f Always drive defensively. Break in hints for the first The slightly reduced braking ability must be
Expect the unexpected. compensated for by pressing the brake pedal
f Use signals to indicate turns and lane changes.
2,000 miles (3,000 kilometers) harder. This also applies whenever the brake pads
f Turn on headlights at dusk or when the driving The following tips will be helpful in obtaining and brake disks are replaced.
conditions warrant it. optimum performance from your new Porsche.
f Despite the most modern, high-precision
New tires
Always keep a safe distance from the vehicle
manufacturing methods, the moving parts must New tires do not have maximum traction. They
in front of you, depending on traffic, road and
tend to be slippery.
f Break in new tires by driving at moderate
weather conditions. still wear in with each other. This wearing-in occurs
f Reduce speed at night and during inclement mainly in the first 2,000 miles (3,000 km).
speeds during the first 60 to 120 miles (100
weather. Therefore: to 200 km). Longer braking distances must be
f Preferably take longer trips.
Driving in wet weather requires caution and
anticipated.
f Avoid frequent cold starts with short-distance
reduced speeds, particularly on roads with
standing water, as the handling characteristics
driving whenever possible.
Engine oil and fuel consumption
f Avoid full throttle starts and abrupt stops.
of the vehicle may be impaired due to hydro- During the break-in period oil and fuel consump-
f Do not exceed maximum engine speed of
planing of the tires. tion may be higher than normal.
f Always observe speed limits and obey road As always, the rate of oil consumption depends on
4,200 rpm (revolutions per minute).
f Do not run a cold engine at high rpm either in
signs and traffic laws.
f
the quality and viscosity of oil, the speed at which
When tired, get well off the road, stop and take the engine is operated, the climate and road
Neutral or in gear.
f Do not let the engine labor, especially when
a rest. Turn the engine off. Do not sit in the conditions, as well as the amount of dilution and
vehicle with engine idling. oxidation of the lubricant.
driving uphill. Shift to the next lower gear in
Please see the chapter “ENGINE EXHAUST”
time (use the most favorable rpm range). f Make a habit of checking engine oil with every
f Never lug the engine in high gear at low
on page 4.
f
refueling, add if necessary.
When parked, always put the electric parking
speeds. This rule applies at all times, not just
brake on and put the PDK selector lever in
during the break-in period.
f Do not participate in motor racing events,
position P.
On hills also turn the front wheels toward the
sports driving schools, etc. during the first
curb.
f
2,000 miles (3,000 kilometers).
When emergency repairs become necessary,
move the vehicle well off the road. Turn on the There may be a slight stiffness in the steering,
emergency flasher and use other warning gear-shifting or other controls during the break-in
devices to alert other motorists. Do not park period which will gradually disappear.
or operate the vehicle in areas where the hot
exhaust system may come in contact with dry
6
C_Panamera_21IVZ.fm Seite 7 Donnerstag, 10. April 2014 8:42 08
Contents
Dear Owner ....................................................1 Malfunctions when Opening and Closing..........26 Emergency Operation of
Sport tires......................................................2 Trunk Entrapment .........................................30 Convertible Top and Wind Deflector ................70
Driving on Race Circuit (e.g. Sports Driving
Schools, Club Sport Events) ............................3 Seats, Mirrors and Steering Wheel ..... 31 Lights, Turn Signals and
Setting and operating vehicle Windshield Wipers............................. 78
Seat Adjustment and Head Restraints .............32
components when driving ................................3
Front Seats ..................................................32 Light Switch..................................................79
Engine Exhaust ...............................................4
Comfort Entry Function..................................34 Instrument Lighting .......................................82
Portable Fuel Containers .................................4
Seat Heating.................................................35 Turn Signal/High Beam/
Ground Clearance ...........................................4
Seat Ventilation ............................................35 Headlight Flasher Stalk/Parking Light Switch ...82
Porsche Ceramic Composite Brake (PCCB).......4
Rear Seat Backrests .....................................35 Emergency Flasher .......................................83
Dear Porsche Owner .......................................5
Safety belts ..................................................36 Interior/Reading Lights ..................................84
Before driving off… ........................................5
Airbag Systems ............................................38 Brief Overview – Windshield wipers ..............85
In the driver’s seat….......................................5
Child Restraint Systems.................................42 Windshield Wiper/Washer Stalk ......................86
On the road… ................................................6
LATCH Child Seat System..............................46
Break in hints for the first 2,000 miles
Roll-Over Protection.......................................48 Instrument Panel and
(3,000 kilometers) ..........................................6
Exterior Mirrors ............................................49 Multi-Function Display ....................... 89
Automatic Anti-Dazzle Interior and
Contents ............................................. 7 Instrument Panel USA Models.........................90
Exterior Mirrors ............................................50
Instrument Panel Canada Models....................91
Driver’s Cockpit ............................................10 Steering Wheel Heating .................................51
Displays on the Instrument Panel ....................92
Steering Wheel and Instrument Panel..............11 Steering Wheel Adjustment ............................51
Battery/Alternator .........................................95
Center Console.............................................12 Multi-function Steering Wheel .........................52
Check Engine (Emission Control) ....................95
Control Panel................................................13 Sun Visors....................................................53
Acoustic Signals ...........................................95
Overhead Console ........................................14 Vanity Mirror.................................................53
Operating the Multi-Function Display on the
Instrument Panel ...........................................96
Opening and Locking ......................... 15 Air Conditioning................................. 54 Vehicle Menu ..............................................100
Never invite car theft! ....................................16 Automatically Controlled 2-zone Air Audio Menu.................................................102
Notes on the Key and Central Conditioning .................................................55 Phone Menu................................................103
Locking System ...........................................16 Air Vents ......................................................59 Map Menu ..................................................103
Central Locking System ................................18 Heated Rear Window/Exterior Mirror Heating ..60 Navigation Menu .........................................104
Brief Overview – Opening and Locking from Trip Menu ...................................................105
Outside ........................................................19 Windows, Sunroof and Cabriolet......... 61 Tire Pressure Menu (Tire Pressure
Opening and Locking from Outside.................20 Monitoring System, TPMS)...........................105
Power Windows ............................................62
Opening and Locking from Inside ...................23 Allwheel Menu .............................................114
Sunroof........................................................63
Opening and Closing the Luggage Chrono Menu (Stopwatch) ............................114
Convertible Top ............................................67
Compartment Lid and Engine Cover ...............24 G-Force Menu .............................................116
Wind Deflector ..............................................69
Contents 7
Performance Menu ..................................... 116 “Sport” and “Sport Plus” mode.....................188 How Emission Control Works....................... 226
ACC Menu .................................................. 117 Extending Front and Rear Spoilers................190 Fuel Economy ............................................ 226
Vehicle Settings on the Rear Axle Steering ......................................191 Operating Your Porsche in other Countries... 227
Multi-Function Display .................................. 117 Fuel........................................................... 227
Overview of Warning and Storage, Luggage Compartment and Portable Fuel Container............................... 229
Information Messages ............................. 129 Roof Transport System .....................192 Fuel Recommendations............................... 230
Fuel Evaporation Control ............................ 231
Storage......................................................193
Personal Settings.............................141 Car Care Instructions.................................. 231
Drinks Holder/Cupholder .............................194
Brief Overview – Personal Settings ............ 142 Ashtray ......................................................195
Storing personal settings ............................ 143 Cigarette Lighter.........................................196 Minor Repairs ..................................239
Sockets .....................................................196 Exercise Extreme Caution when
Driving and Driving Safety ................145 Luggage Compartment................................197 Working on your vehicle.............................. 240
Roof Transport System................................200 Checking the Coolant Level and
Diagnostic Socket....................................... 146
Loading Information ....................................204 Adding Coolant .......................................... 242
Ignition Lock............................................... 146
Brake Fluid ................................................ 243
Starting and Stopping the Engine ................. 147
Parking ...........................................206 Electromechanical Power Steering............... 244
Auto Start Stop function .............................. 149
Changing Air Cleaner .................................. 244
Electric Parking Brake................................. 151 ParkAssist ..................................................207
Changing Particle Filters ............................. 244
Brakes ....................................................... 152 Reversing Camera.......................................209
Tires and Wheels........................................ 244
Cruise Control ............................................ 155 Swivelling Down Mirror Glass as Parking Aid..210
Changing Wheels........................................ 254
Adaptive Cruise Control............................... 157 Garage Door Opener HomeLink®
Wheel Attachment Faces............................. 257
Car Audio Operation/Tips ............................ 168 (Universal Remote Control)...........................211
Wheel Bolts ............................................... 257
Porsche Communication Management (PCM) 170
Wheels with Central Lock ............................ 258
USB/iPod® and AUX ................................... 171 Alarm System and Theft Protection...215 Central Bolts.............................................. 258
Voice Control.............................................. 171
Alarm System and Changing a Wheel....................................... 258
Porsche Doppelkupplung (PDK) .................... 172
Passenger Compartment Monitoring.............216 Rim Cleaner ............................................... 263
Selector-lever Positions .............................. 174
Immobilizer.................................................217 Central Bolt Emergency Fastening ............... 263
Limp-home mode ........................................ 178
Theft Protection ..........................................217 Flat Tire..................................................... 265
Transmission and Chassis Control Systems .. 179
Electrical System ....................................... 267
Porsche Traction Management (PTM) ........... 180
Porsche Stability Management (PSM)............ 181
Maintenance and Car Care ...............218 Battery (12 volt) ......................................... 271
Exercise Extreme Caution when External Power Supply, Emergency
HOLD function: Drive-Off Assistant,
Working on your vehicle...............................219 starting with jumper cables ......................... 273
Standstill Management ................................ 184
Engine Oil...................................................221 Changing Car Key (Remote Control) Battery . 275
ABS Brake System (Anti-lock Brake System) . 184
Checking Engine Oil Level ............................222 Replacing bulbs.......................................... 276
Porsche Active Suspension
Topping Up Engine Oil .................................222 Headlights ................................................. 276
Management (PASM) ................................... 185
Washer Fluid windshield ...............................224 Headlight Adjustment.................................. 277
Porsche Torque Vectoring (PTV Plus)............ 186
Wiper Blades ..............................................224 Towing ...................................................... 278
Porsche Dynamic Chassis Control (PDCC)..... 187
Emission Control System.............................225 Fire extinguisher......................................... 282
Dynamic Engine Mounting (PADM) ................ 188
8 Contents
Tire Pressure and Technical Data ..... 283

Vehicle Identification Data............................284
Engine Data................................................285
Driving Performance ...................................285
Wheels, Tires..............................................286
Tire Pressure for Cold Tires (68 °F/ 20 °C)...287
Weights......................................................288
Dimensions ................................................288
Filling Capacities.........................................289
Index .............................................. 290
Contents 9
Driver’s Cockpit
A Door opener
See page 24.
B Personal settings memory buttons
See page 142.
C Exterior-mirror setting
See page 49.
D Light switch
See page 79.
E Overhead console
F Power windows
See page 62.
G Electric parking brake
See page 151.
H Ignition lock
See page 146.
I Front and rear lid release
See page 24.
J Steering wheel adjustment
See page 51.
K Seat adjustment
See page 32.
10 Overview Illustrations
Steering Wheel and

Instrument Panel
A PDK shift buttons
See page 176.
B Turn signal lights
See page 82.
C Engine oil pressure gauge
See page 93.
D Engine oil temperature gauge
See page 92.
E Speedometer
See page 92.
F Tachometer
See page 95.
G Multi-function display
See page 96.
H Coolant temperature gauge
See page 92.
I Fuel gauge
See page 94.
J Windshield wipers
See page 86.
K Cruise control
See page 157.
L Diagnostic socket (OBD)
M Telephone controls, multi-function display
See page 103.
N Horn
Overview Illustrations 11
Center Console
A Sport Chrono watch
See page 114.
B Porsche Communication Management (PCM)
See page 170.
C Air vents
See page 59.
D Drinks holder/Cupholder
See page 194.
E Glove box
See page 193.
F Operating panel for air conditioning
See page 55.
G Center console
See page 13.
H Ashtray, cigarette lighter
See page 195.
I Oddments tray
See page 194.
Control Panel
A Seat heating/seat ventilation
See page 35.
B Operating panel for air conditioning
See page 55.
C Central locking button
See page 18.
D Front/rear spoiler
See page 190.
E Auto Start-Stop function/coasting mode
See page 151.
F Emergency flasher switch
See page 83.
G Sport mode
See page 188.
H Sport Plus mode
See page 188.
I Porsche Active Suspension Management
(PASM)
See page 185.
J Porsche Stability Management (PSM)
See page 180.
K Operating panel for lifting/sliding roof
See page 63.
Control panel for convertible top
See page 67.
Overview Illustrations 13
Overhead Console
A Button for interior/reading lights
See page 84.
B PASS AIR BAG OFF warning light
See page 45.
C Interior light
See page 84.
D Reading lights
See page 84.
E ParkAssist
See page 207.
F Garage door opener (HomeLink®)
See page 211.
G Button for interior/reading lights
See page 84.
Opening and Locking

Never invite car theft! ....................................16
Notes on the Key and Central
Locking System ...........................................16
Central Locking System.................................18
Brief Overview – Opening and Locking from
Outside ........................................................19
Opening and Locking from Outside .................20
Opening and Locking from Inside....................23
Opening and Closing the Luggage
Compartment Lid and Engine Cover................24
Malfunctions when Opening and Closing..........26
Trunk Entrapment .........................................30
Opening and Locking 15

Never invite car theft! To protect your vehicle and your possessions Notes on the Key and Central
from theft, you should always proceed as
An unlocked car with the key in the ignition lock
follows when leaving your vehicle:
Locking System
f Close windows.
invites car theft.
Key
A gong alarm is standard equipment in your f Close sun roof. You are provided with two car keys with integrated
Porsche. The gong alarm will sound if you open f Activate the electric parking brake. emergency key. These keys operate all the locks
the driver's door while the key is still in the ignition f Remove ignition key (switch ignition off in on your vehicle.
f Be careful with your car keys: do not part with
lock. It is your reminder to pull the key out of the vehicles that have Porsche Entry & Drive).
ignition lock and to lock the doors. f Remove valuables (e.g. car documents, radio them except under exceptional circumstances.
h WARNING Unattended Vehicle control module, cell phones, house keys) from f Remove and take the ignition key with you,
the car. even if leaving the vehicle only briefly.
Never leave your vehicle unattended with the key f Lock doors. Do not leave the ignition key in the vehicle.
in the ignition lock, especially if children and/or f Lock the glove compartment. f Inform your insurance company of any loss or
pets are left unattended in the vehicle. They can f Close storage trays. theft of car keys or if extra or replacement
operate power windows and other controls. If the
keys have been cut.
f Third parties can still operate the mechanical
engine is left running, they may accidentally
engage the shift lever. Serious personal injury or
locks with a lost key.
death could result from loss of control of the
vehicle.
f Always remove the ignition key. Information
f Always set the electric parking brake. Different vehicle settings are stored on the
f Lock the doors with the key or with the remote respective key when the vehicle is locked,
control. provided the vehicle is fitted with the relevant
equipment.
For information on storing vehicle settings on
the key:
f Please see the chapter “COMFORT ENTRY
FUNCTION” on page 34.
16 Opening and Locking

Emergency operation
f Please see the chapter “EMERGENCY
OPERATION – UNLOCKING THE IGNITION KEY/
CONTROL UNIT” on page 28.
Replacement keys
Car keys can only be ordered through an
authorized Porsche dealer. Sometimes, this may
take a long time.
You should therefore always keep a spare key
convenient. Keep it in a safe place, but under no
circumstances in or on the vehicle.
The key codes of new keys have to be “taught”
to the vehicle control unit by an authorized
Porsche dealer. All keys belonging to the vehicle
must also be taught again for this purpose.
“Teach-in” can be carried out for a total of 8 car
keys. Panic button Emergency key
In dangerous situations or when one's own safety Removing emergency key
Information is threatened, it is possible to draw attention to 1. Push the release button to the side.
Third parties can continue to operate the the situation by triggering an alarm. 2. Pull out the key.
mechanical locks using the lost key.
f Please consult an authorized Porsche dealer
To trigger an alarm Inserting emergency key
f Press button. f Slide in the key until the release button
for blocking the lost key.
f Furthermore, it is recommended having the
The horn sounds and the emergency flasher audibly engages.
flashes.
mechanical locks replaced by an authorized
Porsche dealer. To stop the alarm
f Press button again or unlock the vehicle.
The horn becomes silent and the emergency
flasher goes out.

Central Locking System Your vehicle is equipped with a central locking

system. The following are unlocked or locked
USA: KR55WK50138 together:
Canada: 7812D-5WK50138 – Doors
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC – Filler flap
Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Canada. The central locking system is always activated
Operation of this device is subject to the following when the vehicle is unlocked and locked.
two conditions: On the multi-purpose display of the instrument
1. This device may not cause harmful panel, you can set different variants for locking
interference, and and unlocking. You can open all doors irrespective
2. this device must accept any interference of the setting made.
received including interference that may cause The vehicle cannot be locked if the driver’s door is
undesired operation. not completely closed.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved If one of the following components is not
by the party responsible for compliance could void completely closed when you try to lock the vehicle
the user's authority to operate the equipment. the door is not locked:
– vehicle doors
– luggage compartment lid
Information
The indication by the emergency flasher and by
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio the acoustic signal will be provided after all doors
or TV interference caused by unauthorized and the luggage compartment lid are closed.
modifications to this equipment.
Such modification could void the user's authority
to operate the equipment. Information
When locking the vehicle with only the driver's
Any changes or modifications not expressly
door closed, the vehicle will be pre-locked. Make
approved by Porsche could void the user’s
sure that the key is not inside the vehicle when
authority to operate this equipment.
closing the open passenger's door/luggage
compartment lid.

Brief Overview – Opening and

Locking from Outside
The Porsche Entry & Drive option can be
recognized by the buttons A in the door handles.
This brief overview does not replace the
information provided under “OPENING AND
LOCKING FROM OUTSIDE”.
Warnings, in particular, are not replaced by this
brief overview.
Key Porsche Entry & Drive
What do I want to do? What do I have to do? What happens?
Unlocking Using the key:

Press the button on the key once. The emergency flasher flashes once.
The driver’s door can be opened.
Press the button on the key twice within The emergency flasher flashes once.
5 seconds. Both vehicle doors can be opened.
With Porsche Entry & Drive:

Grip the door handle fully. The driver’s door can be opened.
Locking Using the key:

Press the button on the key.
The emergency flasher flashes twice.
The doors are locked.
With Porsche Entry & Drive:
Press the button A on the door handle.
Lock if persons/animals Please see the chapter “SWITCHING OFF INTERIOR

are remaining in vehicle SURVEILLANCE AND INCLINATION SENSOR”
(Switch off the alarm system’s interior surveillance) on page 216.
Switching off alarm Unlock the vehicle.

With Porsche Entry & Drive: The alarm stops.
Grip the door handle fully.

Information
If you unlock the vehicle with the emergency key in
the door lock, you must switch the ignition on
(ignition lock position 1) within 15 seconds of
opening the door in order to prevent the alarm
system from being triggered. The passenger’s
door remains locked.
Information
If the vehicle is unlocked using the button and
a door or the luggage compartment lid is not
opened, the vehicle is locked again automatically
after 30 seconds.
Information
A - Unlock the vehicle With Porsche Entry & Drive
B - Lock the vehicle The factory settings of the vehicle are described
On vehicles with Porsche Entry & Drive, you can
C - Unlock the luggage compartment lid and doors in this section.
D - Emergency key unlock, lock and start the vehicle without using
In the multi-function display in the instrument
E - Panic button the key.
panel, you can change the settings and store them
You simply have to carry the key with you, e.g. in
Opening and Locking from Outside on the respective key for vehicles with memory.
your trouser pocket.
Depending on your vehicle equipment, you can For information on modifying the unlocking and f Do not expose the car key to a high level of
locking settings:
f Please see the chapter “LOCKING SETTINGS”
unlock and lock the vehicle either with the car key electromagnetic radiation. This could
or without a key by means of Porsche Entry & adversely affect Porsche Entry & Drive.
Drive. on page 122.
With the key

Use the buttons on the key to unlock and lock the
vehicle.

Information
The vehicle is locked automatically after
30 seconds if none of the doors or the luggage
compartment is opened.
If the interior surveillance system and inclination
sensor have been switched off (restricted anti-
theft protection), this also remains the case after
automatic relocking.
As a result, the doors can be opened from inside
by pulling the door opener.
f Inform any persons remaining in the vehicle
that the alarm system will be triggered if the
door is opened.
When locked again, the interior surveillance
system and inclination sensor are activated once
more.
Unlocking and opening doors Unlocking with Porsche Entry & Drive
(keyless) Switching off operational readiness
Unlocking with the key
Either door can be unlocked if you have the key (for vehicles with Porsche Entry & Drive)
1. Press button once.
and position yourself on the side of the vehicle Operational readiness of Porsche Entry & Drive is
The emergency flasher flashes once.
(driver’s side, passenger’s side) that you wish to switched off after 96 hours for the driver’s door
The driver’s door is unlocked.
open. and after 36 hours for the passenger door if the
or
1. Grip the door handle fully. vehicle is not unlocked within this time.
Press button twice within 5 seconds.
The emergency flasher flashes once. 1. Pull the door handle once to activate the
The emergency flasher flashes once.
The doors are unlocked. system again.
Both vehicle doors are unlocked.
2. Pull the door handle. 2. Pull the door handle again to open the door.
2. Pull the door handle.
Side-selective door unlock function
When unlocking the vehicle, you can choose to
unlock only the driver's door or also the
passenger's door. You can unlock both doors
irrespective of the selected setting.
f Press button on the key twice within
5 seconds.
For information on modifying the opening and
locking settings:
on page 122.

Locking doors
Information
Locking with the key
The vehicle cannot be locked if any of the doors
1. Close the door.
or the luggage compartment are not completely
2. Press button once.
closed.
The emergency flasher flashes twice and an
A warning signal sounds in the passenger
acoustic signal will sound twice.
compartment and a warning message appears
The doors cannot be opened from outside.
on the multi-function display.
or
If persons or animals are remaining in the The key must be outside the vehicle when locking
vehicle, press button twice within the vehicle doors, otherwise the vehicle doors
2 seconds. cannot be locked.
The emergency flasher emits one long flash. If the key is out of range, the vehicle doors and the
The alarm system’s interior surveillance is luggage compartment can no longer be opened
switched off. after the vehicle is locked.
The doors can be opened from inside by
pulling on the door opener. Automatic door locking and automatic door
f Inform any persons remaining in the vehicle unlocking
that the alarm system will be triggered if the Locking with Porsche Entry & Drive (keyless)
h WARNING Emergency Auto Lock
door is opened. You must carry the key with you.
Override
1. Close all doors.
2. Press the locking button A on the door handle. In an emergency situation where you need to exit
Information the car through an automatically locked door,
The emergency flasher flashes twice and an
When locking the vehicle with only the driver's acoustic signal will sound twice. remember the following procedure to open the
door closed, the vehicle will be pre-locked. Make door.
f Unlock the doors by pressing the central
The doors cannot be opened from outside.
sure that the key is not inside the vehicle when or
closing the open passenger's door/luggage locking button or
f Pull the inner door handle to open the door.
If persons or animals are remaining in the
compartment lid. vehicle,
f press the locking button A on the door handle
twice within 2 seconds.
Information
The emergency flasher emits one long flash.
The emergency flasher indicates that the vehicle The alarm system’s interior surveillance is
has been locked successfully only when all the switched off.
doors, the engine compartment lid and the The doors can be opened from inside by
tailgate are closed. pulling on the door opener.
door is opened.

In the multi-purpose display of the instrument Unlocking doors

panel, you have the option of selecting diverse f Press the central locking button.
variants of automatic door locking and automatic The indicator light on the button goes out.
door unlocking. Both vehicle doors will be unlocked.
locking settings: Automatic with Auto Unlock
f Please see the chapter “LOCKING SETTINGS” The vehicle is automatically unlocked when the
on page 122. ignition key is removed.
For more information on modifying the unlocking
Opening and Locking from Inside and locking settings:
The factory settings of the vehicle are described f Please see the chapter “LOCKING SETTINGS”
in this section. on page 122.
In the multi-function display in the instrument
panel, you can change the settings and store them
on the respective key for vehicles with memory. Information
If the vehicle was locked using the car key or the
locking settings:
emergency key, it cannot be unlocked with the
Central locking button central locking button.
on page 122.
Locking doors
f Press the central locking button.
When the ignition is switched on, the indicator Information
light in the button lights up. In the event of an accident with airbag
Both vehicle doors will be locked (only if all deployment, the doors are unlocked automatically
doors are closed). to facilitate fast access for helpers. The
The doors can be opened from inside by emergency flasher is also activated automatically.
pulling on the door opener.
Automatic with Auto Lock
If this function is activated, the vehicle is locked
automatically when a speed of approximately
2 mph (5 km/h) is exceeded.
For information on modifying the unlocking and
locking settings:
on page 122.

Opening and Closing the Luggage

Compartment Lid and Engine
Cover
h DANGER Unsecured Luggage
Compartment Lid
If the luggage compartment lid is not secured
properly, it could fly up, blocking your vision and
causing loss of control.
f Should you notice at any time while driving that
the lid is not secured properly, please stop
immediately in a suitable place and close it.
Opening luggage compartment lid

NOTICE
Risk of damage to luggage compartment lid or
A - Door opener windshield wipers. A - Luggage compartment lid
B - Door storage tray B - Engine cover
If the windshield wipers are pulled forward when
Opening doors you open the luggage compartment lid, the wipers 1. Open the driver’s door.
f Pull door opener (arrow) once. or the luggage compartment lid could be 2. Pull the release lever A next to the driver‘s
damaged. seat.
Door storage tray f Make sure that the windshield wipers are not The luggage compartment lid is now unlocked.
Opening storage tray pulled out forwards when opening the luggage
f Open the cover B. compartment lid.
Keep the storage tray closed while driving for f Always switch off windshield wipers before
safety reasons. opening the luggage compartment lid
(wiper switch in position 0).
For information on windshield wipers:
f Please see the chapter “WINDSHIELD WIPER
AND HEADLIGHT WASHER SYSTEM”
on page 86.

3. Raise lid slightly and unlatch the safety catch Opening luggage compartment lid with Unlocking and opening luggage
with the red lever (arrow). the key compartment lid with Porsche
4. Open the luggage compartment fully. Entry & Drive (keyless)
Information The luggage compartment lid can be opened if
you are in the front area of the vehicle with the key.
f Hold your hand between the Porsche Crest and
When the luggage compartment lid is unlocked,
the vehicle doors are also unlocked.
the license plate (illustration).
Unlocking and opening luggage – The lid is unlocked via a sensor and pops open.
compartment lid with the key – The vehicle doors are also unlocked.
1. Press button .
f Raise lid slightly and unlatch the safety catch
with the red lever.
f Open the lid
2. Raise lid slightly and unlatch the safety catch
with the red lever.
3. Open the lid.

Closing luggage compartment lid Opening engine compartment lid with the Malfunctions when Opening and
1. Lower lid and let it fall into the lock. If pull-button Closing
necessary, push the lid closed with the palm of Coupé only:
your hand in the area of the lock. Emergency operation of luggage
1. Open the driver’s door. compartment lid
2. Check that the lid has correctly engaged in the 2. Operate pull-button B next to the driver’s seat.
lock. If the vehicle battery is discharged, the luggage
The lid is unlocked and can be raised.
When the vehicle is in motion, a message will compartment lid can be opened only by
Cabriolet only: connecting an external electrical power source.
appear on the multi-function display in the instru-
ment panel if the lid is not closed properly. 1. Open the driver’s door.
2. Operate pull-button B next to the driver’s seat. UNLOCKING OF LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT
Engine compartment lid (convertible-top LID” on page 270.
compartment lid) opens automatically to the
Only one door is unlocked
service position.
The setting for locking and unlocking the doors
Closing engine compartment lid has been changed on the multi-function display in
Coupé only: the instrument panel.
1. Lower lid and let it fall into the lock. f Please see the chapter “SETTING DOOR
If necessary, push the lid closed with the UNLOCKING” on page 122.
palm of your hand in the area of the lock. You can open both doors irrespective of the
selected setting.
f Press button
2. Check that the lid has engaged correctly in
the lock. on the key twice within
When the vehicle is in motion, a message will 5 seconds.
appear on the multi-function display in the
instrument panel if the lid is not closed properly.
Cabriolet only:
f Press pull-button B.
Engine compartment lid (convertible-top
compartment lid) closes automatically.

3. Unlock and open the driver’s door with the Switching off operational readiness
emergency key. (for vehicles with Porsche Entry & Drive)
For this purpose, lift and hold the door handle. Operational readiness of Porsche Entry & Drive is
Insert the emergency key in the door lock, turn switched off after 96 hours for the driver’s door
90° anti-clockwise and remove the emergency and after 36 hours for the passenger's door,
key again. if the vehicle is not unlocked within this time.
4. Release the door handle and open the door by 1. Pull the door handle once to activate the
pulling the door handle again. system again.
5. Switch on the ignition within 15 seconds to 2. Pull the door handle again to open the door.
prevent the alarm system from triggering.
Further procedure for vehicles with
Porsche Entry & Drive:
If the ignition cannot be switched on or if the
engine will not start, the message “Key not
found or key fault Change key position”
will appear on the multi-function display.
6. Turn control unit back to ignition lock
position 0.
The vehicle cannot be unlocked 7. Try to start the engine again.
Remote control of the car key may If the engine will not start, the message ““Key
– fail due to a fault, not found or key fault Change key
– due to a flat key battery, position” will appear again.
– not function correctly due to radio waves The message “Operating device: turn left,
(also radio contact between remote pull off, insert key” appears after approx. 1
control and vehicle in the case of second.
Porsche Entry & Drive). 8. Turn control unit back to ignition lock
If the vehicle cannot be opened, then: position 0 and remove it from the ignition lock.
1. Place the car key at the outside edge of the Switch on the ignition using the ignition key
windshield on the passenger’s side and, at (not the emergency key).
the same time, press button (illustration).
If the vehicle still cannot be opened, then:
2. Remove the emergency key from the car key.
Please see the chapter “EMERGENCY KEY”
on page 17.

Emergency operation – unlocking the 3. Use metal hook A to remove the plastic 4. Turn control unit/ignition key to ignition lock
ignition key/control unit cover B from the ignition lock. position 0 (initial position).
If the vehicle battery is discharged, the ignition key Make sure not to lose the plastic cover B. 5. Press metal hook A into opening C.
can be removed only if the emergency operation You will hear an unlocking noise.
is performed. 6. Remove the control unit/ignition key in initial
Emergency operation must also be performed in position 0.
order to remove the control unit from the ignition 7. Re-fit the plastic cover B.
lock on vehicles with Porsche Entry & Drive.
1. Grasp the fuse box cover on the driver’s side
at the finger hole and pull it off.
2. Unclip metal hook A on the inside of the fuse
box cover.

3. Lift the door handle on the driver’s door

(illustration).
Insert the emergency key in the door lock, turn
90° clockwise and remove the emergency key
again.
Successful locking is indicated by the hazard
warning lights flashing twice.
4. Release the door handle and shut the door.
The driver’s door is now locked.
5. To use the emergency locking function on the
passenger’s door, insert the emergency key
into the door lock on the driver’s door again,
turn 90° clockwise and remove the emergency
key again.
The passenger’s door is now locked.
Information
Door lock under door handle (driver‘s side) Emergency locking of the passenger’s door is not Emergency key
possible if the central locking system is defective.
The vehicle cannot be locked Removing emergency key
This is recognizable by the fact that the 1. Push the release button to the side.
emergency flasher does not flash and there is no Information 2. Pull out the key.
locking noise.
If the central locking system is defective, Insert emergency key
f Push in the key until the release button
The remote control of the key may operating the lock cylinder in the driver’s door will
– fail due to a fault, lock all functioning locking elements of the central engages audibly.
– due to a flat key battery, locking system.
– not function correctly due to radio waves(e.g. f Have faults in the central locking system
mobile phone) in the vicinity of the vehicle repaired by an authorized Porsche dealer. Information
(even radio contact between remote control Different vehicle settings are stored on the
and vehicle in the case of Porsche respective key when the vehicle is locked,
Entry & Drive). provided the vehicle is fitted with the relevant
Emergency locking if the central locking equipment.
system has failed
If the vehicle cannot be locked, then:
1. Remove the emergency key from the car key.
Please see the chapter “EMERGENCY KEY”
on page 17.
2. Open the driver’s door.

Function
If the luggage compartment lid is unlocked with Information
unlocking the handle, the latch striker pops into The lid cannot be opened from the inside if the
the catch-hook position and the lid can be opened battery is disconnected or empty.
from the inside immediately. Safety reasons require that you unscrew the
A warning message in the multi-purpose display latch striker of the lid lock if you plan to put
lights up when unlocking handle is operated. the vehicle out of operation for an extended
f Stop the vehicle immediately when the warning period.
message lights up. f Please consult your authorized Porsche
f Check the luggage compartment. dealer.
f Close the lid. They will advise you about the necessary
measures.
h DANGER Unsecured Luggage
Compartment Lid
If the warning message in the multi-purpose
display lights up when the vehicle is in motion, the
lid may impact in front of the windshield and can
tear off.
Trunk Entrapment Stop the vehicle immediately when the warning
Your vehicle is equipped with an internal trunk message lights up.
release mechanism. f Check the luggage compartment.
A person trapped in the luggage compartment f Close the lid.
can release the lid from the inside using the
unlocking handle.
The handle is fluorescent and glows in the dark.
Information
f When loading the luggage compartment, make
sure that items of luggage or other objects
cannot become caught on the handle.
This could cause the luggage compartment to
open unintentionally.

Seats, Mirrors and Steering Wheel

Seat Adjustment and Head Restraints ............ 32
Front Seats.................................................. 32
Comfort Entry Function ................................. 34
Seat Heating................................................ 35
Seat Ventilation ........................................... 35
Rear Seat Backrests..................................... 35
Safety belts ................................................. 36
Airbag Systems............................................ 38
Child Restraint Systems ................................ 42
LATCH Child Seat System ............................. 46
Roll-Over Protection...................................... 48
Exterior Mirrors............................................ 49
Automatic Anti-Dazzle Interior and
Exterior Mirrors............................................ 50
Steering Wheel Heating................................. 51
Steering Wheel Adjustment ........................... 51
Multi-function Steering Wheel......................... 52
Sun Visors ................................................... 53
Vanity Mirror ................................................ 53
Seats, Mirrors and Steering Wheel 31

Seat Adjustment and Head f Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended, Front Seats
since they may depress the setting buttons
Restraints and crush themselves or another occupant. Seat position
h DANGER Improper Safety Belt A ergonomically correct sitting position is
Use NOTICE important for safe and fatigue-free driving. We
recommend the following procedure for adjusting
Safety belts only offer protection when the Risk of damage to windshield, sun visor, etc. when the driver’s seat to suit individual requirements:
backrest is upright and the belts are properly the seat is adjusted or folded back or forward. 1. Adjust the seat height to give yourself enough
positioned on the body. f Adjust the seat so that the seat backrest is not headroom and a good overview of the vehicle.
Improperly positioned safety belts or safety belts in contact with any other object. 2. Adjust the seat in fore-and-aft direction so that
worn by passengers in an excessively reclined
your leg is not fully straight and your entire foot
position can cause serious personal injury or The driver and front passenger seats provide
is on the pedal when pressing the pedals fully.
death in an accident. integrated head restraints in the backrests. The
f Do not operate the car with the driver or
3. Grip the top half of the steering wheel. Set the
head restraints are not adjustable. The rear seats
backrest angle and the steering wheel position
passenger backrests excessively reclined. do not provide head restraints.
f Please see the chapter “SEAT POSITION”
so that your arms are almost outstretched.
h WARNING Failure to Adjust Head However, your shoulders must still rest on the
on page 32.
and Backrests backrest.
4. Adjust the seat fore-and-aft setting if
h WARNING Seat Adjustment While All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the necessary.
Driving
headrests and backrests are placed in their Adjusting the seat
The seat may move further than desired if you
proper positions so that the risk of neck injuries is
adjust it when driving. You could lose control of the
minimized in the event of a crash. h WARNING Seat Adjustment While
vehicle.
f Adjust the backrest's inclination such that the
f Do not adjust seats while the vehicle is in mo-
Driving
headrest is in an upright position. The seat may move further than desired if you
tion.The backrest locks must be engaged at all
f Driver and passengers should be seated attempt to adjust it when driving. You may lose
times while the vehicle is in motion.
upright and in the center of their seats. control of the vehicle.
f Do not adjust the seat when driving.
h CAUTION Seat Adjustment
If persons or animals are in the movement range h CAUTION Seat Adjustment
of the seat during seat adjustment, parts of the
If persons or animals are within the range of
body could get trapped or crushed.
f Adjust the seat so that no-one is put a risk.
movement of the seat, they could become
f Do not activate the comfort memory button if
trapped or crushed when you adjust the seat.
f Adjust the seat so that no-one is put at risk.
there is any risk of the seat crushing the
occupant.
f Cancel automatic adjustment by pressing any
of the seat adjustment buttons.
32 Seats, Mirrors and Steering Wheel

Sports seat/Sports seat plus Fully-electric sports seat Adaptive sports seat plus
1 Height adjustment 1 Seat angle adjustment 1 Seat angle adjustment
2 Backrest angle adjustment 2 Height adjustment 2 Height adjustment
f Press each control in the direction indicated 3 Seat cushion depth adjustment 3 Seat cushion depth adjustment
by the arrows until the desired setting or the 4 Seat fore-and-aft adjustment 4 Seat cushion side bolster adjustment
limit position is reached. 5 Backrest angle adjustment 5 Backrest side bolster adjustment
3 Seat fore-and-aft adjustment, mechanical
f Raise locking lever. Move seat to desired
6 Lumbar support adjustment 6 Seat fore-and-aft adjustment
f Press each control in the direction indicated 7 Backrest angle adjustment
position and release lever. by the arrows until the desired setting is 8 Lumbar support adjustment
f Press each control in the direction indicated
Ensure that the seat engages correctly. reached.
by the arrows until the desired setting is
reached.

Comfort Entry Function Entering the vehicle

The Easy Entry function makes it easier for you to Driver’s seat and steering wheel are in their
get in and out of the vehicle. Comfort Entry positions.
Once the ignition key is inserted or once the
h CAUTION Easy Entry Function ignition is switched on in the case of vehicles with
If persons or animals are within the range of Porsche Entry & Drive, the seat and steering
movement of the seat, they could be trapped or wheel move to the stored position.
crushed when the seat moves into or out of easy
entry position. Information
f Switch off the Easy Entry function if a person When the key is changed, the seat may move to
is behind the driver’s seat. its new, key-specific entry position.
Prerequisite
– The function must be activated on the multi- Information
function display. Manual intervention in the seat setting interrupts
For information on switching the Easy Entry the Easy Entry function.
function on and off:
f Please see the chapter “SWITCHING
The driving position must then be set manually.
Seat backrest
Folding forward COMFORT ENTRY ON AND OFF” on page 122.
f Pull up lever in the side part of the backrest Leaving the vehicle
and fold the backrest forward. The steering wheel moves upwards:
Folding back – After the ignition key is removed or after the
f Tilt back and engage the backrest so that it ignition is switched off and the driver’s door is
cannot tip forward when you brake. opened on vehicles with
Porsche Entry & Drive.
Storing seat settings The driver’s seat moves to the rear:
For information on storing and retrieving the seat – After opening the driver's door and removing
settings: the car key or after opening the driver's door
f Please see the chapter “STORING PERSONAL on vehicles with Porsche Entry & Drive.
SETTINGS” on page 143.

Seat Heating Seat Ventilation Rear Seat Backrests

The seat heating is ready for operation when The seat ventilation is ready for operation when Extra storage space is gained by folding the rear
the engine is running. The heating power can be the engine is running. The seat ventilation can be seat backrests forward.
adjusted to one of three settings by repeatedly adjusted to one of three settings by repeatedly Folding forward
f Pull lever forward and fold the backrest
pressing the heated seat button. pressing the seat ventilation button.
Switching on Switching on forward.
f Press heated seat button (repeatedly). f Press the seat ventilation button (repeatedly). Folding back
f Tilt the backrest back until you feel it click into
The number of illuminated indicator lights The number of illuminated indicator lights
shows the selected heat setting. shows the selected ventilation setting.
place. Ensure that the safety belt is properly
Switching off Switching off routed.
f Press the heated seat button (repeatedly) f Press the seat ventilation button (repeatedly)
until all indicator lights go out. until all indicator lights go out.
Seat heating is not available when the interior Below 59 °F (15 °C), the seat ventilation cannot be
temperature is high. switched on, in order to prevent excessive
If the charging condition of the battery is critical, cooling.
the seat heating function is restricted initially and If the charging condition of the battery is critical,
then switched off. the seat ventilation function is restricted initially
and then switched off.

Safety belts f The shoulder belt should always rest on your h DANGER Using Damaged Safety
upper body. The shoulder belt should never be
h DANGER
Belts
Failure to Use Safety worn behind your back or under your arm.
Belts f For maximum effectiveness, the lap belt Damaged, heavily stressed or worn safety belts
should be worn low across the hips. cannot protect the body sufficiently in the event of
Safety belts cannot protect the body if they are
f an accident.
f Keep belt buckles free of any obstruction that
not fastened. Improperly worn safety belts Pregnant women should position the belt as
increase the risk of injury in the event of an low as possible across the pelvis. Make sure it
may prevent a secure locking.
f Belts that have been subjected to excessive
accident. is not pressing against the abdomen.
Always make sure your and your passengers' f Belts should not be worn twisted.
safety belts are properly fastened when seated in f Do not wear belts over rigid or breakable stretch forces in an accident must be
objects in or on your clothing, such as eye inspected or replaced to ensure their
the vehicle.
f For your and your passengers' protection, use glasses, pens, keys, etc. as these may cause continued effectiveness in restraining you.
injury. The same applies to belt tensioner systems
safety belts at all times while the vehicle is in
motion. f Several layers of heavy clothing may interfere which have been triggered. In addition, the
f Use appropriate child restraint systems for all
anchor points of the belts should be checked.
f If safety belts do not work properly, see your
with proper positioning of belts.
small children. f Belts must not rub against sharp objects or
f Safety belts must be positioned on the body as
authorized Porsche dealer immediately.
f If the belts show damage to webbing, bindings,
damage may occur to the belt.
to restrain the upper body and lap from sliding f Two occupants must never share the same
belt at the same time. buckles or retractors, they should be replaced
forward. Improperly positioned safety belts
to ensure safe operation.
f Do not modify or disassemble the safety belts
can cause serious personal injury in case of an
accident.
in your vehicle.
f The belts must be kept clean or the retractors
may not work properly.
Please see the chapter “CLEANING THE
SAFETY BELTS” on page 237.
f Never bleach or dye safety belts.
f Do not allow safety belts to retract until they
are completely dry after cleaning or this may
cause damage to the belt.

Safety-belt pretensioner
Front safety belts are tightened in an accident, Information
depending on the force of the collision. The belt may be blocked if the vehicle is standing
The safety-belt pretensioners are triggered: at an angle or the belt is pulled out using a jerking
– In the event of front and rear impact movement.
– In the event of side impact The belt cannot be pulled out while accelerating
– If the vehicle turns over and slowing down, when cornering and when
driving uphill.
Information 4. Insert the belt tongue into the appropriate
The safety-belt pretensioner system can be buckle on the inboard side of the seat until it
triggered only once; the system must then be locks securely with an audible click.
replaced. 5. Make sure that belts are not trapped or twisted
Work may be carried out on the safety-belt and that they are not rubbing on sharp edges.
pretensioner system only by qualified specialist 6. The horizontal section of the belt should
employees from an authorized Porsche dealer. always fit snugly across the pelvis. Therefore,
Smoke is released when the safety-belt after fastening the belt, always pull the
pretensioners are triggered. This does not diagonal part of the belt upward.
indicate a fire in the vehicle.
Fasten safety belt Pregnant women should position the belt as
1. Assume a comfortable sitting position. low as possible across the pelvis, and ensure
Safety belt Warning light and warning 2. Adjust the seat backrest so that the belt that it is not pressing against the abdomen.
message always rests on your upper body and runs 7. Also pull on the diagonal section of the belt
across the middle of your shoulder. now and again during the journey to ensure
An audio-visual warning system is
3. Grasp the belt tongue and pull the belt in that the horizontal section remains tight.
interconnected with the driver’s safety belt.
a slow, continuous motion across your chest
Every time the ignition is turned on, the gong will and lap.
sound for about 6 seconds to remind driver and
passenger to buckle up.
In addition, the gong will sound for approximately
90 seconds if vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph
(24 km/h).
The safety belt warning lights in the instrument
panel and multi-purpose display will go off as soon
as the driver has buckled up.

Airbag Systems The front airbags are located under the padded
steering wheel panel on the driver’s side, in the
The vehicle is equipped with airbag and lap/
dashboard on the passenger's side, and in the
shoulder belt at both front seating positions. The
knee area for both the driver and the passenger.
airbag is a supplemental restraint at those seating
The side airbags for the front seats are installed
positions.
on the side in the seat backrests.
The airbags in combination with the safety belts
The head airbags are installed in the door linings.
make up a safety system which offers the driver
and the passenger the greatest known protection
from injuries in case of accident. Information
Your vehicle is equipped with occupant sensing for To minimize the risk of severe injury or death in the
the passenger's seat in accordance with event of a crash, all occupants, including the
U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 208. driver, should always wear their safety belts
Even if your vehicle is equipped with airbags, the whether or not an airbag is also provided at their
safety belts must be worn at all times, seating position.
because the front airbag system is only actuated
by frontal collisions with an impact of sufficient h DANGER Safety Belts and
severity. Positioning
Opening belt buckle an removing belt Below the deployment threshold of the airbag Airbags only can offer protection, if all occupants
1. Hold the belt tongue. system, and during types of collisions which do fasten their safety belts and retain a proper sitting
2. Press the red button on the belt buckle. not cause the actuation of the system, the safety position.
3. Guide the belt tongue to approx. 7 cm below belts provide the primary protection to the To provide optimal occupant protection, airbags
the deflection bracket of the strap reel and occupants when correctly worn. Therefore, all must inflate at very high speed. If you are not
lock using the plastic slide (figure). persons within the vehicle must wear safety wearing your safety belt or are too close to the
The function of the plastic slide is to hold the belts at all times (in many states, state law airbag when it is deployed, inflating airbags can
belt tongue in an easily accessible position. requires the use of safety belts) to minimize the result in serious personal injury or death.
risk of severe injury or death in the event of a f Always fasten safety belts.
crash. f Make sure there are no people, animals or
f Please see the chapter “SAFETY BELTS” objects between the driver or passenger and
on page 36. the area into which the airbags inflate.

f Sit back as far from the dashboard or steering f No objects should be placed over or near the f If the warning light comes on, the airbag
wheel as is practical, while still maintaining full airbag on the instrument panel, because any system should be repaired immediately by
vehicle control. such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is your authorized Porsche dealer.
f Always hold the steering wheel by the outer in a crash severe enough to cause the airbag f Using accessories not approved by Porsche
rim. Never rest your hands on the center of the to inflate. can cause the occupant sensing to be
steering wheel where the airbag module is f Give your passenger all of the information in impaired.
located. this chapter. f Do not squeeze objects, such as the fire
f Always keep feet in the footwell while driving. extinguisher, or first aid kit under the seat.
Do not put feet on the dashboard or the seat h DANGER Modification to Airbag f Only have seats removed and installed by an
area. Do not lean against the inside of the door System authorized Porsche dealer so that occupant
or outside the window while the vehicle is A modified airbag system cannot offer protection. sensing components will not be damaged.
moving. They may not trigger or could trigger in an
uncontrolled way. An uncontrolled triggering of the
h DANGER Safe Storage of Objects airbag system can result in serious personal injury
Information
or death. Airbag components (e.g. steering wheel, door
Objects and load have to be stored securely to
keep from causing injury. f Do not modify the seat coverings, since such lining, seats) may be disassembled only by an
f Do not transport heavy objects on or in front of changes can block the seat-mounted side authorized Porsche dealer.
the passenger seat. These could impair the airbag. Do not attach additional cushions, f When disposing of a used airbag unit, our
protective coverings, or pillows to the seats. safety instructions must be followed. These
function of the airbags, the safety belts, and
Do not affix things to the seats or cover them instructions can be obtained at any authorized
occupant sensing.
f Do not hang objects (e.g., jackets, coats, coat with other materials. Do not cover the back of Porsche dealer.
hangers) over the backrest. the backrest. Do not make changes to the
f Objects must not protrude out of the door seats, the cushion or foam, the occupant Function of the airbag system
storage compartment. sensor, and to the seat base frame. Airbags are a supplemental safety system. Your
f Do not add any additional coverings or stickers f No changes must be made to the wiring or primary protection comes from your safety belts.
to the steering wheel or in the area of the components of the airbag system. Doing so The front airbags are triggered during a frontal
passenger airbag, side airbags, knee airbags, may disable the airbag system or cause collision of sufficient force and direction.
and head airbags. Doing so may adversely inadvertent inflation. In the event of a side impact of corresponding
affect the functioning of the airbag system or f Do not install any wiring for electrical force, the side airbag on the impact side is
cause harm to the occupants if the airbag accessory equipment in the vicinity of the triggered.
system should deploy. airbag wiring harnesses. Doing so may disable
Do not use protective seat covers. the airbag system or cause inadvertent
inflation.

The inflation process generates the amount of gas Your Porsche vehicle is equipped with Advanced airbag
required to fill the airbags at the necessary electronically controlled systems that help to Your vehicle is equipped with occupant sensing for
pressure in fractions of a second. ensure your vehicle operates properly. These the passenger's seat in accordance with
Airbags help to protect the head and body, while systems monitor the operation of various systems U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 208.
simultaneously damping the motion of the driver and electronically store information that is useful Depending on the weight, body positioning and
and passenger in the impact direction in the event to service technicians when they need to diagnose shape acting on the passenger's seat, the
of a frontal impact or side impact. and repair these systems. passenger’s airbag will automatically be switched
In order to help provide protection in severe Your vehicle is equipped with crash-sensing on and off.
collisions which can cause death and serious and diagnostic devices that may record Depending on the angle and force of impact, the
injury, airbags must inflate extremely rapidly. Such information at the time of a collision, passenger's airbag which is switched-on will be
high speed inflation has a negative but including whether the airbag and seatbelt triggered during a collision.
unavoidable side effect, which is that it can and pretensioners deployed and whether the Precondition for switching the passenger's airbag
does cause injuries, including facial and arm safety belt was in use. on and off, depending on weight, body positioning
abrasions, bruising and broken bones. You can To retrieve this information, special equipment is and shape:
help minimize such injuries by always wearing your needed and access to the vehicle or feature that – Ignition is switched on.
safety belts. stores that data is required. Some states only
There are many types of accidents in which allow access to such information under restricted h WARNING Improper Front
airbags are not expected to deploy. These include circumstances, including: Passenger Seating
accidents where the airbags would provide no – In response to a request of police or other Improper seating can unintentionally impair
benefit, such as a rear impact against your government office; or operation of occupant sensing of the passenger’s
vehicle. Other accidents where the airbags are – with the consent of the registered owner, or if airbag.
designed not to deploy are those where the risk of the vehicle is leased, with the lessee, or If the weight of an adult on the passenger's seat is
injury from the airbag deployment could exceed – through a discovery process in litigation; or as not properly maintained, the passenger's airbag
any protective benefits, such as in low speed otherwise permitted or required by law. may be switched off.
accidents or higher speed accidents where the Your rights with respect to the information f Select an upright seat position, and do not
vehicle decelerates over a longer time. Since discussed above may vary from state to state. support weight on the armrests or center
airbag deployment does not occur in all accidents, Check your state law for further information. console, or lean out of the window while
this further emphasizes the need for you and your driving.
passengers to always wear safety belts. Always keep feet positioned on the floor in the
footwell while driving. Do not put feet on the
dashboard or the seat area.

Seat adjustment for the passenger’s seat Vehicle modifications to accommodate

persons with disabilities
h WARNING Reclining Passenger
Because modifications to your vehicle could
Seatback
compromise your advanced airbag system,
Safety belts only offer protection when the please call 1-800-PORSCHE prior to having your
backrest is positioned at an upright seating angle vehicle modified.
and the belts are properly positioned on the body.
f Do not operate the car with the driver or h DANGER
passenger backrests excessively reclined. To reduce risk of injury or death to a child from an
inflating airbag in an accident, Porsche strongly
recommends:
Before transporting a child on the passenger seat:
f Please see the chapter “PASS AIR BAG OFF
INDICATOR LAMP DOES NOT LIGHT UP”
on page 42.
f Under all normal circumstances, the child seat
must be placed in the rear.
Do not use a child restraint system in the front PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
passenger seat.
Information
Automatic deactivation of the passenger Depending on the weight, body positioning and
airbag shape acting on the passenger's seat, it can occur
Before transporting a child on the passenger seat: in the case of heavier children that the passenger
f Please see the chapter “CHILD RESTRAINT airbag is active or, in the case of very light adults
SYSTEMS” on page 42. or young persons, that the passenger airbag is
– When an up to one-year old child is seated deactivated.
in the child restraint system, the front airbag is The condition of the passenger airbag system is
automatically deactivated on the passenger shown by the indicator lamp in the overhead
side. operating console.
– When an adult is seated in the passenger’s If in doubt:
seat the front airbag is automatically activated. f Fasten the forward facing child restraint
system on the rear seat or transport the
passenger on the rear seat.

Airbag Warning light Child Restraint Systems

Information Faults are indicated by a warning light on the
f After switching on the ignition, the PASS AIR
Porsche recommends that all infants and children
tachometer. be restrained in child restraint systems at all times
BAG OFF warning light lights up for a few The airbag warning light illuminates when the while the vehicle is in motion in accordance with
seconds as a check. electronic monitoring of the airbag system applicable laws.
detects a malfunction of the sensors, safety belt When possible, use only child restraint systems
PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up system, occupant detection system, PASS AIR recommended by Porsche. These systems have
The passenger airbag is switched off. BAG OFF indicator lamp, related wiring, airbag been tested and adjusted to the interior of your
modules and control units. Porsche and the appropriate child weight groups.
f In the following cases you should
PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp does not
light up Other systems have not been tested and could
immediately consult an authorized entail an increased risk of injury.
The passenger airbag is active and ready for
Porsche dealer in order to assure the The use of infant or child restraints is required by
operation.
airbag system is functioning properly: law in all 50 US states and the Canadian
h DANGER – If the warning light does not light up when the provinces. The child restraint system should be
ignition is switched on or one that complies with U.S. Federal/Canadian
Risk of serious personal injury or death due to the
– If the warning light does not go out once the Motor Vehicle Safety Standards and should be
passenger airbag triggering unintentionally.
engine is running or secured by a lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt
When the ignition is on and the up to one-year old – If the warning light appears while driving.
child is seated in the child restraint system on the or for child seats equipped with the LATCH system
passenger seat the indicator lamp “PASS AIR BAG (Lower Anchorage and Tether for Children, also
OFF“ must be on. Information known as ISOFIX) to the LATCH anchorages.
If the “PASS AIR BAG OFF” indicator lamp does not If you sell your Porsche, notify the purchaser that All child restraint systems are designed to be
light up, it could indicate a fault in the system, and the vehicle is equipped with airbags, and refer secured in vehicle seats by lapbelts or the lapbelt
the airbag could inflate in a collision, placing the them to the chapter “Airbag systems“ in the portion of a lap-shoulder belt.
child at risk of death or severe injury from the owner’s manual (safety and disposal rules). You can obtain child seats that are LATCH
inflating airbag. Further information on the airbag system can be compatible at your authorized Porsche dealer.
In this case: found on stickers attached to the sun visors, as f Always observe the separate installation
f Child restraint systems facing forwards: well as on all airbag components. instructions for your child seat.
Install on the rear seats. For special recommendations on the use of child h DANGER
f Child restraint systems facing rearwards:
Improper use of child
restraints:
f Please see the chapter “CHILD RESTRAINT
restraint
Do not drive with a rearward facing child
restraint system. Children could be endangered in a crash if their
SYSTEMS” on page 42.
f Have the fault remedied at your nearest child restraints are not properly secured in the
vehicle.
f Make sure that all child restraints are properly
authorized Porsche dealer.
secured.

A statement by the seat manufacturer of h DANGER Direction of installation for child restraint
Improper Use of Child
compliance with this federal standard can be systems
Restraint
f Follow all child restraint instructions and
found on the instruction label on the restraint and According to accident statistics, children are safer
in the instruction manual provided with the when properly restrained in the rear seating
restraint. warnings in this manual.
positions than in the front seating positions.
h DANGER Child Restraint in Front f When using an infant or child restraint system, Under all normal circumstances, the forward
Seat be sure to follow all manufacturer's facing child seat must be placed in the rear.
instructions on installation and use. f Do not use a child restraint system in the front
f
The use of a child restraint system in the front
Infants and small children should neither be passenger seat.
passenger’s seat can result in serious personal
held on the lap, nor should they share a safety
injury or death to the child from an airbag Group 0 and 0+: Children up to 29 lbs
belt with another occupant while the vehicle is
deployment. (13 kg)
in motion.
f
To reduce risk of injury from an inflating airbag in Children of this weight must be transported in a
Children too big for child restraint systems
an accident, Porsche strongly recommends:
f Please see the chapter “PASS AIR BAG OFF
must use regular safety belts. A shoulder belt restraint system which is installed on the
can be used providing it does not cross the passenger‘s seat facing rearward.
face or the neck of the child. Group I: Children in between 20 lbs (9 kg)
f
on page 42.
Choose a child restraint system according to and 40 lbs (18 kg)
the weight of the child.
f
Children of this weight are transported in child
Child restraint systems that are damaged or
restraint systems facing forward.
have been heavily stressed in an accident must
Whenever possible, these child restraint systems
be replaced immediately.
f
should be installed on the rear seats.
Children could be endangered in a crash if their
child restraints are not properly secured in Group II: Children in between 33 lbs (15 kg)
vehicle. and 55 lbs (25 kg)
f Do not affix objects to child restraint systems Children of this weight are transported in child
or cover them with other materials. restraint systems facing forward.
f For maximum safety and protection, do not Whenever possible, these child restraint systems
use a child restraint system in the front should be installed on the rear seats.
passenger seat.
Group III: Children in between 49 lbs (22 kg)
and 80 lbs (36 kg)
Children of this weight are transported in child
restraint systems facing forward.
Whenever possible, these child restraint systems
should be installed on the rear seats.
If a child restraint system must be fastened to the
passenger’s seat, the passenger’s seat must be
adjusted to the upper rear position.

Using child restraint systems in the front Child restraint system for up to one-year old
Information passenger seat children
If a child seat with top tether is adapted for use on If the child restraint system must be fastened to
h DANGER Child Restraint in Front
the front seat, do not use Toptether in the rear. the passenger’s seat in exceptional cases:
Seat
– When an up to one-year old child is seated
The use of a child restraint system in the front in the child restraint system, the front airbag is
passenger seat can result in serious personal automatically deactivated on the passenger
injury or death to the child from an airbag side.
deployment. f Make sure that the “PASS AIR BAG OFF”
To reduce risk of injury from an inflating airbag in indicator lamp lights up.
an accident, Porsche strongly recommends: f Adjust the passenger’s seat as far away from
f Please see the chapter “PASS AIR BAG OFF the airbag as possible.
on page 42. h DANGER Child Seat Detection
Fault
However, there may be serious situations where it
When the ignition is on and the up to one-year old
might be necessary to place a child in the front
child is seated in the child restraint system on the
seat so that he/she can be kept under direct
passenger seat the indicator lamp “PASS AIR BAG
observation to prevent an immediate risk to the
OFF” must be on.
child (for example, while driving to the doctor or
If the “PASS AIR BAG OFF” indicator lamp does not
hospital). The following instructions are provided
light up, it could indicate a fault in the system, and
to you solely for that purpose.
f Seek appropriate advice from your authorized the airbag could inflate in a collision, placing the
child at risk of death or severe injury from the
Porsche dealer about the possible installation
inflating airbag.
of a Porsche child restraint system.
f If a child restraint system must be fastened to In this case:
the passenger's seat, adjust the passenger's f Child restraint systems facing forwards:
Install on the rear seats.
f Child restraint systems facing rearwards:
seat as far away from the airbag as possible.
f If emergency or other serious conditions
Do not drive with a rearward facing child
require a child to be placed in the front seat,
restraint system.
f Have the fault remedied at your nearest
exercise extreme caution and defensive
driving of your vehicle.

Child restraint system for children older than Automatic locking retractor
one year The safety belts for the front passenger and rear
Your vehicle is equipped with occupant sensing for seats are equipped with an automatic locking
the passenger's seat in accordance with retractor for securing the child restraint system.
U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 208. When activated, this retractor allows you to
Depending on the weight, body positioning and securely fasten the child restraint system in place
shape acting on the passenger's seat, the so that inadvertent movements will not occur.
passenger's airbag will automatically be switched
h DANGER Child Seat in Front
on or off.
f In case of doubt, fasten the child restraint The use of a child restraint system on the front
system on the rear bench. passenger seat can result in serious personal
Small adult passengers injury or death to the child from an airbag
f Make sure that the PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator
deployment.
To reduce risk of injury from an inflating airbag in
lamp does not light up.
an accident, Porsche strongly recommends:
h CAUTION Adult Use of Front Seats f Under all normal circumstances, the child seat
must be placed in the rear.
When the ignition is on and the small adult
Do not use a child restraint system on the front PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
passenger is seated on the passenger seat, the
passenger seat.
indicator lamp “PASS AIR BAG OFF” must be off. h DANGER Adjusting Child seat
If the “PASS AIR BAG OFF” indicator lamp lights up, If there are emergency reasons for transporting a After Fastening
it could indicate a fault in the system. child in the front passenger seat, use a child
f After fastening the child restraint system, do
In this case: restraint seat and the automatic locking retractor
f Have the fault remedied at your nearest
not adjust the seat in any direction.
function. Follow the other safety instructions on
Moving the seat could adjust the safety belt
authorized Porsche dealer. the previous pages in this section.
against the child restraint and cause the “PASS AIR
BAG OFF” indicator lamp to go off and activate the
airbag system.
f Check the condition of the passenger airbag
system shown by the indicator lamp in the
overhead operating console.

Activating the automatic locking retractor LATCH Child Seat System

1. If a child restraint system must be fastened to LATCH child seats are the best option for
the passenger's seat, adjust the passenger's mounting a child seat in your Porsche.
seat as far away from the airbag as possible. Such LATCH child seats can be installed only using
2. Position child seat according to the child seat’s the LATCH system in the rear seats.
manufacturer instructions.
Use only child restraint systems with the LATCH
3. Pull the safety belt retractor completely out. At
system (Lower Anchorage and Tether for
this point the locking mechanism is activated.
Children) recommended by Porsche.
4. Insert the safety belt tongue into the buckle
These systems have been tested and adjusted to
and make certain that it is properly latched.
the interior of your Porsche and the appropriate
Make no more adjustments to the seat.
child weight groups.
5. Allow the safety belt to retract until it is tight on
Other systems have not been tested and could
the child restraint system. You may further
entail an increased risk of injury.
tighten the belt by pulling on it to allow more of
You can obtain child seats that are LATCH-
it to retract.
compatible at your authorized Porsche dealer.
Make sure that excessive safety belt forces do
not occur by moving the seat with the child Always observe the separate installation
seat installed. instructions for your child seat.
Using a LATCH child seat system
Releasing the safety belt The rear seats are equipped with the LATCH
1. Unbuckle the safety belt latch. system (lower anchorage and anchor points for
2. Then make certain that the belt has fully tether straps on the back of the backrests).
retracted. At this point the automatic locking
Removing the backrest lower section
feature will be disengaged.
Seek appropriate advice from your authorized Detach the backrest lower section at the top
Porsche dealer about the possible installation center (Velcro strap) and disengage from the
of a Porsche child restraint system. ISOFIX brackets.
Markings on the right and left for the LATCH child
seat anchorage can be found on the backrest
lower section of the rear seats.
The anchor bars A for the LATCH child seat
anchorage can be found under the backrest lower
section.

Child Restraint Anchorages

h WARNING Misuse of Child seat
Restraint Anchorages
Child restraint anchorages are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by correctly
fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are
they to be used for adults safety belts or
harnesses.
f Do not misuse the child restraint anchorages.
Only attach one child seat tether per
anchorage.
f They are not designed to withstand loads
imposed by adults.
f Please see the chapter “AUTOMATIC LOCKING
RETRACTOR” on page 45.
If your child restraint seat or seats require the use
of a tether strap, you will want to use the anchor Installing a LATCH child seat system 3. If the child restraint seat or seats require the
points provided behind the rear seat backrests. f Always observe the separate installation use of a tether strap, attach the tether strap B
To ensure proper installation, see your authorized instructions for your child seat. to the anchor point behind the rear seat
Porsche dealer. 1. Secure the child seat to retaining lugs A as backrests and pull it tight.
outlined in the operating manual for the child
seat.
2. Pull the child seat to check that both fastening
points are engaged correctly.

Roll-Over Protection h DANGER Airbag Warning light

On the Cabriolet, a roll-over protection system If the roll-over protection system is faulty, the
A roll-over protection system that has been
installed behind the rear seats is extended within airbag warning light on the instrument cluster will
tampered with or obstructed in its movement may
fractions of a second in the event of an accident. light up. Extension of the extendable assemblies is
malfunction, resulting in serious or fatal injury.
This generates a loud noise. If necessary, the not ensured.
seat-belt tensioners for the front seats will be
A roll-over protection system that has been f Have the fault repaired immediately at an
tampered with does not offer any protection. It authorized Porsche dealer.
activated.
f Please see the chapter “SAFETY-BELT
may be triggered inadvertently, or not respond
when needed. Triggered roll-over protection system
PRETENSIONER” on page 37.
f Do not modify the wiring or components of the f Never press the extendable assemblies back
The roll-over protection system consists of two roll-over protection system. into the original position.
extendable assemblies which, together with the f Keep body parts and objects out of the area of f Please contact an authorized Porsche dealer.
windshield frame, ensure sufficient headroom for movement of the extendable assemblies.
all occupants if the vehicle rolls over. f Do not open the covers of the extendable
assemblies.
f Make sure that no water or cleaning agents get
NOTICE
Risk of damage to the convertible top and roll-over into the roll-over protection system when
protection when opening and closing the cleaning the vehicle.
f If the roll-over protection system is in any way
convertible top.
Extended roll-over protection will obstruct the
faulty, please contact an authorized Porsche
movement of the convertible top.
f Do not open or close the convertible top with
dealer to do this work.
the roll-over protection extended.
Information
If the roll-over protection is triggered when the
convertible top is closed, the rear window is
destroyed.

Exterior Mirrors
The convex mirror on the passenger’s side and the
aspherical mirror on the driver’s side provide
a larger field of view.
h WARNING Judging Distance in
Convex Side Mirror
Vehicles or objects appear smaller in convex
mirrors and further away than they are in reality.
f Bear this distortion in mind when estimating
the distance of vehicles behind you and when
reversing into a parking space.
f Also make use of the interior mirror for judging
distance.
NOTICE
Risk of damage to the exterior mirrors when
A - Exterior mirror selection – driver’s side 1. Press selection button A for the driver’s side
washing the vehicle in a car wash.
f Fold in exterior mirrors before using the car
B - Exterior mirror selection – passenger's side and selection button B for the passenger’s
C - Adjusting exterior mirrors
side.
wash. D - Folding in exterior mirrors electrically (where
equipped) The indicator light on the pressed button
lights up.
Adjusting exterior mirrors 2. Move the exterior mirrors to the correct
The electrical exterior mirror adjuster is ready for position by pressing the adjustment button C.
operation:
If the electrical adjustment facility fails
f Adjust the mirror by pressing on the mirror
– With ignition switched on.
– After the ignition is switched off and before the
driver’s or passenger’s door is first opened, face.
but for a maximum of 10 minutes. Folding in exterior mirrors manually
f Swivel the mirror housing inwards by hand as
far as it will go.
Folding out exterior mirrors manually
f Swivel the mirror housing outwards by hand as
far as it will go.

Folding exterior mirrors in and Storing exterior mirror settings

out electrically On vehicles with memory, individual exterior mirror
f Press button D. settings can be stored on the person buttons on
Both exterior mirrors fold in and out the driver’s side and on the car key.
automatically. For further information on retrieving and storing
vehicle settings:
f PLEASE SEE THE CHAPTER “COMFORT
If the electrical adjustment facility fails
f Fold mirror in or out manually.
ENTRY FUNCTION” on page 34.
Information Exterior mirror heating

The exterior mirror heating is activated
At speeds greater than approx. 30 mph (50 km/
automatically when the heated rear window is
h), the exterior mirrors can no longer be folded in.
switched on while the engine is running.
Folding exterior mirrors in and out For information on switching on the heated rear
window:
f Please see the chapter “HEATED REAR
automatically
The exterior mirrors are folded in automatically
WINDOW/ EXTERIOR MIRROR HEATING”
after the vehicle is locked.
on page 60. Automatic Anti-Dazzle Interior and
Prerequisite:
If the charging condition of the battery is critical,
– The function is activated on the multi-function
the exterior mirror heating function is restricted
Exterior Mirrors
display. The interior mirror’s reflection is undistorted.
initially and then switched off.
Folding exterior mirrors out automatically Sensors on the front and rear sides of the interior
f Switch on ignition.
Swivelling down mirror glass as mirror measure the incident light. The mirror
parking aid automatically changes to anti-dazzle position or
The exterior mirrors fold out.
When reverse gear is engaged, the mirror on the reverts to its normal state, depending on the light
passenger’s side swivels down slightly to show intensity.
Information the curb area.
The exterior mirrors do not fold out automatically f Please see the chapter “SWIVELLING DOWN Information
after the ignition is switched on if they were folded MIRROR GLASS AS PARKING AID”
in manually using the button D. on page 210. The incident light within the detection area of light
sensor C must not be restricted (e.g. by stickers
If the electrical adjustment facility fails on the rear window).
f Fold the mirror outwards by hand as far as Switching off automatic anti-dazzle function
f Press button B.
it will go.
The indicator light A goes out.

Steering Wheel Adjustment

Information
The steering wheel can be adjusted electrically in
The anti-dazzle function switches off four directions depending on the vehicle
automatically if: equipment.
– Reverse gear is engaged or
– Interior lighting is switched on. h WARNING Steering Wheel
Adjustment While
Switching on automatic anti-dazzle function Driving
f Press button B. The steering wheel may move further than desired
The indicator light A lights up. if you attempt to adjust it when driving.
You may lose control of the vehicle.
h CAUTION Electrolyte fluid may f Do not adjust the steering wheel when driving.
escape if the mirror
glass is broken h CAUTION Memory Steering Wheel
Electrolyte fluid may escape from broken mirror Movement
glass. This fluid irritates the skin and eyes.
f If the electrolyte fluid should come into contact
If persons or animals are in the movement range
of the steering wheel during adjustment or if the
with the skin or eyes, rinse it off immediately Steering Wheel Heating person buttons are pressed unintentionally when
with clean water. the vehicle is at a standstill, parts of the body
The steering wheel heating can be switched on
Seek medical attention if necessary. could get trapped or crushed.
and off using the button on the rear of the steering
wheel when the ignition is switched on. f Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended.
NOTICE
Switching steering wheel heating on/off
f Press button.
Risk of damage to paintwork, leather, plastic
parts and clothing.
Electrolyte fluid can be removed only while it is The message “Steering wheel heating
still wet. switched on” or “Steering wheel heating
f Clean the affected parts with water. switched off” appears on the multi-function
display for 2 seconds.
Automatic anti-dazzle exterior mirror
The exterior mirrors change to anti-dazzle position
automatically in synchronization with the interior
mirror.

Multi-function Steering Wheel

h WARNING
Setting and operating
when driving
You may be distracted from paying attention to
the road if you set or operate the multi-function
display, radio, navigation system, telephone or
other equipment when driving. You may lose
control of the vehicle.
f Operate the equipment when driving only if the
traffic situation allows you to do so safely.
f Carry out any complicated operating or setting
procedures only when the vehicle is stationary.
Depending on the equipment in your vehicle, you
can use the function keys of the multi-function
steering wheel to operate the following Porsche
communication systems:
Adjusting steering wheel – Telephone Readiness of the multi-functional steering
f Move the control switch under the steering – PCM wheel for operation
column in the relevant direction until the – CDR-31 – With ignition switched on.
desired setting is reached. – Multi-function display in the instrument panel f Please observe the operating instructions
The steering wheel setting is stored in the vehicle supplied for the Porsche communication
settings. systems before operating the function
For further information on storing and retrieving buttons.
the steering wheel setting:
f PLEASE SEE THE CHAPTER “COMFORT Information
ENTRY FUNCTION” on page 34.
The Porsche communication systems cannot
be switched on and off using the multi-function
steering wheel.

Function buttons on the multi-function

steering wheel
Information
The rotary buttons at the top left and right of the
steering wheel can also be pressed.
Turn volume control

Upwards – increase volume.
Downwards – decrease volume.
Press volume control
Switch volume/mute on and off.
Turn rotary knob

Select/highlight the main menu or menu
item in the multi-function display. To do
this, turn the rotary knob upwards or
downwards.
Press rotary knob
Sun Visors Vanity Mirror
Go to submenu or activate selected f Swivel the sun visor down to prevent dazzle The vanity mirror on the rear of the sun visor is
function. from the front. closed with a cover.
f If you are dazzled from the side, unclip the sun The vanity mirror illumination is switched on
Press diamond button visor from the inner bracket and swivel it round automatically when the cover is opened.
Call up the stored function. so that it is in front of the door window.
The button can be assigned the desired h CAUTION Cover of vanity mirror
function in the multi-function display on the open
instrument panel. The mirror glass may break in the event of an
accident and may enter the passenger
Press Back button compartment if the cover is open.
Return to the menu. f Keep the cover closed when driving.
Press Handset Pickup button
Accept a telephone call. NOTICE
Risk of damage to the vanity mirror cover.
f Do not force the cover beyond its end position.
Press Handset Hangup button
f Keep the cover closed when closing the

End or refuse a telephone call.
convertible top.

Air Conditioning
Automatically Controlled 2-zone Air
Conditioning .................................................55
Air Vents ......................................................59
Heated Rear Window/Exterior Mirror Heating ..60
54 Air Conditioning
Information on air-conditioning
compressor
The air-conditioning compressor
– Can switch off briefly to ensure sufficient
engine cooling if the engine is operating under
extreme load.
– Switches off automatically at temperatures
below approx. 36 °F (2 °C) and cannot be
switched on, even manually.
– Operates most effectively with the windows
closed.
If the vehicle has been in the sun for a long
time, it is a good idea to ventilate the interior
briefly with the windows open.
– Depending on the outside temperature and
humidity, condensation can drip from the
evaporator and form a pool under the vehicle.
Interior temperature sensor This is normal and not a sign of leakage.
Automatically Controlled 2-zone
Air Conditioning Sensors Information on automatic load switch-off
The temperature can be set individually for the To avoid impairing the function of the air If the charging condition of the battery is critical,
driver’s and passenger’s side. conditioning system, the interior temperature the following air-conditioning or heating functions
In automatic mode the air conditioning system sensor for the air-conditioning system must not are restricted initially and then switched off:
exercises full control over the air temperature, air be covered or taped over. – Seat heating
distribution, and air quantity. A number of factors – Seat ventilation
(such as ambient air temperature, amount of Information – Heated rear window/Exterior mirror heating
sunlight, etc...) are used by the system to – Fresh-air blower
Additional air conditioning settings can be made
determine the optimum settings for the current – Air-conditioning compressor
on the multi-function display on the instrument
situation. panel:
Automatic mode is deactivated as soon as the f Please see the chapter “SETTING AIR
settings are adjusted manually. In this case, CONDITIONING” on page 123.
automatic climate control still regulates the
All air-conditioning system settings are stored on
air-conditioning functions that have not been
the respective car key when the vehicle is locked,
modified manually.
on vehicles with memory.
Air Conditioning 55
Switching A/C mode off

A/C mode can be switched off manually to save
fuel, for example.
f Press button A/C OFF.
The indicator light on the button lights up.
The air-conditioning compressor is
switched off.
The cooling function is deactivated.
SYNC mode
In SYNC mode, the temperatures on the driver’s
and passenger’s side are synchronized and are
regulated via button TEMP on the driver’s side.
Switching on SYNC mode
f Press button AUTO/SYNC and hold until
SYNC appears on the display.
f Regulate the temperature on the driver’s and
A/C mode passenger’s side via button TEMP on the A/C MAX mode
In automatic mode, A/C mode is activated by driver’s side. In A/C MAX mode, the passenger compartment
default. Switching off SYNC mode is cooled at maximum power.
The power for the air conditioning compressor is f Press button AUTO/SYNC or button TEMP The interior temperature is not regulated
fully controlled by the air conditioning system on the passenger’s side. automatically.
depending on the current operating requirements. If the vehicle has been in the sun for a long
The air-conditioning compressor is switched off time, it is a good idea to ventilate the interior
automatically at outside temperatures of less briefly with the windows open.
than approx. 36 °F (2 °C).
Switching A/C MAX mode on
f Press button A/C MAX.
Switching A/C mode on
If you wish to cool the passenger compartment The indicator light on the button lights up.
to a temperature lower than the outside
temperature, A/C mode must be activated. Switching A/C MAX mode off
f Press button A/C OFF. f Press button A/C MAX.
The indicator light on the button goes out. The indicator light on the button goes out.
The air-conditioning compressor is or
switched on. Press button AUTO/SYNC.
or
Press button AUTO/SYNC.
The cooling function is activated.
56 Air Conditioning
Setting automatic air-recirculation mode

In automatic air-recirculation mode, the fresh air
supply is adjusted depending on the air quality.
Automatic air-recirculation mode can be switched
on and off on the multi-function display.
Air-recirculation mode is deactivated automatically
to prevent the windows from misting at outside
temperatures of less than approx. 41 °F (5 °C).
For information on adjusting automatic
air-recirculation mode on the multi-function
display:
f Please see the chapter “SETTING AIR
CONDITIONING” on page 123.
Information
The recommended operating mode is automatic
Defrosting windshield Air-recirculation mode air-recirculation mode (default setting).
Activating defrosting function Switching on air-recirculation mode
f Press button . f Press button .
The indicator light on the button lights up. The indicator light on the button lights up.
The air flows to the windshield and the front The outside-air supply is interrupted and only
side windows. the inside air is recirculated.
The windshield is demisted or defrosted as Switching air-recirculation mode off
f Press button
quickly as possible.
.
Deactivating defrosting function The indicator light on the button goes out.
f Press button .
The indicator light on the button goes out. Information
or
Press button AUTO/SYNC. If the air-conditioning compressor is switched off
manually or automatically, recirculated air mode
ends after approx. 3 minutes.
Air Conditioning 57
Information
The air-conditioning system always cools and
heats the passenger compartment to the preset
temperature at maximum cooling or heating
temperature.
Setting the temperature temporarily to a lower or
higher value does not cool or heat the passenger
compartment to the desired temperature more
quickly.
Set air quantity

The selected air quantity is shown in a bar display
above the button . The more bars that are
displayed, the more air flows into the passenger
compartment.
Increasing air quantity
f Press button
A - Set temperature left/right Setting air distribution manually
f Press button
B - Set air quantity upwards.
.
Setting temperature Reducing air quantity The air flows to the windshield and the side
For personal comfort, the interior temperature f Press button downwards. windows.
can be adjusted individually for the driver’s and Pressing button AUTO/SYNC switches back to f Press button .
passenger’s side between 61 °F (16 °C) and automatic mode. The air flows from the central and side vents.
85 °F (29.5 °C). Recommendation: 72 °F (22 °C). If the air quantity was reduced so much that OFF The air vents must be open.
The selected temperature is shown on the display. appears on the air-conditioning display, the f Press button .
outside-air supply is interrupted and the air- The air flows to the footwell.
Increasing temperature
f Press button TEMP upwards.
conditioning compressor is switched off. The indicator light on the button lights up.
h WARNING
Air Shut-off Impairing Cancelling manual air distribution
The preset temperature value is shown on
f Press the relevant air distribution button again.
Vision
the air-conditioning display.
The windows can mist up if the air quantity setting The indicator light on the button goes out.
is OFF.
f Only select air quantity setting OFF for short
or
Information
Press button AUTO/SYNC.
Pressing button AUTO/SYNC selects the preset periods.
f Press button
Air quantity and distribution are controlled
temperature. upwards (increase air automatically and variations are compensated.
quantity).
58 Air Conditioning
Changing air flow direction

f Swivel vent vanes in the desired direction.
Air-conditioning settings on the
multi-function display
Additional settings relating to vehicle air
conditioning can be adjusted in the multi-function
display on the instrument panel.
For information on air-conditioning settings on
the multi-function display:
f PLEASE SEE THE CHAPTER “SETTING AIR
CONDITIONING” on page 123.
Air flow
Three air flow settings are available in automatic
mode:
– “Soft”:
Recommended for passengers sensitive to
Extended ventilation panel Air Vents draughts with a preference for gentle air
The extended ventilation panel on top of the Air vents are located on the dashboard that can be conditioning.
dashboard can be activated or deactivated opened and closed manually. The direction of the – “Normal”:
separately in the multi-function display on the air flow can also be adjusted. Default setting.
instrument panel. – “Strong”:
The air flow in the passenger compartment is less Opening vents Stronger ventilation in the passenger
direct. f Turn the thumb wheel on the air vent upwards. compartment.
The automatic control of the air-conditioning The air flow is clearly noticeable.
Closing vents
f Turn the thumb wheel on the air vent
system adjusts the air flow quantity automatically.
Extended ventilation panel
downwards. f The extended ventilation panel on top of the
dashboard can be activated or deactivated
Information separately.
f For optimal air conditioning, we recommend Auto air-recirculation mode
keeping the center air vents closed during the f Auto air-recirculation mode can be switched
cold season and to only open them as required on and off.
for the purpose of warming the hands.
Air Conditioning 59
Heated Rear Window/

Exterior Mirror Heating
Heated rear window/exterior mirror heating is
ready for operation when the engine is running.
Switching on
f Press button .
The indicator light on the button lights up.
Depending on the outside temperature,
the heating switches off automatically after
approx. 5 to 20 minutes.
f The heating can be switched back on by
pressing the button again.
Switching off
f Press button .
The indicator light on the button goes out.
If the charging condition of the battery is critical,
the heated rear window/exterior mirror heating
function is restricted initially and then switched off.
60 Air Conditioning
Windows, Sunroof and Cabriolet

Power Windows............................................ 62
Sunroof ....................................................... 63
Convertible Top............................................ 67
Wind Deflector ............................................. 69
Emergency Operation of
Convertible Top and Wind Deflector ............... 70
Windows, Sunroof and Cabriolet 61

Power Windows
Information
h WARNING
Opening and closing the
windows The switches have a two-stage function. Both
detent positions can be felt clearly when you
When opening or closing the windows, particularly
actuate the switch.
in one-touch mode, parts of the body may get
trapped between the moving window and fixed – First setting – manual operation
vehicle parts. If the relevant switch is moved to the first
f Take care to ensure that nobody can be injured position, the window is opened or closed
when the windows open or close. manually.
f Always remove the ignition key when leaving The window stops when the switch is released.
the vehicle or switch ignition off on vehicles – Second setting – one-touch operation
with Porsche Entry & Drive. Always take the If the relevant switch is moved fully to the
ignition key with you when leaving the vehicle. second position, the window is opened or
Uninformed persons could injure themselves closed automatically.
by operating the power windows. Actuate the switch again to stop the window at
f Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended. the desired position.
A - Power window, driver’s side

Readiness for operation of power windows B - Power window, passenger’s side Information
The power windows are ready for operation: C - Cabriolet: LED indicator for switching between front/ If a door window is blocked during closing, it will
– With ignition switched on. rear power windows
stop and open again by several centimeter.
– After the ignition is switched off and before the D - Cabriolet: Switch for front/rear power windows
If the window is blocked a second time within
driver’s or passenger’s door is first opened, Opening/closing windows approximately 10 seconds, one-touch operation
but for a maximum of 10 minutes. On the Cabriolet, select front or rear power is disabled for this window.
One-touch operation for closing the door windows with switch D. The window can be closed manually. The window
windows is available only when the ignition is
The LED C in switch D indicates that the rear then closes with its full closing force.
switched on.
windows are selected. One-touch operation is enabled again once the
Cabriolet window has been closed completely using the
Opening window with the switch
f Press the relevant switch until the window has
When the convertible top is open, the rear side manual closing function.
windows can only be closed if the door windows
reached the desired position.
are closed.
Closing window with the switch
f Pull the relevant switch until the window has
reached the desired position.
62 Windows, Sunroof and Cabriolet

h WARNING
Closing the windows Sunroof Operational readiness of the sunroof and
manually roll-up sunblind
The electric sunroof and the roll-up sunblind can
If one-touch operation is disabled after the window be operated using the buttons in the center The sunroof and roll-up sunblind are ready for
is blocked, the window will close with its full console. operation:
closing force when the manual closing function is – With ignition switched on.
h WARNING
Opening and closing the
used.
f Ensure that nobody can be injured, pinched or
sunroof and roll-up
sunblind Information
crushed when the windows close.
When opening or closing the roof or sunblind, The roof and sunblind have a force limiter. If the
Storing end position of the windows after particularly when using one-touch operation, parts roof or sunblind are obstructed during the closing
connecting the vehicle battery of the body may become trapped between moving operation, they will open again immediately.
and fixed vehicle parts.
f Ensure that nobody is injured when operating
The end positions of the windows are lost when At speeds above 120 mph (200 km/h) and at
the battery is disconnected and reconnected. temperatures below --22 °F (–30 °C), the roof can
the roof or roll-up sunblind.
f Always remove the ignition key when leaving
One-touch operation of the windows is disabled. only be closed. The opening function is disabled.
Perform these steps for all windows: the vehicle or switch ignition off on vehicles
1. Close window completely once by pulling the with Porsche Entry & Drive. Always take the
rocker switch. ignition key with you when leaving the vehicle.
2. If the window is completely closed, briefly pull Uninformed persons (e.g. children) could injure
the rocker switch again 3 times. themselves when operating the sunroof or roll-
3. Open the window completely once by pressing up sunblind.
the rocker switch. f In case of danger, press the sliding roof or
sunblind button immediately.
NOTICE
Damage to the roof, if the roof is opened or lifted
when a roof transport system is fitted and the roof
collides with the carrier/load.
f Do not open or lift the roof when a roof
transport system is fitted.

Closing the roof

First setting – manual operation
f Pull and hold button C in the first setting until
the desired position is reached.
Second setting – one-touch operation
f Briefly pull button C to the second setting.
The roof closes automatically.
The process can be interrupted by pulling
button C or A again.
A - Open roof A - Open/close sunblind

B - Lift/lower roof B - Lift/lower roof
C - Close roof C - Open/close roof
Steel Sunroof Glas Sunroof

Opening the roof Opening the roof
First setting – manual operation First setting – manual operation
f Pull and hold button A in the first setting until f Press and hold button C in the first setting until
the desired position is reached. the desired position is reached.
Second setting – one-touch operation Second setting – one-touch operation
f Briefly pull button A to the second setting. f Briefly press button C to the second setting.
The roof opens automatically to the end The roof opens automatically to the end
position. position.
The process can be interrupted by pulling The process can be interrupted by pressing
button A or C again. button C again.
Lifting/lowering the roof Lifting/lowering the roof
f Press button B. The roof is lifted/lowered f Press button B. The roof is lifted/lowered to
to the end position. the end position.
The process can be interrupted by pressing The process can be interrupted by pressing
button B again. button B again.

Closing the roof Opening the roll-up sunblind Warning message on multi-function
First setting – manual operation First setting – manual operation display
f Pull and hold button C in the first setting until f Pull and hold button A in the first setting until If there is a fault in the sunroof the warning “Close
the desired position is reached. the desired position is reached. sunroof completely” appears on the multi-
Second setting – one-touch operation Second setting – one-touch operation function display.
f Briefly pull button C to the second setting. The f Briefly pull button A to the second setting. The f Close sunroof with button C. Have the fault
roof closes automatically. sunblind opens automatically to the end corrected by an authorized Porsche dealer at
The process can be interrupted by pulling button position. the next opportunity.
C again. The process can be interrupted by pressing Emergency closing of sunroof
button A again.
Emergency closing after repeated
Closing the roll-up sunblind intervention from the force limiter
First setting – manual operation If the closing operation of the roof is impeded by
f Press and hold button A in the first setting until an obstruction, it can be closed manually with
the desired position is reached. increased force.
Second setting – one-touch operation To perform emergency closing:
f Briefly press button A to the second setting. 1. Remove the obstruction.
The sunblind closes automatically to the end 2. Pull and hold button C in the first setting until
position. the roof closes and stops in the closed
The process can be interrupted by pressing position.
button A again. Repeat closing operation if necessary
Emergency operation if roof drive
Information mechanism fails
If the sunroof is partly or fully open, the sunblind If the roof drive mechanism is defective, it can
can only be closed as far as the front edge of the be closed manually using the hexagon key from
sunroof. the tool kit.
If the sunblind is closed, it will be opened (pulled f Before using emergency operation, check
along) automatically when the sunroof is opened. that the fuse is intact.
For information on changing fuses:
f Please see the chapter “CHANGING FUSES”
on page 267.

Storing end position of the sunroof

The end positions of the roof are lost after
disconnection/connection of the vehicle battery,
if the vehicle battery is exhausted or after jump
lead starting, after emergency operation or after
changing the fuse for the roof.
h
Storing the end position
WARNING
The roof closes with its full closing force when
storing the end position.
f Ensure that nobody is injured when closing
the roof.
The vehicle must be stationary in order to store
the end position of the roof.
1. Switch on ignition.
2. Pull and hold button C in the first setting until
the roof closes and stops in the closed
1. Carefully lever off the cap from the roof liner 3. Insert the hexagon key all the way into the position.
using a screwdriver, for example. opening. The process for storing the end position
2. Take the hexagon key out of the tool kit in the 4. Applying continuous upward pressure, turn the begins after approximately 10 seconds. The
luggage compartment. key clockwise until the roof is fully closed. roof now opens and closes once automatically.
For information on the tool kit: 5. Remove the key.
f Please see the chapter “TOOLS” on page 198.
Storage is now complete.
6. Refit the cap. If this process is not executed, please perform
7. Stow the key in the tool kit.
f Have the fault corrected at an authorized
the following procedure:
Pull and hold button C in the first setting until
Porsche dealer. the roof closes fully and stops. If necessary,
repeat the closing operation until the roof has
stopped moving completely.
The process takes a maximum of 15 seconds.
Start the storing process again if the button is
released before the roof has stopped moving
completely.

Storing end position of the roll-up Cleaning the air deflector Convertible Top
sunblind Cleaning the air deflector with the roof open. Brief operating instructions can be found on the
The end positions of the sunblind are lost after 1. Switch on the ignition and open the roof fully back of the driver’s sun visor.
disconnecting/connecting the vehicle battery, with button B. f Please see the chapter “CAR CARE
if the vehicle battery is exhausted or after jump If the air deflector is not fully extended, drive INSTRUCTIONS” on page 231.
lead starting, after emergency operation or after the vehicle for a short distance with the roof
changing the fuse for the sunblind. NOTICE
open until it is fully extended.
h
Storing the end position 2. Clean the air deflector and net using a damp Risk of damage to convertible top and convertible-
WARNING
sponge. top mechanism.
The sunblind closes with its full closing force when f Do not operate convertible top:
storing the end position.
f Ensure that nobody is injured when closing the
– At temperatures below 20 °F (0 °C).
– When one side of the vehicle is on a curb, a
sunblind. lifting platform or a jack.
To store the end position for the sunblind, the – When items of luggage or other objects hinder
vehicle must be stationary and the end position for the movement of the convertible top.
– With the roll-over bars extended.
f Avoid frequent operation of the convertible top
the roof must already be stored.
2. Press and hold button A in the first setting until with the engine off; the vehicle battery will
rapidly discharge.
f Only drive with the convertible top fully open or
the sunblind closes and stops in the closed
position.
closed (end positions).
f Before opening the convertible top, ensure
The process for storing the end position
begins after approximately 10 seconds. The
sunblind now opens and closes once that there are no objects in the area behind the
rear seats.
f When opening or closing the convertible top,
automatically. Storage is now complete.
If this process is not executed, please perform
the following procedure: ensure that there is sufficient clearance above
it (e.g. in the garage).
f To prevent damp stains and abrasion damage,
Press and hold button A in the first setting until
the sunblind closes fully and stops. If
necessary, repeat the closing operation until open the convertible top only when it is in a
dry, clean state.
f Park the vehicle in the shade if possible, since
the sunblind has stopped moving completely.
The process takes a maximum of 15 seconds.
Start the storing process again if the button is continuous exposure to the sun attacks
textiles, rubber and colors.
f The convertible top may only be operated
released before the sunblind has stopped
moving completely.
when driving on a level surface.
f The convertible top must not be operated in a
strong head wind (above approx. 50 mph
(80 km/h)).

Door windows and side windows Opening convertible top

The side windows are lowered automatically when h WARNING
Opening the convertible
the convertible top is opened. The door top
windows close automatically if operation of the When opening the convertible top, parts of the
convertible top is continued after it has reached body can become trapped between the
its final position. convertible-top mechanism or convertible-top
The rear side windows open automatically when compartment lid and fixed vehicle parts.
the door windows are opened. f When opening the convertible top, make sure
The side windows are lowered automatically when that nobody is at risk of injury from the
the convertible top is closed. All windows close convertible-top mechanism or the convertible-
automatically if operation of the convertible top is top compartment lid.
continued after it has reached its final position. f In order to interrupt convertible-top operation
in the event of danger, immediately release the
Conditions for operating the
switch.
convertible top
– The ignition must be switched on f Please see the chapter “OVERVIEW OF
(engine running or switched off). WARNING AND INFORMATION MESSAGES”
– Maximum speed up to approx. 30 mph on page 129.
f Pull and hold the switch until the convertible
(50 km/h). top has reached its final position or until the
Opening/closing of the convertible top will be windows are in their desired position.
interrupted if the maximum speed is The message on the multi-function display
exceeded. goes out.
In case of danger, release the switch.
Convertible top operation stops.

Closing convertible top Wind Deflector

h WARNING
Closing the convertible Raising the wind
h WARNING
top deflector
When closing the convertible top, parts of the Persons sitting on the rear seats may be trapped
body can become trapped between the when raising the wind deflector.
convertible-top mechanism or convertible-top f Ensure that nobody can be injured when raising
compartment lid and fixed vehicle parts. the wind deflector.
f When closing the convertible top, make sure f In case of danger, release the switch
that nobody is at risk from injury from the immediately.
convertible-top mechanism or the convertible-
top compartment lid.
f In order to interrupt convertible-top operation
NOTICE
in the event of danger, immediately release the Risk of damage to wind deflector and seat
switch. backrests. At extreme backrest angles, the wind
f Keep the lids of the vanity mirrors in the sun deflector can collide with the seat backrests.
visors closed when closing the convertible top. f Before raising the wind deflector, always
f Please see the chapter “OVERVIEW OF
adjust both seat backrests to the upright
f Pull and hold the switch until the convertible position.
WARNING AND INFORMATION MESSAGES”
top has reached its final position or until the
on page 129.
windows are in their desired position.
The message on the multi-function display
goes out.
In case of danger, release the switch.
Convertible top operation stops.
Messages on on-board computer
Convertible top status

on page 129.

Emergency Operation of
Convertible Top and
Wind Deflector
h WARNING
Moving convertible top
parts during emergency
operation
f Always carry out emergency operation with the
greatest care.
f Do not activate the convertible top and wind
deflector during emergency operation.
NOTICE
There is a risk of damage to the convertible top

and convertible-top mechanism.
f Do not activate the convertible top during
emergency operation.
Raising/lowering the wind deflector Before emergency operation
Conditions for operating the wind deflector NOTICE
Before carrying out emergency operation, please
– The ignition must be switched on (engine check:
Risk of damage to convertible top and convertible- 1. Was the ignition switched on during operation
running or switched off).
top mechanism. of the wind deflector and convertible top with
f After emergency operation, do not operate the
– Maximum speed up to approx.:
75 mph (120 km/h) for lowering and the switch?
convertible top. 2. Are the fuses defective? Please see the
f Drive slowly to an authorized Porsche dealer.
124 mph (200 km/h) for raising.
If these speeds are exceeded, raising/ chapter “CHANGING FUSES” on page 267.
lowering of the wind deflector is not possible. 3. Remove the ignition key so that the wind
f Press and hold the switch until the end position deflector and convertible top are not activated
of the wind deflector is reached and the unintentionally.
message on the multi-function display goes Removing the rear wall trim panel
out. 1. Fold the rear seat backrests forward
(illustration).
2. Carefully lever the rear wall trim panel out of
the clip points using the screwdriver (from the
tool kit) and fold it forward or pull off the rear
wall trim panel using the two loops (depending
on vehicle equipment) and fold it forward
(illustration).

3. Remove the emergency operation key A from Emergency operation of wind deflector 2. Fold both roll-over protection covers C forward
the rear wall trim panel. 1. Remove plastic attachment B from the and unclip them by pulling them up.
emergency operation key A.
Swivel the metal insert approx. 90° up out of
the plastic attachment B and pull out forwards.

3. Unscrew both screws D on the roll-over 5. Unscrew screws F on the wind deflector motor Releasing convertible-top drive
protection cover using the screwdriver. using the metal insert A (TORX®) of the f Using the hexagon on the plastic
4. Release roll-over protection cover E out of the emergency operation key. attachment B, turn the emergency hand
clip points by pulling them upwards. 6. Pull retaining bracket G forward (lever it out screw H approx. 180° anti-clockwise.
using the screwdriver if necessary) until the
gears no longer engage. Remove retaining NOTICE
f Only loosen emergency hand screw H, do not

bracket.
7. Retract the wind deflector manually.
unscrew it completely.

Opening the convertible-top compartment 4. Turn the emergency operation key approx. 90° 5. Insert the emergency operation key up to
lid in the direction of travel so that the plastic marking 2 on the plastic attachment B and
attachment B is pointing upwards. turn a further 90° in the direction of travel until
1. Reassemble plastic attachment B and metal
a noticeable resistance is overcome.
insert A.
6. Turn the emergency operation key approx. 90°
2. Insert the metal end of the emergency
against the direction of travel and remove it.
operation key between the convertible-top
7. Repeat the procedure (steps 2 to 6) on the
compartment lid and convertible top.
opposite side.
Ensure that the bend of the plastic
attachment B is pointing towards the rear of
the vehicle.
3. Guide the emergency operation key forward
along the plastic trim until it slides into
opening K up to marking 1 on the plastic
attachment B.

8. Using both hands on the driver’s and Emergency operation of rear side trim 2. Loosen both screws M on the motor/gear unit
passenger’s side, firmly pull the convertible- panel flaps using the metal insert A (TORX®) of the
top compartment lid upwards. 1. Disconnect both connectors L. emergency operation key.
9. Grasp the convertible-top compartment lid in 3. Pull motor/gear unit N forward (lever it out
the center from the rear and set to the upright using the screwdriver if necessary) until the
position. gears no longer engage.

4. Press both rear side flaps downwards manually Closing the convertible top 2. Remove stopper O at the access point for
until the end position is reached. 1. From the passenger compartment, grasp the convertible-top lock emergency operation.
convertible top at the center and pull it
manually out of the storage compartment until
it is approximately half closed.
h CAUTION
Risk of injury due to
crushing during closing
If body parts are located within the range of
movement of the convertible top or in the area of
the convertible top lock during closing, there is a
risk of pinching or crushing.
f Make sure that:
– no persons are within the range of movement
of the convertible top during closing.
– hands are not pinched or crushed by parts of
the convertible top lock.

3. Remove plastic attachment B from the 6. Pull the convertible top to the windshield frame 7. To fully close the convertible top, turn plastic
emergency operation key. manually. attachment B clockwise until the latching hook
Swivel metal insert A approx. 90° up out of the fully engages in the catch (noticeable
plastic attachment B and pull out forwards. resistance).
4. Insert plastic attachment B into the access
point for the convertible-top lock emergency
operation and turn it to the left or right until it
slips into the socket.
5. Turn plastic attachment B anti-clockwise until
the latching hook is fully extended (noticeable
resistance).

Closing the convertible-top compartment

lid
h WARNING
Closing of the converti-
ble-top compartment lid
Parts of the body may become trapped between
the convertible-top compartment lid and fixed
vehicle parts when closing the convertible-top
compartment lid.
f Place your hands on top of the convertible-top
compartment lid when pushing.
1. Stand behind the vehicle.
2. Grasp the convertible-top compartment lid
above the brake light and push forward against
noticeable resistance until it is completely
closed.
3. Push the convertible-top compartment lid
manually into the closed end position. The
convertible-top compartment lid is not locked.
4. Hand-tighten emergency hand screw H
clockwise.

Lights, Turn Signals and Windshield Wipers

Light Switch .................................................79
Instrument Lighting .......................................82
Turn Signal/High Beam/
Headlight Flasher Stalk/Parking Light Switch...82
Emergency Flasher .......................................83
Interior/Reading Lights..................................84
Brief Overview – Windshield wipers ..............85
Windshield Wiper/Washer Stalk ......................86
78 Lights, Turn Signals and Windshield Wipers

Daytime driving lights

Information If the light switch is set to position (light off),
If the ignition key is removed and the door is the daytime driving lights come on automatically
opened while the lights are on, an audible signal when the ignition is switched on.
(gong) warns of possible battery discharge. If the light switch is set to position , the
– In some countries, differences are possible daytime driving lights come on automatically in
due to legal requirements. bright conditions and when the ignition is switched
The vehicle’s exterior lights can mist up due to on.
temperature and humidity. This misting will dry off The daytime driving lights are not active when the
after a sufficient distance has been driven. light switch is set to position (low beam/
driving light).
Low beam/driving light
Automatic driving light assistant
If the light switch is set to the position ,
The automatic driving light assistant is a comfort
the low beam is switched on automatically in the
function. The driving light (low beam) is switched
following situations:
on and off automatically depending on the ambient
– Dusk
brightness.
– Darkness
– Driving through tunnels The automatic driving light assistant also controls
Light Switch – Rain the daytime driving lights, low beam, Automatic
Light is switched off – Highway driving (on vehicles with Coming Home lights and the equipment-
Porsche Dynamic Light System PDLS) dependent dynamic cornering light.
Daytime driving lights are switched on
when the ignition is switched on. When the low beam is switched on, the indicator The automatic driving light assistant is activated
light on the speedometer lights up. when the light switch is set to the position .
Automatic driving light assistant
Despite possible support by the driving light
Side lights assistant, it is the responsibility of the driver to
License plate light, instrument lighting, Information switch on the driving light using the conventional
daytime driving lights switched off. Fog is not automatically recognized. light switch in accordance with the relevant
Low beam/driving light f In the event of fog, the driving light must be national regulations.
switched on manually. Activating the headlights using the driving light
Only with ignition on.
Fog light function and highway light are assistant therefore does not absolve the driver
switched off. of responsibility for correct operation of the
driving light.
Rear fog light
Pull the switch in the low beam position.
Indicator light lights up.
Lights, Turn Signals and Windshield Wipers 79

h WARNING
Driving without lights Automatic Coming Home lights Porsche Dynamic Light System (PDLS)
(Welcome Home function/Entry function) Dynamic cornering light
If you drive without lights, this may significantly
Switching on Automatic Coming Home lights Above a speed of approx. 5 mph (8 km/h), the low
restrict your visibility and also the ability of other
road users to see your vehicle. f Set light switch to . beam light is swiveled in the direction of the curve
f Always carefully monitor the automatic driving The following lights remain switched on for to illuminate the road more clearly, depending on
light control. a certain period to allow you to get in and out of the speed of the vehicle and the extent to which
your vehicle safely and with improved visibility in the steering wheel is turned.
darkness: In the event of a fault in the dynamic cornering
Information – Daytime driving lights, light, the PDLS warning light in the instrument
In the event of a fault in the automatic driving light – Courtesy lights in the folded out exterior panel flashes.
assistant/Porsche Dynamic Light System (PDLS), mirrors (on vehicles with electrically foldable Highway function in darkness
the PDLS warning light in the instrument panel mirrors),
– Rear side marker lights, The distribution characteristics of the driving light
flashes. change when driving in darkness at vehicle
For information on indicator lights and warning – License plate lights.
speeds above approx. 80 mph (130 km/h).
lights on the instrument panel: Welcome Home function (off delay)
f Please see the chapter “INSTRUMENT PANEL
The light beam becomes longer and the field of
When the vehicle is locked, the lights remain vision increases.
USA MODELS” on page 90.
switched on for the duration of the off delay preset Fog lights
WARNING AND INFORMATION MESSAGES” The distribution characteristics of the driving light
For information on adjusting the off delay of the
on page 129. change when the rear fog light is switched on at
external lights on the multi-function display:
f Please see the chapter “ADJUSTING EXTERIOR
vehicle speeds below approx. 43 mph (70 km/h).
Rain function The light beam becomes wider and reduces glare.
LIGHTS” on page 120.
The driving light is switched on automatically after
Entry function/Exit function
five seconds of continuous wiper operation.
If the wipers have not been used for approx. When the vehicle is unlocked, the area around
4 minutes, the driving light is switched off. the vehicle is illuminated for the duration of the
off delay preset on the multi-function display.
The lights are switched off when the ignition is
switched on or the light switch is set to a position
other than .
For information on adjusting the off delay of the
external lights on the multi-function display:
f PLEASE SEE THE CHAPTER “ADJUSTING
EXTERIOR LIGHTS” on page 120.

– High Beam Assistant on is selected on the high Lack of attention

beam stalk. h WARNING
Please see the chapter “ACTIVATING/ The driver remains responsible while driving,
DEACTIVATING HIGH BEAM ASSISTANT” e.g. manually operating the high beam according
on page 82. to light, visibility and traffic conditions, regardless
As an anti-glare precaution for built up areas, High of High Beam Assistant. The system is no
Beam Assistant is not available at speeds below substitute for careful attention on the part of the
20 mph (30 km/h). driver.
The lights also switch from high to low beam Manual intervention may be required in the
automatically as soon as a built up area is following situations:
detected. – In unfavorable weather conditions, e.g. rain,
For information on warning messages on the snow, ice, heavy spray.
multi-function display: – On roads where oncoming traffic is partly
f Please see the chapter “OVERVIEW OF obscured, e.g. highways.
WARNING AND INFORMATION MESSAGES” – Where there are road users with poor lights,
on page 129. e.g. cyclists.
– On tight bends, or on sharp humps or dips.
Porsche Dynamic Light System Plus – In poorly lit built up areas.
Information
f To help make sure that nothing interferes with
(PDLS Plus) – Where there are strong reflections, e.g. signs.
– Where the windshield in the camera area is
High Beam Assistant camera operation: misted, dirty, icy or covered with stickers.
When High Beam Assistant is switched on, a Do not block the camera area A with objects f Drive with extreme care.
camera A detects the light sources of oncoming (e.g. stickers). f Always pay attention to the traffic situation and
vehicles and vehicles in front, and automatically f The camera A must always be kept free of dirt, the area around the vehicle.
selects between low beam and high beam. ice and snow to ensure that it is fully functional. f Change to using the high beam manually
The function activates in darkness if the following For car care instructions: according to light, visibility and traffic
conditions are present: Please see the chapter “CAR CARE conditions.
– Light switch position is selected. INSTRUCTIONS” on page 231.
– Vehicle speed is more than approx. 37 mph
(60 km/h).
– High Beam Assistant is activated on the
multi-function display in the instrument panel.
Please see the chapter “ACTIVATING AND
DEACTIVATING HIGH BEAM ASSISTANT”
on page 120.

High-beam headlight
Switching on and off
(on vehicles WITHOUT High Beam Assistant)
f Switching on: Push the stalk once to the front
pressure point 3.
The indicator light lights up on the
tachometer.
f Switching off: Push the stalk once to the rear
pressure point 4.
Activating/deactivating High Beam Assistant
The following conditions must be met before High
Beam Assistant is activated:
– Darkness
– Light switch position is selected.
– Vehicle speed is more than approx. 37 mph
(60 km/h).
– High Beam Assistant is activated on the multi-
Instrument Lighting Turn Signal/High Beam/Headlight function display in the instrument panel.
The lighting is automatically adjusted to the Flasher Stalk/Parking Light Switch Please see the chapter “ACTIVATING AND
ambient brightness via light sensors. Turn signal, low beam and high beam are ready for DEACTIVATING HIGH BEAM ASSISTANT”
In addition, when the vehicle lighting is switched operation when the ignition is on. on page 120.
on, the instrument and switch brightness can be 1 – Turn signal light, left f Activating: Push the stalk once to the front
adjusted manually. 2 – Turn signal light, right
f Turn adjustment button A in the appropriate
pressure point 3.
3 – High beam, High Beam Assistant The indicator light in the speedometer
direction and hold until the desired brightness 4 – Headlight flasher (also with the ignition lights up. The vehicle automatically selects
has been reached. switched off) between low beam and high beam.
h WARNING
Adjusting the brightness Stalk in center position – dipped beam If the high beam is switched on, the indicator
while driving light on the tachometer lights up.
Turn signal lights f Deactivating: Push the stalk once to the rear
f Push the stalk once to the lower or upper
Adjusting the brightness while driving may cause
you to lose control of the vehicle. pressure point 4.
f Do not reach through the steering-wheel pressure point 1 or 2. The High Beam Assistant can only be
spokes when driving. The turn signal lights flash three times. deactivated if the indicator light on the
tachometer is lit.

Switching on and off h DANGER Emergency Stopping

(on vehicles WITH High Beam Assistant)
If the High Beam Assistant was deactivated or if Other vehicles could collide with your vehicle if you
are parked in a dangerous position.
f Whenever stalled or stopped for emergency
the requirements are not met, high beam can be
switched on and off manually.
repairs, move the car well off the road. Switch
The following conditions must be met:
on the emergency flasher and mark the car
– Darkness
with road flares or other warning devices.
f Do not remain in the car. Someone
– The light switch position is selected.
f Switching on: Push the stalk twice to the front
approaching from the rear may not realize your
pressure point 3.
vehicle is stopped and cause a collision.
The indicator light on the tachometer
lights up.
f Switching off: Push the stalk once to the rear h WARNING Hot Exhaust System and
pressure point 4. Tailpipe
Exhaust fumes and the exhaust system are very
Operating the headlight flasher hot when the engine is running. The exhaust
f Push the stalk once to the rear pressure system (including the tailpipe) remains hot for
point 4. some time after the vehicle is turned off.
f Do not park or operate the vehicle in areas
The indicator light on the tachometer Emergency Flasher
lights up briefly. The emergency flasher can be switched on where the hot exhaust system may come in
For information on High Beam Assistant: regardless of the position of the ignition lock. contact with dry grass, brush, fuel spill or
f Please see the chapter “HIGH BEAM Switching on and off other flammable material.
f Press the emergency flasher button on the
ASSISTANT” on page 81.
h WARNING Engine Heat Danger
Parking light center console.
All turn signal lights and the indicator light in the When Working
The parking light can only be switched on when
the ignition is switched off. button flash when the button is operated. The engine and surrounding components become
f Move the stalk up 2 or down 1 to switch on the very hot when the engine is running.
f Before working on any part in the engine
If the emergency flasher remains active for longer
right or left parking light. periods, the illumination phase of the flashing
If the parking light is switched on, the message interval is shortened to preserve the lights. compartment, turn the engine off and let it cool
“Parking light on” will appear on the multi- down sufficiently.
function display in the instrument panel after the
ignition is switched off.
For information on warning messages on the multi-
function display:
on page 129.

Switching automatic interior/ The off delay for the interior/reading lights when
reading lights on and off both doors are closed can be set on the
multifunction display:
f Please see the chapter “SETTING INTERIOR
Depending on equipment, the interior/reading
lights can be switched on and off using button B
or in the multi-function display menu. LIGHTING OFF DELAY” on page 121.
Using button „B“: Switching off of interior/reading lights to

f Press button B. protect the battery
When automatic interior/reading lights are In darkness, the interior lighting is switched off
switched off, the indicator light in the button 16 minutes after the engine stops to preserve
lights up. the vehicle battery.
When the automatic interior lighting is switched In daylight conditions, interior lights that were
on in darkness, the interior lighting is switched on manually are switched off
– switched on: when a door is unlocked or automatically after 1 minute.
opened, or when the ignition key is removed Orientation lighting
from the ignition lock. Lights in the overhead operating console and at
– switched off: when both doors have been the ignition lock help vehicle occupants to locate
A - Button for interior/reading lights closed, after a delay of approx. 120 seconds. important controls in the vehicle in darkness and
B - Switching automatic interior/reading lights on/off The off delay time can be preset on the multi- ensure better overall orientation. The lights are
function display. switched on when the vehicle is unlocked and
Interior/Reading Lights The interior lighting goes out as soon as the switched off again automatically when the vehicle
ignition is switched on or the vehicle is locked.
f Please see the chapter “SETTING INTERIOR
Interior/reading lights is locked.
Switching interior/reading lights on and off LIGHTING OFF DELAY” on page 121. Dimming (brightness adjustment)
f Press button A. The brightness of the orientation lighting is
In the multi-function display menu:
Dimming (brightness adjustment) adjusted on the multi-function display.
f Press button A for at least 1 second and hold
On the multi-function display, you can set whether f Please see the chapter “ADJUSTING
the interior/reading lights should be switched on BRIGHTNESS OF ORIENTATION LIGHTING”
until the desired level of brightness is or remain switched off when a door is unlocked or on page 121.
achieved. opened or when the ignition key is removed from
the ignition lock: Ambient lighting
f Please see the chapter “ACTIVATING OR If the vehicle is driven at night, a discreet light
DEACTIVATING INTERIOR LIGHTS WHEN THE provides subtle illumination for the passenger
DOOR IS OPENED (DEPENDING ON compartment. The ambient lighting is switched off
EQUIPMENT)” on page 120. automatically when the vehicle is locked.

Brief Overview – Windshield wipers

information provided under “WINDSHIELD WIPER/
WASHER STALK”.
Warnings, in particular, are not replaced by
this brief overview.
Windshield wiper stalk Switch for rain sensor sensitivity (A) and rear wiper (B)
What do I want to do? What do I have to do?
Wipe automatically at front Press the stalk to detent position 1.

(rain sensor operation)
Adjusting the rain sensor Adjust switch A on the right of the stalk upwards (wipe more often) or downwards (wipe less often).
operation sensitivity
Wipe at front Slow: Press the stalk to detent position 2.

Fast: Press the stalk to detent position 3.
Once: Briefly move stalk to position 4 (holding stalk in position 4 accelerates wiping action).
Spray and wipe at front Pull stalk towards the steering wheel at position 5 and hold.
Wipe at rear (intermittent wiping) Push switch B upwards to detent position INT.
Wipe at rear (wipe once) Push switch B all the way up or down.

Windshield Wiper/Washer Stalk 4 – One-touch operation

Windshield wipers
h CAUTION Cleaning Windshield f Press the wiper stalk downwards.
In rain sensor operation, the windshield wipers The windshield wipers carry out one wiping
wipe automatically if moisture is detected on the cycle.
5 – Windshield wiper and washer system
f Pull wiper stalk towards the steering wheel.
windshield.
f Always switch off windshield wipers before
cleaning the windshield to avoid unintentional The system wipes as long as the stalk is pulled
operation (rain sensor operation). towards the steering wheel.
When the wiper stalk is released, a few drying
wipes are performed.
NOTICE
After every 10 wipes on the windshield,
Risk of damage to the luggage compartment lid, the headlights are cleaned automatically.
windshield, rear window and wiper system.
f Only wipe the windshield when sufficiently wet,
Information
f If heavily soiled, repeat wash.
otherwise it could become scratched.
f Loosen frozen wiper blades before starting
to drive. f Persistent dirt (e.g. insect residues) should
f Do not operate a frozen headlight washer Windshield wiper and headlight washer be removed regularly.
system. system For information on car care:
f Always switch off windshield wipers in car 0 – Windshield wipers off f Please see the chapter “CAR CARE
washes to prevent them wiping unintentionally When the windshield wipers are switched off and INSTRUCTIONS” on page 231.
(rain sensor operation). also occasionally after the ignition is switched off, Windshield wiper blades that are in perfect
f Do not operate headlight washer system in car the wipers move up slightly from their rest position condition are vital for a clear view.
washes. so that the wiping edges are aligned correctly. f Please see the chapter “WIPER BLADES”
f Always switch off windshield wipers before 1 – Rain sensor operation, on page 224.
cleaning the windshield to avoid unintentional Windshield wipers
operation (rain sensor operation). f Press the wiper stalk upwards to the first click. Fitting ice or sun shields and wiper blade
f Always hold the wiper arm securely when 2 – Windshield wipers – slow replacement
replacing the wiper blade. f Press the wiper stalk upwards to the second f After switching off the ignition, press the wiper
f Always switch off windshield wipers before click. stalk once downwards 4.
opening the luggage compartment lid 3 – Windshield wipers – fast The wipers move upwards to an angle of
(wiper switch in position 0). f Press the wiper stalk upwards to the third approx. 45°.
f When replacing wiper blades, observe different click.
lengths of the wiper blades.

If a speed of approx. 5 mph (8 km/h) is exceeded,

the system switches to the preselected wiper
speed.
Information
f If the wiper stalk is in position 1 when the
ignition is switched on, the rain sensor is
activated as soon as the vehicle speed
exceeds approx. 2.5 mph (4 km/h).
f If the wiper stalk is in position 2 or 3 when the
ignition is switched on, the windshield wipers
remain switched off until the wiper stalk is
actuated.
Information
The wiper is stopped when the luggage
Rain sensor operation, windshield wipers compartment lid is opened. Headlight washer system
In rain sensor mode, the amount of rain on the After closing the luggage compartment lid, the The washer sprays only while low beam or
windshield is measured. The wipe interval is wiper stalk must be operated in order to switch high beam is activated.
automatically controlled accordingly. the wiper back on. f Press button B under the wiper stalk.
Rain sensor operation is activated automatically at After every 10 wipes on the windshield, the
speeds of less than approx. 2.5 mph (4 km/h) Adjusting the rain sensor sensitivity headlights are cleaned automatically as well.
when the windshield wipers are switched on. f Move switch A upwards – The wipe count starts from zero again when the
high sensitivity. low beam is switched off.
The setting is confirmed by one wipe of
the windshield.
f Move switch A downwards –
low sensitivity.
Activating and deactivating automatic rain
sensor operation on the multi-function
display
For information on automatic rain sensor
operation:
f Please see the chapter “ACTIVATING AND
DEACTIVATING RAIN SENSOR OPERATION”
on page 121.

Switching on the rear window wiper when

reverse gear is engaged Information
In the multi-function display, you can configure the f Clean the wiper blades with window cleaner
rear wiper to automatically perform a series of at regular intervals, especially after washing
wipes when it rains or when the windshield wipers the vehicle in a car wash.
are used while reverse gear is engaged. We recommend Porsche window cleaner.
For information on configuring the automatic If the wiper blades are very dirty (e.g. soiled
function for activating the rear wiper when reverse with insect remains), they can be cleaned with
gear is engaged: a sponge or cloth.
f Please see the chapter “SETTING ACTIVATION If the wiper blades judder or squeak, this may
OF THE REAR WIPER WHEN REVERSE GEAR IS be due to the following:
ENGAGED” on page 121. – If the vehicle is washed in an automatic car
wash, wax residues may adhere to the
windshield. These wax residues can be
removed only by using window cleaner
concentrate.
Please see the chapter “WASHER FLUID
WINDSHIELD” on page 224.
Rear window wiper
– The wiper blades may be damaged or worn.
Switching on intermittent operation of rear f Replace damaged wiper blades immediately.
window wiper f Contact an authorized Porsche dealer for
f Press switch C upwards to detent position INT. more information.
Switching off intermittent operation of rear
window wiper
f Press switch C downwards to detent
position OFF.
Manual wiping
f Press switch C of the wiper stalk downwards
out of detent position OFF or upwards out of
detent position INT LO, HI and hold.

Instrument Panel and Multi-Function Display

Instrument Panel USA Models........................ 90
Instrument Panel Canada Models ................... 91
Displays on the Instrument Panel ................... 92
Battery/Alternator ........................................ 95
Check Engine (Emission Control) ................... 95
Acoustic Signals........................................... 95
Operating the Multi-Function Display on the
Instrument Panel .......................................... 96
Vehicle Menu.............................................. 100
Audio Menu................................................ 102
Phone Menu............................................... 103
Map Menu.................................................. 103
Navigation Menu......................................... 104
Trip Menu .................................................. 105
Tire Pressure Menu (Tire Pressure
Monitoring System, TPMS) .......................... 105
Allwheel Menu ............................................ 114
Chrono Menu (Stopwatch) ........................... 114
G-Force Menu............................................. 116
Performance Menu ..................................... 116
ACC Menu ................................................. 117
Vehicle Settings on the
Multi-Function Display ................................. 117
Overview of Warning and
Information Messages............................. 129
Instrument Panel and Multi-Function Display 89

Warning and indicator lights on the

tachometer
Emission control warning light
(Check Engine)
Airbag warning light
Safety belt warning light
PSM warning light
PSM OFF warning light
ABS warning light
Turn signal, left
Turn signal, right

Instrument Panel USA Models Brake warning light
A Engine oil temperature gauge F Engine oil pressure gauge
B Speedometer G Reset button for trip counter display/ High beam indicator light
C Tachometer brightness setting for instrument panel
D Multi-function display H Odometer Electric parking brake warning light
E Coolant temperature gauge I Digital speedometer
J Upshift indicator
K Indicator for selector-lever position
Gear display
speedometer
L Fuel gauge Rear fog light indicator light
M Marking showing position of filler flap
HOLD function indicator light
Low beam indicator light
High Beam Assistant indicator light
PDLS warning light
Tire pressure warning light
90 Instrument Panel and Multi-Function Display


tachometer
Emission control warning light
(Check Engine)
Airbag warning light
Safety belt warning light
PSM warning light
PSM OFF warning light
ABS warning light
Turn signal, left
Turn signal, right

Instrument Panel Canada Models Brake warning light
A Engine oil temperature gauge F Engine oil pressure gauge
B Speedometer G Reset button for trip counter display/ High beam indicator light
C Tachometer brightness setting for instrument panel
D Multi-function display H Odometer Electric parking brake warning light
E Coolant temperature gauge I Digital speedometer
J Upshift indicator
K Indicator for selector-lever position
Gear display
speedometer
L Fuel gauge Rear fog light indicator light
M Marking showing position of filler flap
HOLD function indicator light
Low beam indicator light
High Beam Assistant indicator light
PDLS warning light
Tire pressure warning light

Displays on the Instrument Panel Pointer in the lower area – engine cold Coolant level warning
f Avoid high engine speeds and heavy engine At engine temperatures below 140 °F (60 °C):
A – Engine oil temperature gauge loading. A low coolant level is indicated by the warning
A warning message will appear on the multi- message “Refill coolant Observe engine
function display in the instrument panel if the Pointer in the middle – normal operating
temperature temperature” on the multi-function display in the
engine oil temperature is too high.
f Reduce engine speed and engine load
instrument panel.
f Add coolant.
Pointer may move up to the red area when the
immediately if the red zone is reached. engine is heavily loaded and outside temperature
At engine temperatures above 140 °F (60 °C):
For information on warning messages on the is high.
A low coolant level is indicated by the warning
multi-function display: Coolant temperature warning
message “Refill coolant immediately Do not
If the coolant temperature is too high, the drive on” on the multi-function display in the
WARNING AND INFORMATION MESSAGES” temperature gauge needle moves to the instrument panel. The temperature gauge needle
on page 129. maximum mark and the temperature gauge also moves to the maximum mark and the
B – Speedometer warning light lights up. temperature gauge warning light flashes.
The analog display B is located on the left next to The warning message “Engine too hot Park f Switch engine off and let it cool.
the tachometer in the instrument panel. vehicle to cool down” will also appear on the f Add coolant.
multi-function display in the instrument panel. If the coolant level is low, warning indicators
C – Tachometer f Switch engine off and let it cool. may light up if the vehicle tilts at an extreme angle
The start of the red zone on the tachometer f Check radiators and air guides in front end (e.g. steep slopes) or generates high lateral
or rev-counter scale is a visual warning of the of vehicle for obstructions. acceleration while traveling round long bends (e.g.
maximum permissible engine speed. f Check the coolant level. driving in circles). If the warnings do not disappear
If the red zone is reached during acceleration, Top up with coolant if necessary. once the vehicle has assumed “normal” operating
fuel feed is interrupted in order to protect the f Have the fault corrected. state, check the coolant level.
engine. f Please see the chapter “CHECKING THE f Please see the chapter “CHECKING THE
COOLANT LEVEL AND ADDING COOLANT” COOLANT LEVEL AND ADDING COOLANT”
D – Multi-function display on page 242. on page 242.
For information on the multi-function display: f Please see the chapter “OVERVIEW OF f Please see the chapter “OVERVIEW OF
f Please see the chapter “OPERATING THE WARNING AND INFORMATION MESSAGES” WARNING AND INFORMATION MESSAGES”
MULTI-FUNCTION DISPLAY ON THE on page 129. on page 129.
INSTRUMENT PANEL” on page 96.
NOTICE
E – Coolant temperature gauge Information
f If the cooling system is in any way faulty, To prevent excessive temperatures, the cooling Risk of engine damage.
consult an authorized Porsche dealer. air ducts must not be obstructed by covering f Do not continue driving if the warning persists
them (e.g. with film, “stone guards”, etc.). even when the engine coolant level is correct.
f Have the fault corrected.

F – Engine oil pressure gauge G – Reset button for trip counter display/ H – Odometer
The oil pressure is controlled as required and brightness setting for instrument lighting The displays for the total mileage and individual
should be at least 51 psi (3.5 bar) at an engine Resetting trip counter display trips are integrated in the speedometer on the
speed of 5000 rpm. f Press rotary switch G for approx. 1 second. instrument panel.
The engine oil pressure varies depending on the The trip counter display is reset to “0”. The upper display counts the total mileage, the
engine speed, oil temperature and engine load. lower display shows individual trips.
Adjusting brightness of instrument lighting
If oil pressure drops abruptly and a message After exceeding 6,213 miles or 9,999 kilometers,
is displayed on the multi-function display For information on adjusting the brightness of the the trip counter returns to 0.
instrument lighting:
f Please see the chapter “INTERIOR/READING
when the engine is running or while driving:
f Stop immediately in a suitable place.
I – Digital speedometer
f Switch off the engine. LIGHTS” on page 84. The digital speedometer I is integrated in the
f Check whether there is an obvious oil leak on tachometer on the instrument panel.
or under the car. J – Upshift prompt indicator
f Select “Oil measurement” on the multi- The consumption-oriented shift indicator to the
function display.
f Please see the chapter “DISPLAY AND
right of the digital speed display on the
tachometer helps you to develop a fuel-saving
MEASUREMENT OF THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL”
driving style.
on page 101.
f Add engine oil if necessary.
The upshift indicator lights up – prompting you to
shift up to the next-higher gear – depending on the
NOTICE selected gear, engine speed and accelerator
pedal position.
Risk of engine damage. f Change to the next-higher gear when the
f Do not continue driving if there is an obvious upshift indicator lights up.
oil leak.
f Do not continue driving if the warning message
appears even when the oil level is correct.
Porsche dealer.

K – PDK indicator for selector-lever Transm. failure Park vehicle safely L – Fuel gauge
position The fuel gauge displays the contents of the tank
When the engine is running, the selector-lever – Effect: when the ignition is on.
position is indicated in gates D or M. Vehicle can be driven only until it comes to For information on fuel quality and refill capacities:
Warning messages a stop. f Please see the chapter “FILLING CAPACITIES”
– Action required: on page 289.
If the selector lever is between two positions It is not possible to continue driving. Stop the For information on fuel and refueling:
– Effects: vehicle immediately in a suitable place. Have f Please see the chapter “FUEL” on page 227.
The corresponding selector-lever position in the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche If the vehicle’s inclination changes (e.g. uphill/
the instrument panel flashes and the warning dealer. If the vehicle has to be towed: downhill driving), minor deviations in the gauge
“Engage gear selector properly” appears Please see the chapter “TOWING” may occur.
on the multi-function display. on page 278.
– Action required: Warning “Drive temperature too high Reduce Fuel reserve warning
Operate the footbrake and engage the load” If less than approximately 3.2 U.S. gallons
selector lever properly. – Effects: (12 liters) remains in the tank, the warning light on
“Warning jerks” can be felt when driving off and the multi-function display lights up when the
If there is a fault in the transmission
the engine power may be restricted. ignition is switched on or the engine is running.
f Refuel at the next opportunity.
– Depending on priority, either the “Transm.
fault Poss. no R gear Drive on poss.” – Action required:
warning or the warning “Transm. failure Park Do not hold the vehicle with the accelerator on
NOTICE
vehicle safely” will appear on the multi- a hill, for example. Hold the vehicle with the
function display. brake. Reduce engine load. Stop the vehicle in A shortage of fuel may damage the emission
a suitable place if possible. Allow the engine to control system.
Transm. fault Poss. no R gear run in selector-lever position P or N until the f Never drive the tank dry.
Drive on poss. warning disappears. f If the warning lights have come on, do not take
– Effects: f Please see the chapter “LIMP-HOME MODE” bends at high speed.
Restricted gearshift comfort, on page 178.
For information on the emission control system:
f Please see the chapter “EMISSION CONTROL
reverse gear may not function.
f Action required: Porsche Doppelkupplung
Have the fault corrected immediately at an When the engine is running, the display shows the SYSTEM” on page 225.
authorized Porsche dealer. currently engaged gear.

Battery/Alternator Check Engine NOTICE

Warning message (Emission Control) Risk of damage to the emission control system.
The warning message “Generator fault Park Warning light If the warning light on the instrument panel
vehicle safely” will appear on the multi-function The emission control system detects malfunctions continues flashing even when you have eased
display in the instrument panel if the vehicle that could cause increased pollutant emissions or off the accelerator pedal, the emission control
consequential damage etc. well in advance. system may overheat.
f Stop as soon as possible in a safe place.
electrical system voltage drops significantly.
f Stop at a safe place and switch the engine off. Faults are indicated by the warning light on the
instrument panel which then either lights up Make sure that combustible materials, such as
For information on warning messages on the
continuously or flashes. dry grass or leaves, cannot come into contact
multi-function display:
f Please see the chapter “OVERVIEW OF The faults are recorded in the control unit’s fault with the hot exhaust system.
memory. f Switch off the engine.
on page 129. The warning light on the instrument panel lights up
when the ignition is switched on as a lamp check Porsche dealer.
Possible causes and goes out approx. 1 second after the engine
– Defect in the battery charging system starts. Acoustic Signals
– Broken drive belt The warning light on the instrument panel flashes A speaker in the instrument panel generates
to indicate operating states (e.g. engine misfiring) acoustic signals.
NOTICE
which may cause damage to certain parts of the The warning message “Instrument cluster/
Risk of engine damage. emission control system. Park Assist audio fault Service required” will
The engine cooling does not function if the drive f In this case, immediately reduce the engine appear on the multi-function display in the
belt is torn. load by easing off the accelerator pedal. instrument panel if a speaker fault occurs.
f Do not continue driving. In order to avoid consequential damage to the The speaker cannot generate acoustic signals.
f Have the fault corrected. engine or the exhaust-gas cleaning system f Please see the chapter “OVERVIEW OF
f Please contact an authorized Porsche dealer. (e.g. catalytic converter): WARNING AND INFORMATION MESSAGES”
f Please contact an authorized Porsche dealer. on page 129.

Operating the Multi-Function

Display on the Instrument Panel
On the multi-function display, you can view
information relating to the relevant vehicle
equipment, operate the audio source (radio, CD,
iPod, etc.), check the oil level, check the tire
pressure, use the stopwatch or operate the
navigation system.
You can also modify different vehicle settings in
the “Vehicle” menu.
It is not possible to describe all details of the
functions in this Owner’s Manual. The examples
clearly demonstrate the functional principle and
clarify the menu structure.
h WARNING
Operation of the multi-
function display, radio,
navigation system, Multi-function display
telephone etc. during
Operating principle on vehicles without
driving.
multi-function steering wheel
Information The multi-function display is operated with the
You may be distracted from paying attention to the
The multi-function display is only active when the lower lever on the right of the steering column.
road if you set or operate the multi-function
display, radio, navigation system, telephone or ignition is on. Selecting menu, function, setting option
other equipment when driving. You may lose Certain menus are only available when the vehicle
f Push the lever downwards (position 3) or
control of the vehicle. has stopped, e.g. the adjustment menu for tire
upwards (position 4).
f Operate the equipment while driving only if the pressure monitoring.
Confirming selection (Enter)
f Push the lever forward (position 1).
traffic situation allows you to do so safely.
procedures only when the vehicle is stationary. Moving back one or several selection levels
f Pull the lever towards the steering wheel
(position 2) once or several times.

Individual assignment of the diamond

button
Porsche Communication Management (PCM)
functions, CDR functions or multi-function display
functions can be assigned to the ◊ button in the
multi-function display on the instrument panel.
Audio source selection is preset by default.
For information on individual assignment of the ◊
button:
f Please see the chapter “CHANGING BUTTON
ASSIGNMENT ON MULTI-FUNCTION STEERING
WHEEL” on page 127.
For information on Porsche Communication
Management (PCM) and CDR:
f Please refer to the separate operating
instructions.
Operating principle on vehicles with A - Upper status area

multi-function steering wheel B - Title area with menu indicator
C - Information area
The multi-function display is operated using the D - Lower status area
rotary knob A, the Back button B and the diamond
◊ button C, which can be assigned as required. Areas on the multi-function display
f Please see the chapter “FUNCTION BUTTONS Upper status area/Lower status area
ON THE MULTI-FUNCTION STEERING WHEEL” The upper A and lower status area D permanently
on page 53. display basic information, such as the radio
Selecting menu, function, setting option station, compass, time and temperature or the
f Turn rotary knob A upwards or downwards.
remaining range.
Confirming selection (Enter)

f Press rotary knob A.
Moving back one or several selection levels
f Press button B (Back button).

The display contents of the upper and lower status Activating functions, opening submenus
area can be individually adapted. and accessing setting options from the
For information on adapting the multi-function main menu areas
display: Press the rotary knob A or push the right lower
f Please see the chapter “ADAPTING lever on the steering wheel forwards (position 1)
APPEARANCE OF MULTI-FUNCTION DISPLAY” to access menus, other functions and setting
on page 118. options regardless of the main menu area.
Title area with menu indicator 1. Select main menu
The menu item currently selected is displayed in and confirm.
the title area B.
2. Select function, submenu or setting option
The menu indicator on the right shows the position
and confirm.
of the current menu item in the overall menu and
displays the number of other menu items on this Browsing through long lists
menu level.
When searching for an entry in long telephone and
The wider the menu indicator, the fewer menu
audio lists on vehicles with PCM, you can skip
items the current menu contains.
directly to other entries with the same first letter.
Information area f Briefly press the rotary knob A or hold the
The information area C displays the menu items control stalk in position 3 or 4.
currently available for selection or after a menu A letter selection screen appears.
item is selected, information relating to this menu f Select the desired first letter and confirm.
item or other selection options. The marking skips to the first list entry
beginning with the letter selected.

Info Messages Current speed

Oil measurement Setting the speed
Limits Service interval
Menu scope
Settings Audio
Vehicle menu
Station/Track
Upper line
Answer/Reject/End Limit 1/Limit 2 PCM display
Phonebook Lower line
Previous calls Shift request
Received calls Display Brightness
Light & Visibility Exterior lights
Manual zoom
Interior lights
Auto zoom Locking
3D map Wiper
North up Air conditioning Revers. opt.
Show destination/position Date & Time Door lock/unlock
Comfort Entry
Destination input Units Auto Memory
Vehicle Start/Stop route guidance
Language Air flow
Audio Vent. panel
Since Volume
Telephone Total Auto air circ.
Map To destination Steering wheel op. Time
Navigation Fact. settings Date
Fill info DST (+01:00)
Trip Tire type
Time Chrono
Tire pressure Partial/full load
Comfort/standard pressure Last destination Speedometer
Allwheel Temperature
Stored destinations
Chrono Start Tire pressure
Stop POIs Consumption
G-Force
Round
Performance German/French...
Int.
ParkAssist
ACC Cont.
Torque Warn. tones
Reset ◊ button

Vehicle Menu Displaying service intervals

A large amount of vehicle information can be The internal mileage counter indicates when the
displayed and vehicle settings made in the next vehicle service is due.
“Vehicle” main menu. 1. Main menu “Vehicle”
1. Main menu “Vehicle” > “Info”
in the main menu. 2. “Service intervals”
and confirm.
The vehicle information display can be adapted
individually. 3. Select the desired service interval
For information on adapting the vehicle menu: and confirm.
f Please see the chapter “ADAPTING DISPLAY Available service interval displays:
CONTENTS IN VEHICLE INFORMATION AREA”
– “Service”
on page 118.
– “Interm. service”
Displaying vehicle information – “Oil change”
Pending warning messages, information on
forthcoming service intervals and the average fuel
consumption can be viewed in the “Info” sub-menu Displaying messages
of the “Vehicle” main menu area. All current warning messages and vehicle
messages can be viewed on the multi-function
1. Main menu “Vehicle” display.
> “Info” The warning symbol in the lower status area
and confirm. indicates the number of pending warning
messages.
If several warning messages are pending,
you can browse through the message list.
1. Main menu “Vehicle”
> “Info”
2. “Messages”
and confirm.

Display and measurement of the If the bottom segment is red (illustration C), the oil
engine oil level level has dropped below the minimum mark.
The message “Oil level below min. Refill oil at
NOTICE
once Do not drive on” appears on the multi-
Risk of engine damage due to inadequate function display.
lubrication. f Add engine oil immediately.
f Regularly check the oil level each time before Top-up quantity
refueling.
f Do not allow the oil level to fall below the
The difference between the minimum and
maximum marks on the segment display is
minimum mark.
approx. 1.8 quarts (1.7 liters).
Prerequisites for the oil-level gauge:
f Never add more engine oil than required to
reach the maximum mark.
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface.
If the segments are shown in yellow up to the
2. Switch off engine, which is at operating
top edge (illustration D), this indicates that the
temperature.
maximum engine filling capacity has been
3. Wait for approx. 1 minute.
exceeded. Exceeding the maximum capacity may
4. Select the “Oil measurement” function on
result in blue smoke formation and cause long-
the multi-function display. Example displays for oil level
term damage to the catalytic converters
A - Maximum oil level reached
Selecting the Oil measurement function B - Minimum oil level reached depending on the overfill quantity and various
on the multi-function display C - Oil level below minimum external influences.
D - Oil level above maximum If too much engine oil was added, the message
1. Main menu “Vehicle” Select
Measured oil level “Oil level above maximum Consult a
> “Oil measurement”
The oil level reading is shown on the segment workshop Driving permitted” appears on the
and confirm.
multi-function display.
f Have the oil quantity corrected at the next
display in the Oil measurement menu.
f Please see the chapter “OVERVIEW OF If the segments are filled in green up to the top line
WARNING AND INFORMATION MESSAGES” opportunity.
(illustration A), the oil level has reached the
on page 129. Please contact an authorized Porsche dealer.
maximum mark.
f Under no circumstances add engine oil.
If the bottom segment is shown in yellow
(illustration B), the oil level has reached the
minimum mark.
The message “Oil level minimum reached
Refill oil” appears on the multi-function display.
f Add engine oil immediately.

Measuring the oil level after topping up Setting a speed limit Audio Menu
engine oil or opening the engine
1. Main menu “Vehicle” In the “Audio” main menu, you can select a radio
compartment lid
> “Limits” station either from the station list or the list of
The oil level can be checked after waiting for stored stations, depending on the settings, or a
approx. 1 minute with the vehicle parked on a level 2. Select “Limit 1: ---” or
track from the active audio source, e.g. disk.
surface and the engine at operating temperature. “Limit 2: ---“
If the engine compartment lid is opened when the and confirm. 1. Select “Audio” in the main menu
engine is cold (e.g. in order to top up engine oil), 3. Select “Current speed” or and confirm.
the oil level cannot be displayed for a certain time. „---“ 2. Select the desired radio station or track
The message “No information about oil level and confirm. and confirm.
available at present” appears on the multi-
function display. You can either adopt the current speed of the For information on adjusting audio menu settings:
f Engine oil should therefore only be topped vehicle or specify your own speed limit. f Please see the chapter “ADAPTING DISPLAY
up with the engine at operating temperature. Activating and deactivating speed limits CONTENTS OF AUDIO MAIN MENU”
This ensures short waiting times for the on page 118.
soonest possible oil level display. 1. Main menu “Vehicle”
> “Limits”
Failure
If the oil-level indicator fails, the message “Oil 2. Select “Limit 1: ---” or
level measurement fault Consult a workshop “Limit 2: ---“
Driving permitted” appears on the multi-function and confirm.
display. 3. Select “Active”
Setting speed limits 4. Confirm your selection.
If a speed limit is preset and activated on the Limit is active.
multi-function display, a warning message appears Limit is not active.
if the speed limit is exceeded.
A speed limit can be used to remind the driver to Adjusting vehicle settings
keep to the maximum speed permitted for the tire Various vehicle settings can be modified in the
type fitted to the vehicle, for example. “Settings” submenu.
For information on modifying vehicle settings:
f Please see the chapter “VEHICLE SETTINGS
> “Limits”
ON THE MULTI-FUNCTION DISPLAY”
and confirm.
on page 117.

Phone Menu Ending a call Map Menu

In the “Phone” main menu, you can retrieve 1. Main menu “Phone” In the “Map” main menu, you can view and modify
telephone numbers stored in the phonebook or in the map display on the navigation system.
lists of most recently dialed or received calls. 2. “End call”
and confirm. 1. Main menu “Map”
1. Main menu “Phone” in the main menu.
and confirm. Making multiple calls simultaneously
During an active telephone conversation, you have Modifying map display
Dialing telephone number the option of starting another telephone 1. Main menu “Map”
conversation.
1. Main menu “Phone” and confirm.
You can have a separate conversation with the
2. “Phonebook” or person you have called or alternatively start a 2. Select display option
“Previous calls” or conference call together with the other caller. and confirm.
“Received calls”
Making additional calls 3. Confirm your selection.
and confirm.
During a current call: Function is active.
3. Select the desired telephone number Function is not active.
and confirm. 1. Main menu “Phone”
2. “New call”
Answering calls
and confirm.
1. Main menu “Phone”
Switching between callers
2. Select “Answer”
2. “Swap”
Rejecting calls and confirm.
1. Main menu “Phone”
Adding a caller to a conference call
2. “Reject”
2. “Conference”
and confirm.

Available display options: Navigation Menu Starting route guidance

– “Auto zoom” If route guidance is inactive and you have entered
In the “Navigation” main menu, you can enter
The scale of the map is set automatically from a new navigation destination you can then start
a navigation destination, start route guidance and
the current position of the vehicle to the next route guidance.
view the navigation information for an active route.
navigation maneuver point.
– “3D map” 1. Main menu “Navigation” 1. Main menu “Navigation”
Three-dimensional map display. and confirm. 2. “Start route guidance”
– “North up” and confirm.
The map always faces north. Entering navigation destination
Enlarging and reducing map display You can enter a navigation destination in the Stopping route guidance
multi-function display. You can stop route guidance while in progress.
The zoom factor of the map display can be
Only navigation destinations from the list of
adapted individually. 1. Main menu “Navigation”
previous destinations or from the list of preset
1. Main menu “Map” POIs or stored destinations can be selected. 2. “Stop route guidance”
> “Manual zoom” and confirm.
1. Main menu “Navigation”
and confirm.
> “Destination input”
2. Select the desired zoom setting
2. “Last destination” or
and confirm the setting.
“Stored destinations” or
“POIs”
Displaying current location or destination
and confirm.
You can view the navigation destination or current
vehicle position on an enlarged section of the 3. Select desired navigation destination
map. and confirm.
1. Main menu “Map”

2. “Show destination” or
“Show position”
and confirm.

Available driving data: Tire Pressure Menu (Tire Pressure

– “since”
Driving data since the last vehicle start.
Monitoring System, TPMS)
The driving data is reset automatically once This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
the vehicle has remained stationary for Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
2 hours (with the ignition switched off). Operation of this device is subject to the following
– “Total” two conditions:
Cumulative driving data. 1. This device may not cause harmful
The driving data is added progressively until interference, and
a reset is performed. The data is retained even 2. this device must accept any interference
if the ignition key is removed. received including interference that may cause
– “to destination” undesired operation.
Driving data up to navigation destination. Changes or modifications not expressly approved
If route guidance is active, the driving data is by the party responsible for compliance could void
calculated and displayed up to the navigation the user's authority to operate the equipment.
destination. Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should
be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the
Resetting driving data
inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle
Trip Menu The selected driving data display can be reset.
manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire
In the “Trip” main menu, the driving data: 1. Main menu “Trip”. inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of
– Ride time a different size than the size indicated on the
– Distance 2. Select the relevant driving data display
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
– Average fuel consumption and confirm.
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure
– Average speed 3. Select “Reset” for those tires.)
can be retrieved and reset. and confirm. For information on the tire inflation pressure label:
1. Main menu “Trip”. f Please see the chapter “TIRES AND WHEELS”
in the main menu. on page 244.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
Displaying driving data equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system
There are three driving data displays available. (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale
(warning light) when one or more of your tires is
1. Main menu “Trip”. significantly under-inflated.
2. Select “1 – since” or Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
“2 – consecutive” or illuminates, you should stop and check your tires
“3 – to destination” as soon as possible, and inflate them to the
and confirm. proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-
inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can
lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces

fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect f Sealing the tire with tire sealant is only an will then appear on the multi-purpose display.
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. emergency repair so you can drive to the Check the tire pressure at the next opportunity.
The display as well as the settings for the Tire nearest specialist workshop.
Pressure Monitoring System take place on the The maximum permitted speed is 50 mph Warning light
multi-function display. (80 km/h).
However, the tire pressure must still be set f Do not drive with tires in which the tire h WARNING Attention to TPMS
pressure drops again very quickly. In case of Malfunction Indicator
manually on the wheel.
f Please see the chapter “TIRE PRESSURE FOR doubt, have tires checked by a specialist Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
COLD TIRES (68 °F/ 20 °C)” on page 287. workshop. malfunction indicator to indicate when the system
f Defective tires must be replaced immediately is not operating properly.
h WARNING Maintaining Tire at an authorized Porsche dealer. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
Pressure Tires must never be repaired under any the low tire pressure telltale.
Driving the vehicle with low tire pressure increases circumstances. When the system detects a malfunction, the
the risk of a tire failure and resulting loss of f If Tire Pressure Monitoring System is defective telltale will flash for approximately one minute and
control. Furthermore, low tire pressure increases (e.g. defective wheel transmitter), contact an then remain continuously illuminated. This
rate of wear of the affected tires. authorized Porsche dealer immediately and sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle
Please note that the Tire Pressure Monitoring have the damage repaired. start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
System is not a substitute for proper tire The tire pressure will not be monitored at all When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to or will be monitored only partially when Tire system may not be able to detect or signal low tire
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under- Pressure Monitoring System is defective. pressure as intended.
inflation has not reached the level to trigger For information on warning messages on the multi- TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
illumination of Tire Pressure Monitoring System purpose display: reasons, including the installation of replacement
low tire pressure telltale. Low tire pressure f Please see the chapter “OVERVIEW OF or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that
reduces the road safety of the vehicle and WARNING AND INFORMATION MESSAGES” prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.
destroys the tire and wheel. on page 129. f Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale
Tire Pressure Monitoring System gives a warning f Incomplete entries or selection of the wrong after replacing one or more tires or wheels on
about a pressure drop caused by natural diffusion tires on the multi-purpose display affect the your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
as well as about a gradual loss of pressure caused accuracy of warnings and messages. alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
by foreign objects. The settings in the tire pressure menu must be continue to function properly.
Tire Pressure Monitoring cannot warn you about updated following a wheel change or changes
tire damage that occurs suddenly (e.g. flat tire due in vehicle loading.
to abrupt external effects). f Use only the pressure differences shown in the
f When a red tire pressure warning appears, “Fill info” display in the Tire pressure menu
stop immediately in a suitable place and check or from the corresponding tire pressure
the tires for damage. If necessary, remedy the warning when correcting the tire pressure.
damage with a tire sealant. f Tires can lose air over time without a tire
f Do not by any means continue to drive with defect being present. A tire pressure warning
defective tires.

The warning light in the instrument panel lights up:

– When a loss in pressure has been detected. Information
– In the event of a defect in Tire Pressure After the ignition is switched on, it can take up to
Monitoring or a temporary fault. approx. 1 minute until all tire pressures are
– When learning new fitted wheels/wheel displayed. Dashes (-.-) appear instead of the tire
transmitters, as long as the vehicle’s own pressures.
wheels have not yet been recognized.
The tire pressure warning light on the instrument
panel goes out only when the cause of the fault
has been rectified.
Overview of tire pressure monitoring
functions
Tire Pressure Monitoring offers the following
functions:
– Display of the actual tire pressure when
stationary and while the vehicle is in motion.
– Tire pressure warnings in two stages (yellow
Tire pressure display on the multi-function display
and red warning).
– In the “TPMS” menu, the settings “Fill info” Selecting the TPMS function on the
(display of the deviation from the required multi-function display
pressure, refill pressure), “Tire type”, “Full
1. Select the “TPMS” main menu.
load” and “Comfort press.” are available
when the vehicle is stationary. The “TPMS” function displays the temperature-
dependent tire pressures (actual pressures) in the
four wheels.
You can watch the tire pressure rise as the
temperature increases while driving.
Information
This display of the actual pressures is only for
information.
f Under no circumstances should the tire
pressures be changed based on this display.

The tire pressure to be corrected (refill pressure)

is indicated on the displayed wheel.
Example: If “–2 psi”/“–0.2 bar“ is displayed for
the front right tire, 2 psi/0.2 bar/20 kPa must be
added to this tire.
The displayed pressures take into account the tire
temperature.
f Use only the pressure values shown in the “Fill
info” display in the “TPMS” main menu or from
the corresponding tire pressure warning when
correcting the tire pressure.
If the tires are not yet “taught”, the new required
pressures are displayed instead of the actual
differential pressures.
For information on teaching tires:
f Please see the chapter “SYSTEM LEARNING”
on page 111.
Viewing current settings in the TPMS Viewing Fill info in the TPMS menu
menu (only when vehicle is stationary) You can read the tire pressures to be corrected on
this display.
1. Main menu “TPMS”.
2. Confirm “TPMS”. 1. Main menu “TPMS”.
2. Confirm “TPMS”.
3. Select the “Fill info”
menu and confirm.

Selecting tire type in the TPMS menu The new tire type and tire size must be selected
(type and size of fitted tire) even if the settings for the new set of wheels are Information
the same as for the old wheels. The message “Action cancelled” appears if the
h WARNING Exceeding Maximum
setting process is interrupted.
Rated Tire Speed 1. Main menu “TPMS”.
All entries made up to this point are lost, and the
Exceeding the maximum tire speed could result in 2. Confirm “TPMS”. original settings remain in effect.
a tire burst, causing loss of control of the vehicle.
f Always observe the permissible maximum
3. Select “Tire type” and confirm. Before fitting tires with dimensions that are not
already stored in the multi-function display, the
speed of the respective tire. 4. Select
f Porsche recommends obeying all traffic laws
missing information should be added to the multi-
“20" Summer” or
function display by your authorized Porsche
at all times to maintain the safety of yourself “20" Winter”
dealer.
f Please contact an authorized Porsche dealer.
and all vehicle occupants. and confirm.
Option is selected. f Use only tires approved by Porsche.

h WARNING Entering Tire Data and
Option is not selected. The available items in the tire pressure menu
Display
The selected setting appears in the TPMS menu in depend on the model type. For this reason, some
Incomplete entries or selection of the wrong tires of the selection options shown here may not be
the line “Tire type” (e.g. “20" (W)” with the
on the multi-function display affect correct available on your multi-function display.
setting option “20" Winter”).
indication of warnings and messages.
f The settings must be updated in the “Tire
Tire selection has only been completed
successfully when the following message appears
pressure” menu after changing a wheel, filling
on the multi-function display (example):
with tire sealant or adding air (after previous
warning “Check tires”). “No tire pressure monitoring System is
learning”.
f Please see the chapter “CHANGING A WHEEL
Please see the chapter “RED WARNING –
“CHECK TIRES”” on page 112.
AND REPLACING TIRES” on page 113.

Selecting load in the TPMS menu Selecting comfort/standard pressure in h WARNING Low Tire Pressure
the TPMS menu Loss of Control
For speeds up to 165 mph (270 km/h), the tire Prolonged driving at low tire pressure or even
2. Confirm “TPMS”. pressures can be reduced to increase suspension short-term driving at high speeds on tires which
3. Full load comfort. have too low a pressure is likely to result in a loss
Full load is selected. If you select “Comfort press.”, the TPMS system of control of your vehicle, either due to a failure to
automatically uses lower pressure values when maintain directional control under side loads or
monitoring tire pressure. due to tire failure.
Full load
If “Comfort press.” is deactivated or standard Tires are inflated to comfort pressure at the
Partial load is selected.
pressure is activated, the standard required factory, which is not suitable for driving at very
pressures suitable for speeds up to the maximum high speeds.
Change or select the desired load type by
enabling or disabling the “Full load” box.
vehicle speed are automatically monitored. f Always adjust the pressure in the tires to the
standard pressure setting when driving at
f Adapt the pressure of the tires to the selected
higher speeds.
load type. 2. Confirm “TPMS” f Remember to adjust the setting in the Tire
Please see the chapter “VIEWING FILL INFO IN 3. Comfort pressure Pressure Monitoring System accordingly.
THE TPMS MENU” on page 108. Comfort pressure is selected.
Information Comfort press.

If this menu is not displayed, the specified tire Standard pressure is selected.
pressures are valid for all types of vehicle load.
Change or select comfort pressure/standard
pressure by enabling or disabling the
“Comfort pressure” box.
The comfort tire pressures are included in the

technical data
or
in “Fill info” when the “Comfort press.” menu is
activated.

System learning Tire pressure warnings

Tire Pressure Monitoring System begins to “learn” The tire pressure warning light on the instrument
the tires after a wheel change, wheel transmitter panel and a corresponding message on the multi-
replacement or update of the tire settings. During function display warn about loss of pressure in two
this process, TPMS recognizes the wheels and stages (yellow and red), depending on the amount
their locations. of pressure loss.
The message “No tire pressure monitoring
System is learning” appears on the multi-
function display.
The wheel learning process takes place
exclusively when the vehicle is being driven
(vehicle speed above 16 mph (25 km/h)).
TPMS requires a certain amount of time to learn
the wheels. During this time, the current tire
pressures are not available on the multi-function
display:
– The tire pressure warning light stays on until all
“Comfort pressure Reduce speed“ warning wheels have been learned.
If the maximum speed of the preset comfort – Lines (-.-) appear on the display of the “TPMS”
pressure is exceeded and the tire pressure is function.
below a critical limit, a warning message appears – The required pressures for cold tires (68 °F/
on the multi-function display. 20 °C) are shown under “Fill info” in the
Driving at excessive “TPMS” main menu.
h WARNING
speeds when the Position and pressure information is displayed as
comfort pressure is soon as TPMS has assigned the wheels
active recognized as belonging to the vehicle to the
correct wheel positions.
f Check the tire pressure for all wheels under
Driving at excessive speeds when the comfort
pressure is active will destroy the tires.
f Reduce speed to below the displayed
“Fill info”.
f Correct the tire pressure to the required
maximum speed.
f Always inflate the tires to the standard tire
pressure if necessary (differential pressure
value “0.0”).
pressure when driving at higher speeds.

Yellow warning – “Top off air” Red warning – “Check tires” “Tire pressure Reduce speed” warning
The pressure in the tire is more than 4 to 7 psi/ At speeds below 100 mph (160 km/h): At speeds above 165 mph (270 km/h):
0.3 to 0.5 bar/30 to 50 kPa too low. The tire – The pressure in the tire has dropped by 20 % – The pressure in the tire has dropped by more
pressure warning specifies the affected tire and below the required pressure or by more than 4 psi/0.3 bar/30 kPa. This pressure
the target tire pressure. than 7 psi/0.5 bar/50 kPa. This significant loss is a danger to road safety.
f Fill up with air at the next opportunity. pressure loss is a danger to road safety. f When the tire pressure warning appears,
This tire pressure warning appears: At speeds above 100 mph (160 km/h): reduce speed to below 165 mph (270 km/h)
– for approx. 10 seconds when the vehicle is – The pressure in the tire has dropped by more until the warning disappears.
stationary and the ignition is switched off or than 6 psi/0.4 bar/40 kPa. This significant When driving at very high speeds, increase the
– when the ignition is switched on again. pressure loss is a danger to road safety. tire pressure to the required pressure
The warning can be acknowledged when the f When the tire pressure warning appears, stop (differential pressure value “0.0”).
ignition is switched on. immediately at a suitable location. Check the For information on tire sealing compound:
The tire pressure warning light in the instrument indicated tire for signs of damage. If f Please see the chapter “FILLING IN TIRE
panel goes out only when the tire pressure has necessary, fill in tire sealant and set the SEALANT” on page 265.
been corrected (differential pressure value “0.0”). correct tire pressure.
This tire pressure warning also appears when
driving and can be acknowledged.
The tire pressure warning light in the instrument
panel goes out only when the tire pressure has
been corrected (differential pressure value “0.0”).

Warning light Changing a wheel and replacing tires Partial monitoring

The warning light in the instrument panel lights up: f New wheels must be fitted with radio Monitoring of the other wheels is continued if there
– When a loss in pressure has been detected transmitters for Tire Pressure Monitoring is a fault in one or two wheel transmitters.
(warning light: lights up continuously). System. – The tire pressure warning light lights up.
– In the event of a defect in TPMS or a temporary Before tires are changed, the battery charge – The message “Restricted monitoring”
fault (warning light: flashes for 60 seconds, condition of the wheel transmitters should be appears on the multi-function display.
then lights up continuously). checked. – No tire pressures are displayed on the multi-
– When learning new fitted wheels/wheel f Please contact an authorized Porsche dealer. function display for wheels with faulty wheel
transmitters, as long as the vehicle’s own f Switch off the ignition when changing a wheel. transmitters.
wheels have not yet been recognized (warning The tire settings on the multi-function display must
No monitoring
light: flashes for 60 seconds, then lights up be updated after changing a wheel.
continuously). If the tire settings are not updated, the message In the event of faults, Tire Pressure Monitoring
“Tire change? Update settings” is displayed on System cannot monitor the tire pressure.
A warning message also appears on the multi-
the multi-function display. The warning light on the instrument panel lights up
function display in the instrument panel.
f Please see the chapter “OVERVIEW OF f Update the multi-function display settings the and a corresponding message appears on the
next time the vehicle is stationary. multi-function display.
on page 129. Monitoring is not active:
Pressure increase as the result of – In the event of a defect in TPMS or if more than
The tire pressure warning light on the instrument temperature increase 2 wheel transmitters are defective.
panel goes out only when the cause of the fault
In accordance with physical principles, the tire – If wheel transmitters for Tire Pressure
has been rectified.
pressure changes as the temperature changes. Monitoring System are missing.
For every 18 °F (10 °C) change in temperature, – During the learning phase after the tire settings
the tire pressure increases or decreases by have been updated.
around 1.5 psi/0.1 bar/10 kPa. – After a wheel change without updating the tire
settings.
– If more than four wheel transmitters are
recognized.
– If there is external interference by other radio
sources, e.g. wireless headphones.
– If tire temperatures are too high.
on page 129.

Stopwatch on the dashboard

The stopwatch has an analog and a digital display.
The large pointer of the analog display measures
the seconds. The two small pointers measure
hours and minutes. The display restarts at zero
after 12 hours.
Seconds and increments of 1/10th and
1/100th of a second can be read on the
digital display.
The digital display and the multi-function display
can show up to 99 hours and 59 minutes.
Stopwatch timing displays
The stopwatch time is displayed at different
positions on the dashboard:
– In the stopwatch on the dashboard.
– In the “Chrono” menu in the multi-function
display on the instrument panel.
Allwheel Menu Chrono Menu (Stopwatch) – In the “CAR” main menu on the PCM.
(Porsche Traction Management PTM) You can use the stopwatch to measure any times,
e.g. on race circuits or on work-related journeys.
Displaying the time on the stopwatch
In the “Allwheel” main menu, the current torque You can configure the stopwatch on the
Measured lap times can be stored and evaluated
distribution between front and rear axles is shown dashboard to display the time in the multi-function
if the vehicle is equipped with Porsche
graphically in the form of bar diagrams. display on the instrument panel.
Communication Management (PCM).
1. Main menu: Select “Allwheel” f Please observe the chapter “SPORT DISPLAY” For information on displaying the time on the
and confirm. in the separate PCM operating instructions. stopwatch:
f Please see the chapter “DISPLAYING TIME IN
For information on the operating principle of the STOPWATCH ON DASHBOARD” on page 125.
PTM:
f PLEASE SEE THE CHAPTER “PORSCHE
TRACTION MANAGEMENT (PTM)”
ON PAGE 180.

Chrono on multi-function display Stopping lap/Starting new lap

All stopwatch displays are started and stopped in The current stopwatch time can be stored as a lap
the “Chrono” menu on the multi-function display. time while the stopwatch is still running.
For instructions on using the multi-function
1. Main menu “Chrono”
display:
f Please see the chapter “OPERATING THE 2. Select “Round”
MULTI-FUNCTION DISPLAY ON THE and confirm.
The lap counter value A is incremented by one.
1. Main menu “Chrono” The time of the fastest completed lap is stored
and confirm. temporarily as a reference value C.
The stopwatch time B and the circle display D turn
a different color to indicate whether the current
Information lap time is quicker than, slower than or identical to
If you exit the “Chrono” menu while the stopwatch the current fastest lap.
is running, measurement will continue. – Green: Current lap time is faster.
The stopwatch stops after the ignition is switched – Yellow: Current lap time is identical.
off. If the ignition is switched on again within A - Number of completed laps – Red: Current lap time is slower.
approximately 4 minutes, the stopwatch will B - Current stopwatch time
continue to run. C - Reference time (fastest lap)
Information
The only way to reset the stopwatch to zero is D - Circle display: Comparison of current lap time
with the reference time If a reference time has not been stored yet,
by selecting “Reset” in the “Chrono” menu.
the reference time position C remains blank.
For information on resetting the stopwatch: Starting timing
f Please see the chapter “RESETTING THE
The segment display is not colored.
1. Main menu “Chrono” A maximum of 63 laps can be stored during
STOPWATCH TIME” on page 116.
2. Select “Start” each session.
and confirm.
The stopwatch time B is displayed simultaneously

on all stopwatch displays in the vehicle.

Storing intermediate time

You can store an intermediate time while the
stopwatch is still running.
2. Select “Int.”
and confirm.
The intermediate time is displayed temporarily

on the multi-function display. It is not stored.
Timing continues in the background.
Stopping timing
You can stop the stopwatch at any time.
2. Select “Stop”
and confirm.
G-Force Menu Performance Menu
The stopwatch time B stops.
In the “G-Force” main menu, the current lateral Torque
Continuing timing and longitudinal acceleration forces are shown In the “Performance” main menu, the current
You can resume timing again after stopping the graphically in the form of a circular diagram. torque is displayed graphically as a function of
stopwatch. The maximum occurring longitudinal and lateral engine speed.
acceleration forces are displayed in the “G-Force When “Sport” or “Sport Plus” mode is activated,
1. Main menu “Chrono” max” sub-menu. the additional on-demand torque (overboost
> “Stop” The values can be reset via the menu item function) appears as a white area in the curve.
2. “Res.” “Reset”.
For information on the overboost function:
and confirm. 1. “G-Force” main menu f Please see the chapter “OVERBOOST
FUNCTION” on page 188.
The stopwatch time B continues. 2. Confirm “G-Force max”.
Resetting the stopwatch time 3. “Reset” 1. Main menu “Performance”
The stopwatch time can be reset to zero. and confirm. 2. Select “Torque”
and confirm.
> “Stop”
2. Select “Reset”
and confirm.
All stopwatch time displays are reset to zero.

ACC Menu Vehicle Settings on the Selecting settings menu

For information on operating and display options Multi-Function Display 1. Main menu “Vehicle”
for the adaptive cruise control: Different settings can be adjusted in the > “Settings”
f Please see the chapter “ADAPTIVE CRUISE multi-function display on the instrument panel and confirm.
CONTROL” on page 157. depending on the vehicle equipment.
On vehicles with memory, the settings are stored Selecting setting options or activating
on the car key or the person buttons in the driver’s vehicle functions
door. A symbol positioned in front of a setting option
For information on the memory: indicates whether the option is selected or
f Please see the chapter “STORING PERSONAL a vehicle function is activated.
SETTINGS” on page 143. Selecting one of several options
h WARNING
Setting or operating the Option is selected.
multi-function display Option is not selected.
when driving
Activating and deactivating functions
Setting or operating the multi-function display
when driving could distract you from paying Function is activated.
attention to traffic. You could lose control of the Function is deactivated.
vehicle.
Reset to factory settings
All settings made in the multi-function display
procedures only with the vehicle stationary and
can be reset to the factory settings:
in park.
Information
All personal settings that have already been stored
will be lost as a result of resetting to factory
settings.

Adapting display contents of audio main

menu
> “Settings”
In the audio main menu, you can display either
2. “Fact. settings” a list of all radio stations currently within range
and confirm. or a list of all stored radio stations.
3. Select “Yes”
and confirm.
> “Settings”
Adapting appearance of multi-function > “Display”
display 2. “Audio”
The contents and appearance of the multi-function and confirm.
display can be adapted individually. 3. Select the desired display contents
1. Main menu “Vehicle” and confirm.
> “Settings”
Available display contents:
> “Display”
– “Station list”
and confirm.
List of stations currently within range.
Selecting main menu display contents – “Preset list” Multi-function display configuration example
List of stored stations. Adapting display contents in vehicle
Individual elements in the main menu can be
hidden and shown as required. information area
The main menu items “Vehicle” and “ACC” You can select four of the many items of vehicle
cannot be hidden. information for display in the “Vehicle” menu and
assignment to the display areas 1, 2, 3 and 4.
> “Settings”
> “Display”
2. Select “Menu scope”
and confirm.
3. Select the desired main menu items.
4. Confirm your selection.
Menu item is displayed.
Menu item is hidden.

Displaying PCM information on the

Information multi-function display
> “Settings”
> “Display” One item of information cannot be assigned to You can configure the multi-function display to
several areas or one area and the “Upper line”. temporarily display different items of information
2. “Vehicle menu” relating to Porsche Communication Management
and confirm. Adapting upper status area (PCM).
3. Select “1:” or You can assign various items of information to the
“2:” or upper status area A in the multi-function display.
> “Settings”
“3:” or
1. Main menu “Vehicle” > “Display”
“4:”
and confirm. > “Settings” 2. Select “PCM display”
> “Display” and confirm.
4. Select the desired display contents
and confirm. 2. “Upper line” 3. Select the PCM information
and confirm. in the main menu.
Available display contents: 3. Select the desired display contents
– “Veh. voltage” 4. Confirm your selection.
and confirm.
– “Oil pressure” Information is displayed.
– “Oil temperature” Available display contents: Information is not displayed.
– “Boost pressure” – “Station name”
– “Coolant temp.” – Coolant temperature Available PCM information:
– “Fuel Range”
– “Fuel Range” – “Map info”
– “Compass”
– “Dst: Arrival” – Arrival time at destination Navigation map appears automatically when
– “Blank line”
– “Int.: Arrival” – Arrival time at intermediate navigation information is available.
No information is displayed in the upper status
destination – “Phone info”
area A.
– “Dst: Trip time” – Driving time to destination Information on incoming and outgoing calls
– “Int.: Trip time” – Driving time to intermediate is displayed.
destination – “Voice control”
– “Compass” Help text appears when the voice control
– “GPS height” button is pressed.
– “Time” – “Arrow info”
– “Date”. Navigation arrow appears automatically
– “Station/Track” – Current radio station/ when navigation information is available.
music track – “Speed limit”
– “Phone info” – Network strength/network Speed limits marked on the map in the
name navigation system are displayed.
– “Blank line” – Line remains empty

Adapting lower status area Light and visibility settings Adjusting off delay for Welcome Home and
You can assign the current time and outside The exterior lights, interior lighting and visual aids Entry functions
temperature to the lower status area B in the for reversing the vehicle can be adapted The off delay of the Welcome Home and Entry
multi-function display. individually. functions can be adapted individually.
1. Main menu “Vehicle” 1. Main menu “Vehicle” 1. Main menu “Vehicle”
> “Settings” > “Settings” > “Settings”
> “Display” > “Light & Visibility” > “Light & Visibility”
and confirm. > “Exterior lights”
2. “Lower line”
and confirm. 2. “Fade-out”
Adjusting exterior lights
and confirm.
3. Select the desired display contents You can adapt the exterior light functions on the
and confirm. vehicle e.g. off delays of the Welcome Home and 3. Set desired off delay
Entry functions in the “Exterior lights” menu. and confirm the setting.
Available display contents:
– “Time” 1. Main menu “Vehicle” Adjusting interior lights
– “Temperature” > “Settings” Interior light functions on the vehicle can be
– “Time & Temp.” > “Light & Visibility” adapted individually in the “Interior lights” menu.
Adjusting display brightness > “Exterior lights”
and confirm. 1. Main menu: Select “Vehicle”
The brightness of the multi-function display can be > “Settings”
adjusted to suit individual requirements. Activating and deactivating High Beam > “Light & Visibility”
Assistant > “Interior lights”
High Beam Assistant can be activated and and confirm.
> “Settings”
> “Display” deactivated. The settings remain stored when the
Activating or deactivating interior lights
ignition is switched on and off.
2. “Brightness” when the door is opened (depending on
and confirm. 1. Main menu: Select “Vehicle” equipment)
> “Settings” You can configure the interior lights to be switched
3. Adjust to the desired display brightness
> “Light & Visibility” on when the door is opened.
> “Exterior lights”
2. Select “High beam assist.” 1. Main menu “Vehicle”
> “Settings”
> “Light & Visibility”
High Beam Assistant is activated. > “Interior lights”
High Beam Assistant is deactivated.
2. Select “by opening door”
in the display.

Setting interior lighting off delay Activating and deactivating rain sensor
The off delay for the lighting in the passenger operation
Interior lights are activated.
compartment after closing the vehicle doors can You can configure the windshield wiper to adjust
Interior lights are deactivated.
be adapted individually. its speed automatically when it is raining.
Adjusting brightness of orientation lighting 1. Main menu “Vehicle” 1. Main menu “Vehicle”
The brightness of the orientation lighting can be > “Settings” > “Settings”
adapted individually. > “Light & Visibility” > “Light & Visibility”
> “Interior lights” > “Wiper”
2. “Fade-out” 2. Select “Rain sensor”
> “Settings”
and confirm. and confirm.
> “Interior lights” 3. Set desired off delay 3. Select the desired setting
and confirm the setting. and confirm.
2. “Ambient light”
and confirm.
Setting activation of the rear wiper when Available setting options:
3. Adjust to the desired brightness reverse gear is engaged – “Automatic”
and confirm the setting. You can configure the rear wiper to automatically Wiper speed is adjusted automatically.
perform a series of wipes when it is raining when – “Manual”
Ambient lighting
reverse gear is engaged. Wiper speed must be adjusted manually using
The brightness of the ambient lighting can be the wiper stalk.
adapted individually. 1. Main menu “Vehicle”
> “Settings”
> “Settings”
> “Wiper”
> “Interior lights” 2. “Rear wiper”
and confirm.
2. Select “Ambient light”
and confirm. 3. Select the desired setting
and confirm.
3. Adjust to the desired brightness
and confirm the setting. Available setting options:
– “Automatic”
The rear wiper performs a series of wipes
when reverse gear is engaged.
– “Manual”
The rear wiper is not activated when reverse
gear is engaged.

Adjusting reversing options Locking settings Setting door locking

You can configure the exterior mirror to lower The locking and unlocking settings on the You can configure the doors to remain unlocked
automatically when reverse gear is engaged. vehicle can be adjusted. or lock automatically after a delay on entering
The Easy Entry function can be switched on the vehicle.
and off.
> “Settings” 1. Main menu “Vehicle”
> “Light & Visibility” 1. Main menu “Vehicle” > “Settings”
> “Revers. opt.” > “Settings” > “Locking”
and confirm. > “Locking” 2. “Door lock”
Lowering exterior mirror on passenger’s side
when parking Setting door unlocking 3. Select the desired setting
You can configure the door mirror on the You can configure specific doors to unlock and confirm.
passenger’s side to tilt downwards automatically when the vehicle is unlocked.
when reverse gear is engaged to provide a better Available setting options:
view of the curb. 1. Main menu “Vehicle” – “Off”
> “Settings” The doors are not locked automatically after
1. Main menu “Vehicle” > “Locking” entering the vehicle.
> “Settings” – “After ign. on”
2. “Door unlock”
> “Light & Visibility” The doors are locked automatically when the
and confirm.
> “Revers. opt.” ignition is switched on.
and confirm. 3. Select the desired setting – “After drive-off”
and confirm. The doors are locked automatically after
2. Select “Lowering mirr.”.
in the main menu. driving off.
Available setting options:
3. Confirm your selection. – “All doors” Switching Comfort Entry on and off
Exterior mirror is lowered. All doors are unlocked when the vehicle is You can configure the driver’s seat and steering
unlocked. wheel to move back automatically and allow the
Exterior mirror is not lowered.
– “Driver’s door” driver to get in and out of the vehicle more easily.
The driver’s door is unlocked when the vehicle
is unlocked.
> “Settings”
> “Locking”
2. Select “Comfort Entry”.
in the main menu.
Comfort Entry is activated.
Comfort Entry is deactivated.

Switching Auto Memory on and off Setting air conditioning Switching extended ventilation panel on
It is possible to determine whether personal The automatic air conditioning can be changed and off
settings are to be stored automatically on the car individually. The extended ventilation panel on top of the
key when locking the vehicle. dashboard can be switched on or off.
1. Main menu “Vehicle” > “Settings” 1. Main menu “Vehicle”
> “Settings” > “Air conditioning” > “Settings”
> “Locking” and confirm. > “Air conditioning”
2. Select 2. Select “Vent. panel”.
Adjusting air flow
“Auto Memory”. in the main menu.
The strength of the air flow and the air quantity can
3. Confirm your selection. be adjusted. 3. Confirm your selection.
Auto Memory is activated. Ventilation panel is activated.
Auto Memory is deactivated. Ventilation panel is deactivated.
> “Settings”
For further information on storing and retrieving > “Air conditioning” Switching automatic air-recirculation mode
personal settings: on/off
f Please see the chapter “STORING PERSONAL
2. “Climate style”
and confirm. You can configure the fresh air supply to adjust
SETTINGS” on page 143. automatically to the air quality.
3. Select the desired setting
Folding exterior mirrors in and out and confirm. 1. Main menu “Vehicle”
automatically > “Settings”
You can configure the exterior mirrors to fold in Available setting options: > “Air conditioning”
automatically when the vehicle is locked. – “Soft”
– “Normal” 2. Select “Automatic air circ.”.
1. Main menu: Select “Vehicle” – “Strong” in the main menu.
> “Settings”
> “Locking”
Automatic air-recirculation mode is
2. Select “Mirror retract”. activated
3. Confirm your selection. Automatic air-recirculation mode is
Exterior mirrors are folded in. deactivated
Exterior mirrors are not folded in.

Setting date and time Displaying GPS time Setting current time
The date and time displays on the vehicle can be The time can be synchronized via the GPS signal On vehicles without Porsche Communication
adjusted individually. and displayed. Management (PCM), the hours and minutes can
be set separately when setting the time.
Information > “Settings” 1. Main menu “Vehicle”
On vehicles with Porsche Communication > “Date & Time” > “Settings”
Management (PCM), the date and time are set > “Time” > “Date & Time”
and synchronized automatically by satellite > “Time”
2. Select “GPS time”.
navigation signals (GPS). 2. Select “Hour/Minute”.
Some setting options may be temporarily 3. Confirm your selection.
in the main menu.
unavailable, depending on satellite signal Time synchronized with GPS.
reception. Time not synchronized with GPS. 3. Set the desired time
Setting the time format
Setting time zone
1. Main menu “Vehicle” The time can be displayed in 12-hour or 24-hour
format. The time zone of the vehicle clock can be set
> “Settings”
individually on vehicles with Porsche
> “Date & Time” 1. Main menu “Vehicle” Communication Management (PCM).
and confirm. > “Settings”
> “Date & Time” 1. Main menu “Vehicle”
Setting the time > “Settings”
> “Time”
The time, time format and time zone can be set in > “Date & Time”
the “Time” menu. 2. “Format” > “Time”
and confirm.
1. Main menu “Vehicle” 2. Select “Zone”
3. Select the desired setting and confirm.
> “Settings”
and confirm.
> “Date & Time” 3. Set the desired time zone
> “Time” Available setting options: and confirm.
and confirm. – “12h”
– “24h”

Setting the date Setting the current date Displaying time in stopwatch on dashboard
The date and date format can be changed in The day, month and year can be set individually on You can configure the stopwatch on the
the “Date” menu. vehicles without the navigation module. dashboard to display the time.
1. Main menu “Vehicle” 1. Main menu “Vehicle” 1. Main menu “Vehicle”
> “Settings” > “Settings” > “Settings”
> “Date & Time” > “Date & Time” > “Date & Time”
> “Date” > “Date”
2. Select “Time – Chrono”
in the main menu.
Setting the date format 2. “Date”.
in the main menu.
The date format can be adjusted. Time is displayed.
3. Set the desired date Time is not displayed.
1. Main menu “Vehicle” and confirm the setting.
> “Settings” Setting units
> “Date & Time” Setting Daylight Saving Time
You can select the units of measurement for
> “Date” The vehicle clock can be configured to change to vehicle displays such as the speed on the digital
2. “Format” Daylight Saving Time. speedometer in the instrument panel, the
and confirm. temperature gauge in the air-conditioning displays
3. Select the desired setting > “Settings” and the tire pressure display on the multi-function
and confirm. > “Date & Time” display.
2. Select 1. Main menu “Vehicle”

Available setting options:
“DST (+01:00)” > “Settings”
– “DD.MM.YYYY”
> “Units”
– “MM/DD/YYYY” 3. Confirm your selection.
and confirm.
– “YYYY/MM/DD” Daylight Saving Time is activated.
Daylight Saving Time is deactivated.

Setting speedometer units Setting unit for Tire Pressure Monitoring Changing the language
The units of the speed and distance information on display The language of the display text on the multi-
the speedometer can be adjusted. The measurement unit for the Tire Pressure function display can be changed.
Monitoring display can be changed.
1. Main menu “Vehicle” 1. Main menu “Vehicle”
> “Settings” 1. Main menu “Vehicle” > “Settings”
> “Units” > “Settings” > “Language”
> “Units”
2. “Speedometer”. 2. Select the desired language
in the main menu. 2. Select “Tire pressure”. and confirm.
in the main menu.
3. Select the desired setting
Adjusting volume of warning and
and confirm.
information tones
Available setting options: The volume of the warning tones and ParkAssist
– “km / km/h” Available setting options: information tones can be adjusted.
– “Miles / mph” – “bar”
Adjusting ParkAssist volume
– “psi”
Setting unit for temperature gages The volume of the ParkAssist information tones
The measurement unit for temperature gages can Setting unit for fuel consumption display can be adjusted.
be changed. The unit can be set for the fuel consumption
display. 1. Main menu “Vehicle”
1. Main menu “Vehicle” > “Settings”
> “Settings” 1. Main menu “Vehicle” > “Volume”
> “Units” > “Settings”
> “Units” 2. Select “ParkAssist”.
2. “Temperature” in the main menu.
in the main menu. 2. Select “Consumption”.
in the main menu. 3. Select the desired setting
3. Select the desired setting and confirm.
and confirm. Available setting options:
Available setting options: – “Loud”
– “°C” Available setting options: – “Medium”
– “°F” – “l/100km” – “Low”
– “MPG (US)”
– “MPG (UK)”
– “km/l”

Adjusting volume of warning tones Available PCM functions: Available instrument cluster functions:
The volume of the warning tones can be adjusted – “Source change” – “Start/Stop Chr.”
individually. Change audio source. Start/stop timing.
– “Voice control” – “Vehicle menu”
1. Main menu “Vehicle” Activate voice control. Display vehicle menu.
> “Settings” – “Dri. instr. (Rep)” – “Trip menu”
> “Volume” Repeat voice instruction from the navigation Display trip menu.
2. Select “Warn. tones”. system. – “TPMS menu”
in the main menu. – “Station/track <” Display TPMS menu.
Previous radio station/title. – “Chrono menu”
3. Select the desired setting – “Station/track >” Display Chrono menu.
and confirm. Next radio station/track. – “Audio menu”
Available setting options: – “Map” Display audio menu.
– “Loud” Display navigation map in PCM. – “Phone menu”
– “Medium” – “Menu change” Display telephone menu.
– “Low” Change main menu area. – “Navi menu”
Display navigation menu.
Changing button assignment on – “Map menu”
multi-function steering wheel Display navigation map on the multi-function
The assignment of the ◊ button on the display.
multi-function display can be changed individually.
Functions from the multi-function display or
PCM/CDR can be assigned to the ◊ button.

> “Settings”
> “Steering wheel op.”
2. Select “◊ button”
and confirm.
3. Select “PCM function” or
“Inst. clus. fun.”
and confirm.
4. Select the desired function assignment
and confirm.

Assistance systems Prewarning on

Active Safe (PAS) The latent and prewarning functions are switched
off by default. The acute warning function is
The Porsche “Active Safe” functions can be
active.
completely or partly disabled.
Latent and advance warnings can be activated
The settings remain stored when the ignition is
under “Prewarning on”.
switched on and off.
1. Select “Vehicle”
> “Settings”
> “Settings”
> “Assist. systems”
> “Active Safe (PAS)”
and confirm. 2. Select “Prewarning on”.
System on 3. Confirm selection.

Prewarning is switched on.
All Porsche “Active Safe” functions can be
enabled/disabled using “System on”. Prewarning is switched off.
> “Settings”
2. Select “System on”.
3. Confirm selection.
Active Safe is switched on.
Active Safe is switched off.
When all Porsche “Active Safe” functions

are switched off, the gray symbol
appears at the bottom of the multi-
function display.

Overview of Warning and Information Messages

If a warning message appears, always refer to the corresponding sections in this Owner’s Manual.
Warning messages are issued only if all measurement prerequisites are met.
Therefore, check all fluid levels regularly – in particular, always check the engine oil level before refueling.
Warning and information message categories
Red System failure or warning
f Visit or consult an authorized Porsche dealer immediately.
Yellow fault or system failure warning
f Visit an authorized Porsche dealer at the next opportunity.
White Information/message
f Visit an authorized Porsche dealer at the next opportunity or remedy yourself.
Light in Warning and information message on Meaning/Action required
instrument the multi-function display
panel
Oil press. too low Stop immediately in a suitable place and switch engine off. Do not continue driving.
Park vehicle Select “Oil measurement” on the multi-function display. Add engine oil if necessary.
safely Do not continue driving if the warning message is displayed despite the oil level being correct.
Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.
Oil pressure Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.
measurement fault
Driving permitted
Consult a workshop
Oil temperature too high Switch engine off and let it cool. Check oil level and, if necessary, add oil.
Reduce load
Oil temperature Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.
indicator fault
Consult a workshop
Driving permitted
Oil level Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.
measurement fault
Consult a workshop
Driving permitted
No information The oil level can be checked after waiting for approx. 1 minute with the vehicle parked on a level surface
about oil level and the engine at operating temperature. If the rear luggage compartment lid is opened when the engine
available at present is cold (e.g. to top up engine oil), the oil level cannot be displayed for a certain time.


panel
Oil level minimum Top up engine oil immediately.
reached
Refill oil
Oil level below min. Top up engine oil immediately.
Refill oil at once
Do not drive on
Oil level Visit an authorized Porsche dealer at the next opportunity and have the oil drained to the correct level.
above maximum
Consult a workshop
Driving permitted
Gauge moves to Engine too hot Coolant or engine oil temperature is too high.
maximum mark Park vehicle to cool down Switch off engine and let it cool.
Check coolant or engine oil level. If necessary, top up coolant / engine oil.
Refill coolant Check coolant level. Add coolant if necessary.
Observe
engine temperature
Gauge moves to Refill coolant Switch engine off and let it cool.
maximum mark immediately Check coolant level. Add coolant if necessary.
Do not drive on
Cooling system Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.
fault
Consult a workshop
Service required
Coolant temp Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.
indicator fault
Driving permitted
Consult a workshop
Engine fan failure Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.
Avoid full load
Driving permitted
Generator fault Stop in a suitable place and switch engine off.
Park vehicle Do not continue driving.
safely Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.
Low battery Start the engine immediately so that the battery can be charged.
Start the engine and run for
extended period


panel
Low battery The power supply to various comfort features is deactivated to prevent the battery from discharging.
Consumption off
Battery protection was The power supply to various features was deactivated during parking to prevent the battery from
active during parking discharging.
Battery function Consult an authorized Porsche dealer.
restricted
Consult a workshop
Reduced power Consult an authorized Porsche dealer.
Driving permitted
Consult a workshop
Engine control fault Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.
Consult a workshop
Driving permitted
Please start engine manually Start engine manually at the ignition.
Please To prevent the battery from discharging, switch off the ignition when leaving the vehicle after the engine
switch off was stopped automatically.
the ignition
Display of Engage gear selector PDK transmission:
selector-lever properly Selector lever may be positioned between two settings.
position flashes Engage selector lever properly.
Move gear lever to position P PDK transmission:
Move gear lever to position P before removing key from ignition lock or stopping and securing the
vehicle.
Move gear lever to P or N PDK transmission:
Engine can only be started in selector-lever position P or N.
Activate brake PDK transmission:
Apply the footbrake when starting.
Display of Transm. fault Restricted gearshift comfort, reverse gear not available.
selector-lever Poss. no R gear Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.
position flashes Possible to drive on
Display of Transm. failure No selector-lever position is displayed on the instrument panel.
selector-lever Park vehicle Vehicle can be driven only until it comes to a stop.
position flashes safely It is not possible to continue driving. Stop the vehicle immediately in a suitable place.
Read the instructions in the section “Towing”. Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.


panel
Drive “Warning jerks” can be felt when driving off and the engine power may be restricted.
temperature too high Do not use the accelerator to hold the vehicle, e.g. on a hill. Hold the vehicle with the brake.
Reduce load Reduce engine load. Stop the vehicle in a suitable place if possible.
Allow the engine to run in selector-lever position P or N until the warning disappears.
Transmission Transmission temperature too high.
overheated Park vehicle to Stop the vehicle at a suitable place, switch off engine and allow it to cool down.
cooling Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.
Press clutch Manual transmission:
Depress clutch pedal when starting.
Brake fluid level Stop immediately in a suitable place. Do not continue driving.
Park vehicle Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.
safely
Brake distribution fault Stop immediately in a suitable place. Do not continue driving.
Park vehicle safely Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.
Brake cooling faulty Brake temperature too high.

Stop the vehicle at a suitable place, switch off engine and allow the brake to cool down.
ABS/PSM failure Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.

Adapted driving permitted
Wear limit Have brake pads replaced immediately.

Change brake pads Consult an authorized Porsche dealer.
Driving permitted
Release Pull the electric parking brake switch.

parking brake
flashes
Press brake pedal Press the brake pedal before releasing the electric parking brake.


panel
Fault Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.
parking brake
Electric Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.

parking brake in
service mode
Emergency braking Emergency braking function of the electric parking brake active.
flashes
PSM system error Stop the vehicle in a suitable place.
Park Do not continue driving.
vehicle safely Have the fault corrected immediately at an authorized Porsche dealer.
PSM failure Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.

Consult a workshop
PSM off Porsche Stability Management was switched off.
PSM on Porsche Stability Management was switched on.
PSM Porsche Stability Management is in diagnostic test mode.

in diagnosis
flashes
Spoiler loss Driving stability is impaired. Reduce speed and adjust driving style.
Reduce Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.
speed


panel
Fuel gauge Mind remaining distance Refuel at the next opportunity.
warning light on
tank display
service necessary
Check Position tank cap correctly and screw on until it locks securely.
gas cap
Refill washer fluid
Fasten seat belt All vehicle occupants must fasten their safety belts.
Loss of airbag Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.

Pilot lamp
Service required
Passenger airbag The passenger airbag is switched on/off.
on/off
Power steering fail. Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.
Increased effort
Driving permitted
Power steering Steering assistance is temporarily reduced.
restricted Consult an authorized Porsche dealer.
Consult a workshop
Driving permitted
Rear-wh steering failure. Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.
Careful continuation
possible
Rear-wh steering fault Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.
Remove key
from ignition
Remove key
from trunk
Key not found / Make sure that you have the driver's key with you.
Key malfunction
Change key position


panel
Replace ignition key battery Replace the battery in the driver's key.
Fault of Porsche Entry&Drive Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.
Multiple keys recognized in Information message:

vehicle Several driver's keys in the vehicle, e.g. in the possession of a passenger.
Close doors to lock vehicle Close all doors and luggage compartment lids before locking the vehicle.
Operating device: turn left, No key detected in the vehicle, ignition cannot be switched on or engine cannot be started.
pull off, insert key Turn control unit back to ignition lock position 0 and remove it from the ignition lock.
Switch the ignition on with the ignition key (not emergency key).
PADM Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.
deactivated
Service required
Driving permitted
Chassis system fault Vehicle handling may be affected. Adapt your speed to the changed conditions.
Adapted Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.
driving permitted
Chassis system failure Stop immediately in a suitable place. Do not drive off or continue driving.
Chassis system fault Vehicle handling may be affected. Adapt your speed to the changed conditions.
Adapted Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.
driving permitted
Suspension system fault The lateral inclination of the vehicle is significantly greater when cornering.
Adapted Drive carefully at an appropriate speed to the nearest authorized Porsche dealer.
driving permitted
No all-wheel sys. Temporary failure of Porsche Traction Management. Reduce load.
Only rear-wh drive
Adapted
driving permitted
All-wheel system Porsche Traction Management is overloaded. Reduce load.
temperature limit
Reduce load


panel
All-wheel overload Temporary failure of Porsche Traction Management. Reduce load.
Only rear-wh drive
Reduce load
Driving permitted
All-wheel function Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.
restricted
Adapted
driving permitted
All-wheel drive Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.
system fault
Adapted
driving permitted
differential lock
Possible to drive on
Check tires Tire Pressure Monitoring System detects a pressure loss of more than 20% below the required pressure
or more than 7 psi (0.5 bar) at a speed of less than 100 mph (160 km/h), more than 6 psi (0.4 bar) at
a speed greater than 100 mph (160 km/h) and more than 4 psi (0.3 bar) at a speed greater than
165 mph (270 km/h).
Stop in a suitable place and check the tires indicated for damage.
If necessary, fill in tire sealant and set the correct tire pressure.
Top off air Tire Pressure Monitoring System detects a pressure loss of more than 4 psi (0.3 bar).
Correct the tire pressure at the next opportunity.
Restricted monitoring Fault on one or both wheel transmitters.
No tire pressure monitoring Tire Pressure Monitoring System requires a certain amount of time to learn the wheels.
System is learning During this time, the current tire pressures are not available on the multi-function display.
Tire pressure monitoring Fault in Tire Pressure Monitoring System. Tire pressure is not monitored.
fault Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.
Service required
Tire pressure monitoring Temporary fault in the Tire Pressure Monitoring System.
temporarily deactivated Tire pressure is not monitored.


panel
Tire change? The tire settings on the multi-function display must be updated after changing a wheel.
Update settings
Tire pressure Speed too high for actual pressure. Inflate tire to the required pressure.
Reduce speed
Comfort pressure Top speed for the preset comfort pressure exceeded.
Reduce speed
Signal light Driving light/side light on.
switched on
Parking light on Left/right parking light on.
Example: The reported light is faulty.

Check front left indicator Check bulb.
Adaptive headlight Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.
control defective
flashes Service required
Driving light control defec- Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.
tive
lights up Service required
Headlight range regulation Adjust your speed and driving style. Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.
defective
Service required
High beam assistant Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.
not available
Rain/light sensor defective Switch on wipers/light manually. Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.
Service required
Headlight control defective Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.
Service required
flashes
High beam assis Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.
unavailable
Operate full
beam manually


panel
High beam assistant off Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.
No camera view
Clean if necessary
PDLS+ currently restricted, PDLS+ temporarily unavailable due to camera fault.
no camera view
Clean sensor?
PDLS+ fault Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.
Operate high beam
manually
Service required
Assistance sys Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.
camera unavailable
Service required
Front view camera Assistance systems/camera temporarily unavailable due to weather conditions or dirt on the
restricted windscreen. Clean windshield if necessary.
Clean screen?
Wiper defective Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.
Consult a workshop
Doors/lids open Close door/lid indicated.
Example
Launch Control activated Launch Control is activated.
System fault One or more electrical systems may have failed.

Driving permitted Adjust your speed and driving style.
Consult a workshop Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.
Instrument cluster/ Turn signals tones, acoustic warnings and distance signals (e.g. for ParkAssist) are not available.
Front Park Assist Please remember this, e.g. when parking. Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.
audio fault
Service required
Parking Assistant Acoustic warning and distance signals for ParkAssist are not available.
audio fault Please remember this, e.g. when parking. Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.
Service
required
ParkAssist


panel
Distance Insufficient distance from vehicle in front.
Please brake
ACC/PAS unavailable Adaptive cruise control (ACC): Sensor at the front of the vehicle may be adversely affected by dirt, snow,
Service required ice or adverse weather conditions. Adjust your speed and driving style.
Have the adaptive cruise control (ACC) or Porsche “Active Safe” fault rectified at an authorized Porsche
dealer.
Limit 1/2 exceeded Selected speed limit 1 or 2 exceeded.
Fault of the Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.

Warning light on
engine control
the coolant system
temperature
gauge flashes
Outside temp. Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.

display defective
Service required
Aerodynamic Close the sunroof.
rear spoiler
Close
sunroof
Close
sunroof
completely
Decrease Open or close convertible top fully.
speed
Move roof cover
to end position
Top is Message goes out in limit position.
opening/closing
Roof cover
in service position
Car not ready
Roof control fault Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.
Service required
Place down Message goes out in limit position.
wind deflector


panel
Wind deflector Message goes out in limit position.
is put up/placed down
Example: Service reminder.
Service in xxx km Bring the vehicle in for service no later than after the distance/time shown has elapsed.
The intervals in the “Maintenance” booklet are decisive however.

Personal Settings
Brief Overview – Personal Settings.............142
Storing personal settings.............................143
Personal Settings 141

Brief Overview – Personal Settings

information provided under “PERSONAL
SETTINGS”.
Warnings, in particular, are not replaced by this
brief overview.
Storing settings automatically on the key Storing settings manually on the buttons
(with “Auto Memory” function activated) in the driver's door
Where can I store/ Which settings can I store/retrieve with the memory package?
retrieve the settings?
Automatic when locking/unlocking the Ergonomic settings

vehicle door via the car key. – Driver’s seat, exterior mirrors, electric steering column
Comfort settings
– Air conditioning, multi-function display and Porsche Communication Management (PCM)
Prerequisite: The “Auto Memory“ function must be activated in the multi-function display.
f Please see the chapter “SWITCHING AUTO MEMORY ON AND OFF” on page 123.
Notice: If the “Auto Memory” function is activated, the settings stored on the key or on key button
are overwritten each time the vehicle is locked.
Manually, using buttons 1 and 2. Ergonomic settings

– Driver’s seat, exterior mirrors, passenger's seat, electric steering column
Manually, using key button Ergonomic settings

in the driver's door. – Driver’s seat, exterior mirrors, electric steering column
Comfort settings
– Air conditioning, multi-function display and Porsche Communication Management (PCM)
The settings are stored on key button in the driver’s door and on the car key.
142 Personal Settings

h CAUTION
Retrieving automatic Storing the settings on the car key
settings for seats, Ergonomic and comfort settings can be
mirrors and electric individually assigned to the car keys.
steering column
Parts of the body may be pinched or crushed if the
Information
settings are activated in an uncontrolled manner.
f Automatic retrieval of the settings can be Individual memory information can be stored on a
cancelled by pressing a memory button or any total of 4 car keys. In the case of further car keys,
seat adjustment button. the memory information from key 4 is adopted.
f Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended.
Automatic storage through locking of the
vehicle.
Information This function must be activated on the multi-
function display.
f Please see the chapter “SWITCHING AUTO
If the automatic storage function is activated on
the multi-function display, the settings will be
automatically stored on the car key when the MEMORY ON AND OFF” on page 123.
vehicle is locked. – The settings are stored on the car key being
used when the vehicle is locked.
Driver's door memory buttons (comfort memory) For information on switching the automatic
– On vehicles with Porsche Entry & Drive,
storage function on and off:
Storing personal settings f Please see the chapter “SWITCHING AUTO settings are stored by pressing the locking
In conjunction with the fully-electric sports seat or button on the door handle.
MEMORY ON AND OFF” on page 123.
the adaptive sports seat plus, a memory package Regardless of whether the automatic storage In what situation is it useful to activate the
is available. With the memory package, personal function is activated on the multi-function display, “Auto Memory” function?
settings can be stored on the car key or on the the settings can be stored on the car key (by Each driver uses his or her own key. When locking
memory buttons in the driver’s door. pressing key button ) and the memory buttons the vehicle, the last selected settings are stored
Memory package 1 or 2 and retrieved from there. on the key. When changing drivers, the personal
The memory package includes storage of settings can be retrieved via the respective keys.
ergonomic settings for
– driver’s seat
– electric steering column and
– exterior mirrors as well as
comfort settings for
– air conditioning
– multi-function display and
– Porsche Communication Management (PCM).
Personal Settings 143

Retrieving the settings from the Storing settings on buttons 1 and 2

Information car key Ergonomic settings can be individually assigned
If the “Auto Memory” function is activated, the Ergonomic and comfort settings can be to buttons 1 and 2 in the driver’s door.
settings stored manually on the key are individually retrieved from the car key. f The ignition must be switched on.
overwritten each time the vehicle is locked. 1. Press the SET button. The LED in the button
Automatic retrieval through unlocking of the
lights up.
vehicle
Storage by pressing key button in the 2. Press button 1 or 2 or within 10 seconds.
driver’s door The settings are retrieved from the car key being 3. The ergonomic settings are stored on the
f The ignition must be switched on. used when the vehicle is unlocked and the driver's relevant button. Storage is acknowledged
door is opened. acoustically and the LED in the SET button
1. Press the SET button. The LED in the button
lights up. By pressing key button in the driver’s goes out.
door
f Press and hold key button
2. Press key button within 10 seconds.
3. The ergonomic and comfort settings (key- until all Retrieving settings with buttons 1 or 2
specific) are stored. Storage is acknowledged settings are retrieved Retrieve ergonomic settings with buttons 1 or
or 2 in the driver's door.
f With the driver’s door open and the ignition
acoustically and the LED in the SET button
goes out. f Press and hold button 1 or 2 until all settings
switched off, briefly press key button . are retrieved
In what situation is it useful to store the The settings are automatically retrieved. or
f With the driver’s door open and the ignition
settings on key button ?
Why do the settings on key button not
You would like to store/retrieve some of the switched off, briefly press button 1 or 2.
correspond to the ones I have stored?
settings when stationary or during driving and not The settings are automatically retrieved or
only when locking/unlocking the vehicle. Ensure If the “Auto Memory” function is activated in the
that the “Auto Memory” function is deactivated. multi-function display, all the ergonomic and Preventing automatic storage of settings
Otherwise, the settings will be overwritten when comfort settings are stored on the key when on car key when locking
locking the vehicle. locking the vehicle. Settings stored on key This function must be deactivated on the multi-
button are overwritten in the process. function display.
For information on switching the automatic
storage function on and off:
f Please see the chapter “SWITCHING AUTO
MEMORY ON AND OFF” on page 123.
144 Personal Settings

Driving and Driving Safety

Diagnostic Socket .......................................146
Ignition Lock ...............................................146
Starting and Stopping the Engine .................147
Auto Start Stop function ..............................149
Electric Parking Brake .................................151
Brakes .......................................................152
Cruise Control.............................................155
Adaptive Cruise Control ...............................157
Car Audio Operation/Tips ............................168
Porsche Communication Management (PCM).170
USB/iPod® and AUX....................................171
Voice Control..............................................171
Porsche Doppelkupplung (PDK) ....................172
Selector-lever Positions ..............................174
Limp-home mode ........................................178
Transmission and Chassis Control Systems ..179
Porsche Traction Management (PTM)............180
Porsche Stability Management (PSM) ............181
HOLD function: Drive-Off Assistant,
Standstill Management ................................184
ABS Brake System (Anti-lock Brake System)..184
Porsche Active Suspension
Management (PASM) ...................................185
Porsche Torque Vectoring (PTV Plus) ............186
Porsche Dynamic Chassis Control (PDCC) .....187
Dynamic Engine Mounting (PADM) ................188
“Sport” and “Sport Plus” mode .....................188
Extending Front and Rear Spoilers................190
Rear Axle Steering ......................................191
Driving and Driving Safety 145

Diagnostic Socket
h WARNING Improper interventions
in the vehicle electrical
system
External equipment or devices (e.g. navigation
units, head-up displays, etc.) connected to the
diagnostic socket can impair the function of the
vehicle systems.
f Do not connect any equipment or devices to
the diagnostic socket.
h WARNING Loose equipment/

devices or hanging
cables in the driver's
footwell
Loose equipment/devices or hanging cables in
the driver's footwell can obstruct clearance Ignition Lock Key positions
0 - Initial position
around the pedals or become caught between the The ignition key is inserted into the ignition lock to 1 - Ignition on
pedals when braking or changing direction.
f Do not place any equipment/devices or cables
the right of the light switch at the left of the 2 - Start engine
steering wheel.
in the driver's footwell.
On vehicles with Porsche Entry & Drive, you no Information
longer have to insert the key into the ignition lock, The vehicle battery discharges if the ignition key is
NOTICE but merely keep it with you. The ignition key is left inserted.
The diagnostic socket is for connecting diagnostic replaced by a control unit in the ignition lock,
If the vehicle battery is dead, the key can only be
equipment in qualified specialist workshops. which always remains in the ignition lock, unless
removed from the ignition lock if the emergency
Operating external equipment or devices (e.g. the vehicle is being towed.
operation is performed:
navigation units, head-up displays, etc.) from the The ignition lock has three key positions. f Please see the chapter “EMERGENCY
diagnostic socket when the ignition is switched off OPERATION – UNLOCKING THE IGNITION KEY/
will run down the battery. If the vehicle is parked CONTROL UNIT” on page 28.
for an extended period, the battery can discharge
fully and be damaged (exhaustive discharge).
f Do not connect any equipment or devices to
the diagnostic socket.
146 Driving and Driving Safety

Ignition lock position 0 – Ignition off Emergency operation with Starting and Stopping the Engine
(initial position) Porsche Entry & Drive The immobilizer can be deactivated and
The engine and ignition are off in ignition lock Interference in radio transmission between the the engine started only using an authorized
position 0. The ignition key can be removed in this vehicle and ignition lock or a discharged ignition ignition key.
position. lock battery can disable the Porsche Entry & Drive f Please see the chapter “IMMOBILIZER”
comfort function. on page 217.
Ignition lock position 1 – Ignition on
f Turn ignition key to position 1.
If this happens, the control unit can be removed
h WARNING Exhaust Gas
from the ignition lock and the vehicle can be
All electrical equipment can be switched on. The started using the ignition key. Exhaust gas contains colorless and odorless
warning lights on the instrument panel light up for For information on removing the control unit from carbon monoxide (CO), which is toxic even in low
a lamp check.
f Please see the chapter “INSTRUMENT PANEL
the ignition lock: concentrations. Carbon monoxide can cause
f Please see the chapter “EMERGENCY unconsciousness and even death if inhaled.
USA MODELS” on page 90. OPERATION – UNLOCKING THE IGNITION KEY/ f Never start or let the engine running in an
If a load is not switched on for 10 minutes after CONTROL UNIT” on page 28. enclosed, unventilated area. It is not
switching on the ignition, the ignition must be recommended to sit in your car for prolonged
switched on again. periods with the engine on and the car not
Turn the ignition key to ignition lock position 0 moving.
(initial position) first.
The ignition key cannot be removed when the h WARNING Exhaust System Fire
ignition is switched on or when the engine has
Hazard
been started.
To remove the ignition key:
f Stop the vehicle.
hot when the engine is running. The exhaust
f Move PDK selector lever to position P.
system remains hot for some time after the engine
f Switch ignition off.
is turned off.
f Do not park or drive your vehicle where
f Remove the ignition key.
combustible materials, such as dry grass or
Ignition lock position 2 – Start engine leaves, can come into contact with the hot
f Turn ignition key to ignition lock position 2. exhaust system.
The key is reset automatically from position 2 to f If your car catches on fire for any reason, call
position 1 when you start the engine. the fire department. Do not endanger your life
by attempting to put out the fire.

f If the vehicle battery power is too weak, the h WARNING

NOTICE Hot Exhaust Tailpipe
engine can be started with jump leads.
An unattended vehicle with a running engine is For information on jump-lead starting: The exhaust pipe is hot when the engine is running
potentially hazardous. If warning lights come on to f Please see the chapter “EXTERNAL POWER and remains hot for some time after the vehicle is
indicate improper operation, no one would be turned off.
f To prevent injury, make a point of noting where
SUPPLY, EMERGENCY STARTING WITH
present to observe the light and turn off the JUMPER CABLES” on page 273.
engine. your vehicle’s exhaust pipe is, avoid placing
f Never leave the engine idling unattended. your legs near the exhaust pipe when loading
Information and unloading cargo in the rear, and closely
Starting the vehicle To ensure a good battery charge condition, supervise children around the vehicle during
f Operate the footbrake. thereby ensuring that the battery will start the time when the exhaust pipe could be hot.
f Move PDK selector lever to the P or N engine, all electrical loads that are not required A hot exhaust pipe can cause painful skin
position. should be switched off when the ignition is burns.
f Do not press the accelerator pedal. switched on and when engine revs are low (in
The engine control unit will provide the correct traffic jams, in city traffic or in lines). Radiator fan
starting mixture. h WARNING
f Turn the ignition key or control unit (Porsche Stopping Radiator Fan
Entry & Drive) to ignition lock position 2. f Only remove the ignition key when the vehicle The fan can start running depending on the
The starting process is carried out and is stationary. temperature, even with the engine switched off.
completed automatically as soon as ignition f Only switch the ignition off when the vehicle is f Exercise extreme care that parts of the body,
lock position 2 (start engine) is reached. stationary, as there is no power steering and articles of clothing or jewelry do not get caught
The ignition key or control unit is reset brake booster assistance when the engine is in the radiator fan.
automatically to ignition lock position 1 switched off. f Exercise extreme caution when working in the
(ignition on). f When leaving the vehicle, always remove the area of the radiator fans.
f Do not operate the starter for more than ignition key, apply the electric parking brake
For information on radiator fans:
f Please see the chapter “RADIATOR FAN,
approx. 10 seconds. If necessary, repeat the and engage selector-lever position P.
starting procedure after a pause of approx. The control unit always remains in the ignition
ENGINE COMPARTMENT BLOWERS”
10 seconds. Turn the ignition key back to lock on vehicles with Porsche Entry & Drive.
on page 221.
ignition lock position 0 (initial position) first.
h WARNING Hot Engine Parts
The first operation of the starter is ended
automatically when the engine starts. Engine components become very hot when the
If the engine does not start, subsequent engine is running.
starter operations will not be ended f Before working on any part in the engine
automatically. compartment, turn the engine off and let it cool
f Do not warm up the engine when stationary. down sufficiently.
Drive off immediately. Avoid high revs and full
throttle until the engine has reached operating
temperature.

Auto Start Stop function Starting the engine

Information The Auto Start Stop function starts the engine:
The engine stops automatically when the vehicle is
stopped, e.g. at traffic lights or in a traffic jam, if
When the ignition is on, the battery is discharged. f In PDK selector-lever position D, N or manually
If the vehicle is parked for an extended period, the selected transmission range 1 or 2:
all the preconditions for stopping the engine
battery can discharge fully and be damaged Release the footbrake.
automatically are met. The engine can also stop
(exhaustive discharge). or
automatically
Press the accelerator.
during a stop at walking pace. The Auto Start Stop
function thus helps to save fuel.
Stopping the engine or
The Auto Start Stop function stops the engine Move the steering wheel.
The ignition stays on even when the engine
once the vehicle stops moving or during the or
switches off automatically. All safety functions are
stopping process. Move PDK selector lever to position R.
still available.
1. Use the footbrake to stop the vehicle. You can drive off normally.
Preconditions for stopping the engine 2. Keep the footbrake pressed.
automatically or Information
– Auto Start Stop function switched on. Move PDK selector lever to position P.
When adaptive cruise control is switched on, the
– Engine compartment lid closed.
engine starts automatically if the following
– Brake pedal pressed Information preconditions are met:
– Move PDK selector lever to the D, N or
– The engine can also be stopped subsequently – The vehicle in front drives off.
P position, or to a manually selected
(not immediately after the vehicle comes to a or
transmission range 1 or 2.
stop) if the exceptions are set aside and the The accelerator is pressed.
– Engine, transmission and air conditioning are
preconditions for stopping the engine or
at operating temperature.
automatically continue to be met. Speed and distance control is resumed using
f Please see the chapter “EXCEPTIONS FOR
– Battery has reached its target voltage.
the control stalk (position 4, RESUME).
f Please see the chapter “INTERRUPTING AND
– Vehicle was driven at a speed of more than
THE AUTO START STOP FUNCTION”
approx. 1 mph (2 km/h) for at least
on page 150. RESUMING CRUISE CONTROL AND DISTANCE
1.5 seconds since the engine last stopped
– When adaptive cruise control is switched on, CONTROL” on page 164.
automatically.
the engine stops automatically when the – Switching off adaptive cruise control starts the
vehicle is stationary if the vehicle in front also engine automatically and the vehicle moves
comes to a stop. (crawls) when in gear.

Information Information
The engine will start automatically in certain If one of these situations arises after the engine
situations, e.g. if the vehicle starts rolling, if air has stopped automatically, the engine can be
conditioning causes reduced comfort, or if the restarted automatically.
brake vacuum is reduced.
The engine is stopped again automatically if the Reaction after leaving the vehicle
preconditions for stopping the engine (selector-lever position D or N selected)
automatically are then met again. If the vehicle is left after an automatic stop when
PDK selector-lever position D or N is engaged, an
Exceptions for the Auto Start Stop automatic engine start is executed to remind the
function driver that the Auto Start Stop function is still
The Auto Start Stop function is deactivated e.g.: active.
– When Sport mode is activated. In selector-lever position D, the electric parking
– When PSM is off. brake is additionally engaged.
– In maneuvering mode. The brake warning light on the instrument panel
– When A/C MAX mode is activated. and the indicator light on the switch light up.
– When the “Windshield defrost” function is f Please see the chapter “OVERVIEW OF Switching Auto Start Stop function and
active. WARNING AND INFORMATION MESSAGES” coasting mode on and off
– At altitudes above approx. 9,843 ft. on page 129. Switching off
f Press button .
(3,000 meters)
Reaction after leaving the vehicle
For information on switching on and off the Auto (selector-lever position P selected) The indicator light on the button lights up.
Start Stop function:
f Please see the chapter “SWITCHING AUTO If the vehicle is left after an automatic stop when Automatic stopping of the engine is
PDK selector-lever position P is engaged, in order suppressed and gliding mode is switched off.
START STOP FUNCTION AND COASTING
MODE ON AND OFF” on page 150. to open the garage door, for example, Switching on
f Press button .
no automatic engine start is executed.
The Auto Start Stop function is available with
Auto Start Stop mode is resumed if the driver
limited functionality in the following situations, The indicator light on the button goes out.
closes the driver’s door and presses the brake
e.g.: The engine is automatically stopped when the
within 30 seconds of leaving the vehicle.
– If the air conditioning or passenger vehicle stops and gliding mode is switched on.
compartment heating is operated at a high If one of these requirements is not met, the engine
f Please see the chapter “DRIVING IN COASTING
setting or if the defrost function is run for long has to be started manually. The
MODE” on page 174.
time periods. message “Please start engine manually” will
– If the battery charging condition is low. appear on the multi-function display in the
instrument panel.
– On upward or downward slopes.
– During internal vehicle test procedures,
e.g. automatic engine checks. WARNING AND INFORMATION MESSAGES”
on page 129.

Auto Start Stop function display

Automatic engine stop and restart Information
readiness If the indicator light in the multi-function display
If the engine was stopped automatically by the continuously lights up yellow when the vehicle is
Auto Start Stop function, the indicator light on the stopped and if the engine does not stop regularly
multi-function display in the instrument panel will when the vehicle is stopped despite the fact that
light up green. the preconditions for stopping the engine
automatically are met, have the Auto Start Stop
No engine stop or restart readiness
system checked the next time you visit the
If the Auto Stop function is not available or if no workshop.
driver is detected in the vehicle after the engine
has stopped automatically (driver’s seat belt not Fault reporting
fastened or driver’s door open), the indicator light If there is a fault, the warning message “Start/
on the multi-function display in the instrument Stop operation deactivated” will appear on the
panel will light up yellow when the vehicle is multi-function display in the instrument panel.
stationary. f Have the fault corrected at an authorized
The Auto Start Stop system has detected that: Porsche dealer.
– At least one precondition for stopping the Electric Parking Brake
engine automatically is not met. The electric parking brake acts on the rear wheels
or and serves to secure the vehicle while parked.
– There is at least one exception for the Auto
Start Stop function. Applying the parking brake
f Please see the chapter “PRECONDITIONS FOR f Press switch .
STOPPING THE ENGINE AUTOMATICALLY” The brake warning light on the instrument
on page 149. panel lights up.
f Please see the chapter “EXCEPTIONS FOR For information on indicator lights and warning
THE AUTO START STOP FUNCTION” lights on the instrument panel:
on page 150. f Please see the chapter “INSTRUMENT PANEL
USA MODELS” on page 90.

Releasing the parking brake Engaging the electric parking brake Brake warning light USA
The electric parking brake can only be released automatically
Brake warning light Canada
when the ignition is switched on. The electric parking brake engages if PDK
If the electric parking brake could not be applied
1. Press the brake pedal. selector-lever position D, R or M is selected when
fully when the vehicle is stopped, the brake
2. Pull switch . the vehicle is stationary and the driver’s door is
warning light on the instrument panel starts to
The brake warning light on the instrument opened. The brake warning light on the instrument
flash.
panel goes out. panel and the indicator light on the switch
light up. For information on warning messages on the multi-
Automatic electric parking brake release function display:
when driver’s intention to drive off is function display:
detected f Please see the chapter “OVERVIEW OF WARNING AND INFORMATION MESSAGES”
If the engine is running, the driver’s door is closed WARNING AND INFORMATION MESSAGES” on page 129.
and the driver’s safety belt is fastened, it is still on page 129.
possible to drive off normally even though the Brakes
parking brake is on. Emergency braking function f Make it a habit to check the operation of your
The electric parking brake detects the driver’s If the vehicle cannot be stopped by conventional brakes before driving.
intention to drive off and releases automatically. braking, you can decelerate sharply and stop the Keep in mind that the braking distance increases
The warning light on the instrument panel vehicle using the electric parking brake. very rapidly as the speed increases. At 60 mph
goes out. f Press switch and keep it pressed. (100 km/h), for example, it is not twice but four
If the driver’s door is not closed or the driver’s The message “Emergency braking” appears times longer than 30 mph (50 km/h). Tire traction
safety belt is not fastened, the electric parking on the multi-function display in the instrument is also less effective when the roads are wet or
brake will not be released automatically when the panel. The brake warning light on the slippery.
driver attempts to drive off. instrument panel and the indicator light on the f Therefore, always maintain a safe distance
The message “Release parking brake” appears switch start to flash. from the car in front of you.
on the multi-function display in the instrument The emergency braking function is deactivated
panel. The brake warning light on the instrument when you release the switch.
panel and the indicator light on the switch h WARNING Severe deceleration
start to flash.
For information on warning messages on the Emergency braking takes place with very high
multi-function display: braking power. The following traffic may be
f Please see the chapter “OVERVIEW OF endangered.
WARNING AND INFORMATION MESSAGES” f Only use the emergency braking function in an
emergency situation.
f Do not use the emergency braking function to
on page 129.
stop the vehicle when driving normally.

Vehicles without Porsche Ceramic h WARNING

With correctly adjusted brakes and a correctly
Brake Hydraulic Failure
Composite Brake (PCCB) working brake system, the pedal travel to the
Recovery
Even though the brake disks consist of alloyed point of brake application should be 1-3/16 in. to
Your vehicle is equipped with an emergency 1-9/16 in. (30 to 40 mm). Whenever the brake
gray cast iron, they will unavoidably start to function in the extreme event of a complete
corrode if your car is parked for an extended pedal travel exceeds this value, have the brake
hydraulic failure of the brake system. If your brake system checked.
period. The brakes will tend to “rub” as a result. pedal goes all the way to the floor, do not pump
The nature, extent and effects of corrosion the brakes. Brake pedal
depend on the amount of time the vehicle was f Push the brake pedal down firmly and hold it in
parked, whether road salt or grit was spread and h WARNING Obstruction of Brake
that position. A mechanical linkage activates
whether grease-dissolving agents were used in the second circuit, and you will be able to bring Pedal
car washes. the vehicle to a stop. Unsuitable or incorrectly fixed floor mats or
If the braking comfort is noticeably impaired, we f After bringing your vehicle to a complete stop, objects can reduce the travel of the brake pedal or
recommend having the brake system checked by avoid driving the vehicle and instead have it prevent you applying the brake pedal.
experts at an authorized Porsche dealer. towed to the nearest authorized Porsche f Always check the movement of the brake
Brake system function dealer for repair. pedal before driving and make sure that it is
not obstructed by a floor mat or any other
Your Porsche is equipped with a power assisted
Brake system warning light object.
f Secure the floor mat to prevent it from sliding
hydraulic dual circuit brake system with disk
brakes at the front and rear. You can check the functionality of the brake
system warning light by switching the ignition to into positions that could interfere with the safe
Both circuits function independently. One brake
the “On” position (position 1) and verifying that the operation of your vehicle.
circuit operates the front left and rear right wheel
warning light illuminates. Your authorized Porsche dealer will be glad to
and the other operates the front right and rear left
offer you floor mats of the correct size
wheel. Brake warning light USA including a securing possibility.
If one brake circuit has failed, the other will still Brake warning light Canada
operate. However, you will notice an increased
The warning light in the instrument panel lights up.
pedal travel when you apply the brakes. Failure of Information
A message will be displayed on the multi-purpose
one brake circuit will cause the stopping distance
display of the instrument panel if the brake fluid In case one of the two brake circuits fails,
to increase.
level is too low, or (if the brake pedal travel has increased pedal travel is required to bring your
increased) one of the two brake circuits has failed. vehicle to a full stop.
A greater braking pressure will be required,
stopping distances will be longer and the braking
behavior will change, particularly in curves.

h WARNING
Brake wear warning message USA
h WARNING Riding the Brakes Loss of Braking Power
f Before descending a steep grade, reduce The brake booster is ready for operation only Brake wear warning message
while the engine is running. Canada
speed and shift the transmission into a lower
gear to control speed. If the engine is switched off or there is a defect in
f Do not “ride the brakes” by resting your foot on the brake booster, much greater force has to be A warning message will be displayed on the multi-
applied to the pedal when braking. purpose display of the instrument panel if the
the pedal when not intending to apply brake
f Vehicles with defective brakes must not brake pads are worn, excessively.
pressure. f Do not continue to operate the vehicle.
f Do not hold the pedal down too long or too be towed and must be transported on a flat
Have your authorized Porsche dealer inspect
often. This could cause the brakes to overheat bed.
or replace the brake pads.
and lose braking power. For information on towing:
f Please see the chapter “TOWING” For information on warning messages on the
multi-purpose display:
Brake booster on page 278.
The brake booster assists braking only when WARNING AND INFORMATION MESSAGES”
the engine is running. Brake wear
on page 129.
Your car has excellent brakes, but they are still
When the car is moving while the engine is not
running, or if the brake booster is defective, more subject to wear. The rate at which they wear Brake pads and brake disks
depends on how the brakes are used. Wear on the brake pads and brake disks depends
f Have the brake system inspected at the
pressure on the brake pedal is required to bring
the car to a stop. to a great extent on the driving style and the
intervals recommended in your Maintenance conditions of use and therefore cannot be
Moisture, road salt or grit on brakes affects
Booklet. expressed in actual miles on the road.
braking.
Brakes will dry after a few cautious brake Brake system warning light The high-performance brake system is designed
applications. for optimal braking effect at all speeds and
You can check the functionality of the brake
temperatures.
system warning light by switching the ignition to
h WARNING Wet Brakes Certain speeds, braking forces and ambient
the “On” position (position 1) and verifying that the
Driving through water may reduce the traction. warning light illuminates. conditions (e.g. temperature and humidity) can
Moisture on brakes from road water, car wash, or therefore cause the brakes to “squeal”.
a coating of road salt or grit may affect braking h WARNING Obstructed Brake Pedal
efficiency.
f Cautiously apply brakes to test and dry the Unsuitable or incorrectly installed floor mats or
brakes after exposure to road water, etc. objects can obstruct the movement of the brake
pedal or prevent application of the brake pedal.
f Do not obstruct the pedal travel with floor mats
or other objects.

h WARNING
f To relieve the brake system on downhill
Wet Brakes
stretches, change down to a lower gear in
In heavy rain, while driving through water or after good time (engine braking).
leaving a car wash, the braking action may be If engine braking is insufficient on steep
delayed and increased pressure may be required. stretches, operate the footbrake at intervals.
f For this reason, keep further back from the Avoid continuous braking as it overheats the
vehicle in front and “dry” the brakes by brakes and reduces the braking effect.
applying them at intervals. Make sure that the For information on brake fluid and checking the
traffic behind you is not affected. brake fluid level:
f Please see the chapter “BRAKE FLUID”
h WARNING Reduced Braking on page 243.
Efficiency
After a long drive over salted or gritted roads, New brake pads or linings
a coating may form on the brake disks and pads New brake pads have to be “broken in”, and
that significantly reduces friction and therefore therefore only attain optimal friction when the car
also braking effect. has covered several hundred miles or km.
f Even though the brake disks consist of alloyed The slightly reduced braking ability must be
gray cast iron, they will unavoidably start to compensated for by pressing the brake pedal A - Switch cruise control on/off
corrode if your vehicle is parked for an harder. This applies whenever the brake pads 1 - Set/increase desired speed
extended period. The brakes will tend to “rub” and/or brake disks are replaced. 2 - Reduce desired speed
as a result. 3 - Interrupt (OFF)
4 - Return to set speed (RESUME)
The nature, extent and effects of corrosion
depend on the amount of time the vehicle was Cruise Control
parked, whether road salt or grit was spread
Cruise control maintains any selected speed
and whether grease-dissolving agents were
between approx. 20–150 mph (30–240 km/h)
used in car washes (not on vehicles with
without you having to use the accelerator.
Porsche Ceramic Composite Brake).
Cruise control is operated using the control stalk
To prevent corrosion of the brake disks,
at the bottom left of the steering wheel.
“brake them dry” before parking the vehicle
Downshifts are carried out to help maintain the
(not on vehicles with Porsche Ceramic
pre-selected speed (especially when driving
Composite Brake).
downhill).
If braking comfort is noticeably impaired, we
recommend that you have the brake system
checked by experts at an authorized Porsche
dealer.

h WARNING Misuse of Cruise Control Accelerating (e.g. to overtake) Interrupting cruise control
Variant 1 operation – OFF
If the current traffic situation does not allow you to
drive safely at a constant speed and with sufficient f Increase the speed as usual with the The speed driven before the interruption remains
accelerator pedal. stored in the memory and can be reactivated by
distance to the vehicle in front, using the cruise
pressing the control stalk.
f Please see the chapter “RESUMING THE
control can cause accidents. When you ease off the accelerator, the
f Do not use the cruise control in heavy traffic, previously stored value is set again.
STORED SPEED – RESUME” on page 157.
f Press the control stalk down (position 3).
in city traffic, on twisting roads or under Variant 2
unfavorable road conditions (e.g. wintry or wet f Push the control stalk on the steering wheel or
conditions, varying road surfaces).
f Observe all local and national speed limits.
forward (position 1). Operate brake pedal or move PDK selector
f Do not reach through the steering-wheel
The desired speed is increased in steps of lever to N position.
1 mph (1 km/h).
spokes while driving. Cruise control operation is interrupted
or
automatically:
Press the control stalk on the steering wheel
Switching cruise control readiness on forward and keep it pressed (position 1). – If the set vehicle speed is exceeded by more
f Press button A on the control stalk. The desired speed is increased in steps of than approx. 16 mph (25 km/h) for longer
Cruise control readiness 5 mph (10 km/h). than 20 seconds.
– If Porsche Stability Management (PSM)
The grey symbol on the multi-function The new desired speed is displayed on the multi-
intervenes for longer than 0.5 seconds.
display in the instrument panel indicates function display in the instrument panel.
readiness. Decelerating
Maintaining and storing speed f Briefly pull the control stalk on the steering
1. Accelerate or decelerate to the desired speed wheel towards the steering wheel (position 2).
using the accelerator pedal. The desired speed is decreased in steps of
2. Push the control stalk on the steering wheel 1 mph (1 km/h).
forward (position 1). or
The current driving speed is now stored as the Pull the control stalk on the steering wheel
desired speed, which will be maintained towards the steering wheel and keep it pulled
automatically. (position 2).
Desired speed The desired speed is decreased in steps of
The desired speed that was stored is 5 mph (10 km/h).
displayed under the cruise control The new desired speed is displayed on the multi-
symbol, which has now turned orange. function display in the instrument panel.
Downshifts are carried out to help maintain the
pre-selected speed (especially when driving
downhill).

Resuming the stored speed – RESUME Adaptive Cruise Control h WARNING

Adaptive Cruise Control
f Press the control stalk up (position 4). Adaptive cruise control maintains any selected
Limits.
Cruise control accelerates/decelerates the speed between approx. 20–100 mph Adaptive cruise control will not detect stationary
vehicle to the stored speed. (30–160 km/h) when driving on open roads or slowly moving vehicles, pedestrians, objects on
without you having to use the accelerator. the road, oncoming vehicles in the same lane or
cross traffic.
f You must pay attention to your vehicle’s
Information If a vehicle traveling ahead of you in the same lane
The stored speed should only be recalled if traffic is detected as driving slower than the selected
position in relation to other objects and inter-
and road conditions are conducive to driving at speed, adaptive cruise control will automatically
vene as needed to ensure safe driving.
f Always keep the direction of travel in your field
that speed. maintain a set distance from the vehicle in front.
Adaptive cruise control slows your vehicle down if
of view.
Switching cruise control readiness off the distance to the vehicle ahead becomes too
f Press button A on the control stalk.
short and accelerates your vehicle if the distance
increases.
The memory is cleared and the readiness
symbol disappears. h WARNING
Misuse of Adaptive
Cruise Control
The stored desired speed is cleared when the
ignition is switched off when the vehicle is parked. If the current traffic situation does not allow you to
drive safely at a constant speed and with sufficient
distance to the vehicle in front, using the adaptive
cruise control can cause accidents.
f Do not use the adaptive cruise control in heavy
traffic, in construction traffic, in city traffic, on
twisting roads or under unfavorable road
conditions (e.g. wintry or wet conditions,
varying road surfaces).
f Brake the vehicle immediately with the
footbrake if the deceleration of the adaptive
cruise control is not sufficient.
f Make sure that it is possible to take over
control of the vehicle at all times.
f Observe all local and national speed limits.

h WARNING Radiofrequency
Information
Radiation Exposure
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
This equipment complies with FCC radiation
Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
Operation is subject to the following two condi-
environment. This equipment should be installed
tions:
and operated with minimum distance of 8 in.
1. This device may not cause harmful interfe-
(20 cm) between the radiator and your body.
rence, and
This transmitter must not be co-located or
2. this device must accept any interference
operating in conjunction with any other antenna or
received, including interference that may
transmitter.
cause undesired operation.
h WARNING
Weather Impairment of Changes or modifications made to this equipment
Radar Sensor not expressly approved by Porsche may void the
Radar sensor vision can be impaired by rain, FCC authorization to operate this equipment.
snow, ice or heavy spray. Vehicles in front will not This equipment has been tested and found to
be detected properly or may not be detected at comply with the limits for a Class A digital device,
all.
f Do not use adaptive cruise control under these
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits
Radar sensor are designed to provide reasonable protection
conditions. against harmful interference when the equipment
Adaptive cruise control uses a radar sensor
located in the center of the front apron (arrow). is operated in a commercial environment. This
Warning message equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
Adaptive cruise control can be deactivated frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
Information automatically if the radar sensor is very dirty or is accordance with the instruction manual, may
f Always keep the radar sensor clean and free of covered in ice or by an obstacle, in unfavorable cause harmful interference to radio communica-
ice and snow to ensure that it is fully functional. weather conditions (heavy rain) or when driving tions. Operation of this equipment in a residential
For car care instructions: through tunnels. area is likely to cause harmful interference in
f Please see the chapter “CAR CARE The message “ACC/PAS unavailable Service which case the user will be required to correct the
INSTRUCTIONS” on page 231. required” will appear on the multi-function display interference at his own expense.
in the instrument panel. – This Class A digital apparatus complies with
For information on warning messages on the multi- Canadian ICES-003.
function display: Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est
f Please see the chapter “OVERVIEW OF conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
on page 129.

Operating principle of adaptive cruise Speed exceeded

control The speed of the vehicle can be increased at any
No vehicle detected in front – open road time by pressing the accelerator.
driving If the vehicle is traveling faster than the speed set
Adaptive cruise control operates like a cruise by adaptive cruise control (ACC), adaptive cruise
control system. The desired speed that was set is control is deactivated.
maintained constantly. The message “ACC passive” appears on the
Vehicle detected in front – driving in traffic The desired speed that was stored is retained.
If a vehicle traveling ahead of you in the same lane After releasing the accelerator pedal, the ACC
is detected as driving slower than the selected accelerates to the desired speed if there is no
desired speed, adaptive cruise control will vehicle in front and controls the distance if there is
automatically maintain a set distance from the a vehicle in front.
vehicle in front. For information on the “ACC passive” status:
If the vehicle in front stops, adaptive cruise control f Please see the chapter “OPERATING STATES
will slow your vehicle down to a stop provided this WHEN ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL IS
is possible within the control limits of the system. SWITCHED ON” on page 161.
Adaptive cruise control actively keeps your vehicle R - Switch adaptive cruise control on/off
at a standstill. 1 - Set/increase desired speed
2 - Reduce desired speed
If the vehicle in front drives off, automatic speed
3 - Interrupt (OFF)
control and distance control can be resumed. 4 - Operational readiness on/return to set speed
(RESUME)
Using adaptive cruise control

Adaptive cruise control is operated using the
control stalk at the bottom left of the steering
wheel.
Information
You can intervene manually at any time by
pressing the brake or accelerator.

“ACC” main menu

The adaptive cruise control display on the multi-
function display can be selected permanently
using the buttons on the multi-function steering
wheel or the control stalk at the bottom right of
the steering wheel.
For information on using the multi-function display:
f Please see the chapter “OPERATING THE
MULTI-FUNCTION DISPLAY ON THE
1. Main menu: Select “ACC”
on the display
A - Desired distance from vehicle in front Status display

B - Status display and desired speed
When adaptive cruise control is switched on, the
C - Vehicle detected in front
D - Current distance from vehicle in front status display B appears at the bottom left of the
E - Current speed of vehicle in front multi-function display (illustration).
F - Progress bar showing speed control range The status display B turns orange when adaptive
(0 - 100 mph (0 - 160 km/h))
cruise control is active.
G - Current speed
The status display B is grey when adaptive cruise
Adaptive cruise control display control is inactive.
All important information, messages and warnings
are displayed on the multi-function display in the
instrument panel.

Examples: Switching adaptive cruise control on and Adaptive cruise control is ready
If adaptive cruise control is switched on, off Cruise control and distance control is inactive
and no desired speed is stored, the Switching adaptive cruise control on after pressing the brakes or interrupting by
cruise control symbol appears but the f Press button R on the control stalk. pressing the control stalk downwards (position 3,
desired speed field remains blank. OFF).
The grey status display appears on the multi-
The desired speed that was stored and the
function display.
If a desired speed is stored and no desired distance that was set are retained.
Adaptive cruise control is ready.
vehicle was detected in front, the cruise The status display B turns grey.
control symbol and the desired speed Switching adaptive cruise control off For information on resuming cruise control and
are displayed. f Press button R on the control stalk. distance control:
If a desired speed is stored and a vehicle
“ACC off” appears on the multi-function f Please see the chapter “RESUMING CRUISE
display. CONTROL AND DISTANCE CONTROL –
was detected in front, a vehicle symbol
The desired speed that was stored is deleted. RESUME” on page 164.
and the desired speed are displayed.
The desired distance is set to the default value.
Adaptive cruise control passive
Operating states when adaptive cruise Cruise control and distance control is inactive
control is switched on after pressing the accelerator.
There are three possible operating states when “ACC passive” appears on the multi-function
adaptive cruise control is switched on. display.
The desired speed that was stored and the
Adaptive cruise control active
desired distance that was set are retained.
Adaptive cruise control automatically regulates The status display B turns grey.
the speed and distance from the vehicle in front. Adaptive cruise control is active again after you
The status display B turns orange. release the accelerator.
Setting and changing the desired speed
Preconditions
– Adaptive cruise control is switched on.
– Vehicle is moving.
– No stationary objects are detected in front.

Setting the desired speed Increasing the desired speed

1. Press the control stalk on the steering wheel f Press the control stalk on the steering wheel
forward (position 1). forward (position 1).
The current driving speed is stored as the The desired speed is increased in steps of
desired speed, which will be maintained 1 mph (1 km/h).
automatically (within the control range of 20 to or
100 mph (30 to 160 km/h)) and appears Press the control stalk on the steering wheel
orange in the status display B. forward and keep it pressed (position 1).
The red triangle G under the progress bar for The desired speed is increased in steps of
the speed control range shows the speed of 5 mph (10 km/h).
your vehicle. The status display B shows the new desired
2. Release the accelerator pedal. speed.
The desired speed is maintained automatically The red triangle G under the progress bar for
unless a vehicle traveling in front is detected the speed control range shows the speed of
as driving slower than the desired speed. your vehicle.
Reducing the desired speed
Information f Briefly pull the control stalk on the steering
If a stationary object was detected in front, the wheel towards the steering wheel (position 2). Setting the desired distance
message “ACC not possible Stationary object The desired speed is decreased in steps of The desired distance from the vehicle in front can
ahead” appears on the multi-function display. 1 mph (1 km/h). be set in four stages.
or
Pull the control stalk on the steering wheel Information
towards the steering wheel and keep it pulled
When you are setting the desired distance, the
(position 2).
“ACC” main menu for adaptive cruise control is
The desired speed is decreased in steps of
displayed temporarily on the multi-function
5 mph (10 km/h).
display.
The status display B shows the new desired
When you first actuate the rocker switch Z, the
speed.
“ACC” main menu appears without changing the
The red triangle G under the progress bar for
desired distance.
the speed control range shows the speed of
your vehicle.
Information
If your vehicle is stationary, the message “ACC
not possible while stationary” appears on the
multi-function display when you press the control
stalk forward (position 1).

Possible distance settings Automatic braking to a standstill

Information If the vehicle in front stops, your vehicle will slow
Suitable for speedy driving in lines of
The distance depends on the driving speed. The traffic. The time gap is 1 second. This down and come to a stop within the control limits
slower the vehicle is traveling, the shorter the corresponds to approx. 36 yd. of the system if adaptive cruise control is active.
distance and the faster the vehicle is traveling, the (33 meters) at a speed of 75 mph The indicator light lights up on the instrument
longer the distance. (120 km/h). panel.
The vehicle is actively held at a stop.
Increasing the desired distance Suitable for steady driving in lines of For information on the HOLD function:
f Press the rocker switch Z upwards. traffic. The time gap is 1.3 seconds. f Please see the chapter “HOLD FUNCTION:
The desired distance is increased. This corresponds to approx. 47 yd. DRIVE-OFF ASSISTANT, STANDSTILL
More orange segments are shown in the (43 meters) at a speed of 75 mph MANAGEMENT” on page 184.
desired distance display A. (120 km/h).
Reducing the desired distance Preset distance Information

f Press the rocker switch Z downwards. Corresponds to the general – Depending on the traffic flow, e.g. slow
The desired distance is reduced. recommendation of the road traffic moving traffic, stopping is initiated by a slow
Fewer orange segments are shown in the safety regulation (“two seconds time crawling phase, which brings the vehicle to
desired distance display A. headway”). The time gap is 1.8 a standstill.
seconds. This corresponds to approx. – When adaptive cruise control is operating
Display showing distance from vehicle in 66 yd. (60 meters) at a speed of
front normally or when the HOLD function is active,
75 mph (120 km/h). the brake pedal may feel different and you may
If a vehicle is detected in front, the vehicle symbol
Suitable for driving on country roads. hear hydraulic noises.
C appears on the multi-function display and in the
The time gap is 2.3 seconds. This This behavior is normal for the system.
status display B.
corresponds to approx. 63 yd. It is not a fault.
The grey area D shows the current distance from
the vehicle in front. (58 meters) at a speed of 55 mph
(90 km/h).

Driving off again Interrupting and resuming cruise control Messages on the multi-function display
The vehicle can be driven off again after being and distance control If adaptive cruise control was deactivated
stopped and speed and distance control will be Interrupting cruise control and distance automatically or if an action cannot be performed,
resumed, depending on the operating state of the control – OFF a message to this effect in blue appears on the
adaptive cruise control system. f Press the brake pedal. multi-function display.
or – “ACC not available”
Adaptive cruise control active
Press the control stalk on the steering wheel Adaptive cruise control is not available,
1. Press the control stalk on the steering wheel e.g. when maneuvering.
upwards (position 4, RESUME). downwards (position 3, OFF).
Adaptive cruise control is inactive. – “ACC not possible ABS/PSM intervention”
2. Press the accelerator pedal briefly. Adaptive cruise control was deactivated
Your vehicle drives off again automatically. The desired speed that was stored and the
desired distance are retained. because ABS or PSM intervened as a control
mechanism.
Information Resuming cruise control and distance – “Release parking brake”
control – RESUME Adaptive cruise control was deactivated
f Press the control stalk on the steering wheel
Your vehicle will not drive off if the vehicle
detected in front is stationary. because the electric parking brake was
upwards (position 4, RESUME). activated.
Adaptive cruise control is ready The vehicle accelerates to the desired speed – “ACC not possible
that was stored unless a vehicle traveling in Move gear lever to D/M”
Automatic speed and distance control can only be
front is detected as driving slower than the Adaptive cruise control was deactivated
resumed when your vehicle is moving.
desired speed and the distance from this because the PDK selector lever is not in
1. Drive off normally.
vehicle is less than the desired distance that position D or manual position M.
2. Press the control stalk on the steering wheel
was set. – “ACC not possible while stationary”
upwards (position 4, RESUME).
The status display B changes from grey to The required action is not possible because
or
orange. your vehicle is stationary, e.g. when setting a
Set or change the desired speed.
or desired speed.
Press the control stalk on the steering wheel – “ACC not possible Revs too high”
upwards and keep it pressed (position 4, Adaptive cruise control was deactivated
RESUME). because the engine-speed limit was reached in
The vehicle accelerates in a more sporty manual position M of the PDK selector lever/
driving style to the desired speed that was shift paddles.
stored. – “ACC not possible Gradient too steep”
The desired distance or the desired speed
Information cannot be set because the incline of the road
is too steep.
If speed and distance control was interrupted by
– “ACC not possible Stationary object
moving the control stalk to position 3 (OFF), it can
ahead”
only be resumed again when the vehicle is moving
The action is not possible because a stationary
and no stationary objects are detected in front.
object was detected ahead.

– “ACC not possible Switch on PSM” Traffic situations in which vehicles cannot
Adaptive cruise control is not available be reliably detected
because PSM was switched off. The radar sensor for adaptive cruise control scans
For information on Porsche Stability a narrow, cone-shaped area in front of your
Management (PSM):
f PLEASE SEE THE CHAPTER “PORSCHE
vehicle.
Detection can be limited or unreliable, depending
STABILITY MANAGEMENT (PSM)” on the traffic situation and the size of the vehicle
on page 181. in front. The system may brake too late or
– “ACC off” unexpectedly.
Adaptive cruise control was deactivated. Stationary vehicles are not detected. The system
– “ACC not possible Steering lock too large” cannot respond to stationary vehicles.
The steering is turned too far. f Drive with extreme care.
General information f Slow down if necessary.
“Sport” and “Sport Plus” Mode
Adaptive cruise control regulates your driving
more dynamically in “Sport” and “Sport Plus”
mode.
Warning messages
Exceptions for adaptive cruise control Overtake request when adaptive cruise
Adaptive cruise control is not available in the control is active (ACC active)
following situations:
If adaptive cruise control detects that braking
– If the ignition is switched off.
assistance is required on the part of the driver, a
– When PSM is off.
warning signal sounds and the warning message
– If the driver’s door is opened and the driver’s
“Distance Please brake” appears on the multi-
safety belt is not fastened.
function display.
– When parking or maneuvering in very tight
spaces. h WARNING
Inadequate braking
– When the electric parking brake is activated. power during automatic
– If the PDK selector lever is in position braking by the adaptive
N, R or P. cruise control.
– On upward or downward slopes of more than In this case, the braking power of the adaptive
15 %. cruise control is not sufficient to prevent a
If one of these exception situations occurs when collision.
adaptive cruise control is switched on, adaptive f Brake immediately.
cruise control will be switched off.
A message to this effect appears on the multi-
function display.

A – Vehicles changing lanes/cutting in C – Driving into and out of corners E – Vehicles with large overhangs
If a vehicle is changing lanes or cutting in ahead of When driving into and out of corners, vehicles will The tail of the vehicle will not be detected
you in the same lane, the vehicle will only be not be detected or will be detected too late, or correctly on vehicles with large overhangs,
detected when it has moved completely into your adaptive cruise control will react to vehicles in e.g. timber lorries.
lane. adjacent lanes. End of vehicle in front
h WARNING
B – Vehicles with a small cross-section/ D – Stationary vehicles not detected correctly.
narrow vehicles A stationary vehicle that appears suddenly in the If there is a vehicle in front with a long overhang,
Narrow or small vehicles will not be detected or detection field of the radar sensor, e.g. after a the radar sensor of the adaptive cruise control is
will be detected too late. vehicle in front changes lanes, will not be detected not able to detect the end of the vehicle or detects
by adaptive cruise control. it incorrectly.
f Drive with extreme care.
f Slow down if necessary.
h WARNING
Stationary vehicle not
detected.
Stationary vehicles are not detected by the radar
sensor of the adaptive cruise control.
f Drive with extreme care.
f Slow down if necessary.

Active Safety – Porsche “Active Safe”

The adaptive cruise control sensor is used for the
Porsche “Active Safe” functions.
These include:
– Brake system prefilling
Prefilling of the brake system if the radar
sensor detects that the vehicle is coming
critically close to a moving obstacle in order to
bridge the air gaps and improve braking
response.
– Brake Assist
Reduction of the activation threshold of the
Brake Assist function if the sensor detects that
the vehicle is coming critically close to a
moving obstacle.
The activation threshold of the Brake Assist
function is reduced in three stages, depending
on how critical the danger situation is. Latent warning (visual) Prewarning (acoustic and visual)
– Target braking If the vehicle is driving too close to the vehicle in If the radar sensor detects that the vehicle is
If the radar sensor detects that the vehicle is front for a long time, to avoid a collision if the coming critically close to and is very likely to
coming critically close to a moving obstacle vehicle in front brakes, a latent warning appears collide with a moving obstacle in front, an acoustic
and, at the same time, braking power is on the multi-function display to warn the driver. and visual prewarning is issued.
inadequate, brake pressure can be increased f Stay further back from the vehicle in front if This warns the driver and still allows a collision to
in accordance with the situation, through to full necessary. be prevented if the driver reacts accordingly.
braking if required.
h
Insufficient distance
WARNING
Information Risk of collision with the vehicle in front.

All Porsche “Active Safe” functions are active for f Brake immediately.
speeds of more than 20 mph (30 km/h).

Car Audio Operation/Tips

Information
For radio operation see your radio manual
The situations described below lead to the
which is included with your on-board
assumption that the driver is driving carefully and
literature.
the prewarning and acute warning functions are
disabled: FM reception
– The driver drives around tight corners. A vehicle is not an ideal place to listen to a radio.
– The driver is braking. Because the vehicle moves, reception conditions
– If the driver accelerates sharply, this action is are constantly changing.
interpreted as an active driving request (e.g. Buildings, terrain, signal distance and noise from
indicating the driver’s intention to overtake). other vehicles are all working against good
reception.
Switching Porsche “Active Safe” warnings Some conditions affecting FM may appear to be
on/off problems when they are not.
The latent warning and prewarning functions are The following characteristics are completely
switched off by default. The acute warning normal for a given reception area, and they do not
function is active. indicate any problem with the radio itself.
Acute warning (acoustic, visual and tangible) Latent warnings and prewarnings can be activated
If the driver does not react to the prewarning by under “Prewarning on” on the multi-function
Information
braking, this is quickly followed by an acute display.
The settings remain stored when the ignition is Electronic accessories should only be installed by
warning, which involves a braking jolt as well as your authorized Porsche dealer.
the acoustic and visual warning. switched on and off.
A braking jolt is felt in the vehicle as a result of a f PLEASE SEE THE CHAPTER “ACTIVE SAFETY – Equipment which has not been tested and
PORSCHE “ACTIVE SAFE”” on page 167. approved by Porsche may impair radio reception.
very quick build-up of brake pressure. This alerts
the driver to the traffic situation. Fading and drifting
The driver can still prevent a collision by reacting FM range is limited to about 25 miles (40 km),
accordingly in this dangerous situation. except for some high power stations.
h
Insufficient distance If a vehicle is moving away from the desired
WARNING
station's transmitter, the signal will tend to fade
Risk of collision with the vehicle in front.
f Brake immediately.
and/or drift. This condition is more prevalent with
FM than AM, and is often accompanied by
distortion.
Fading and drifting can be minimized to a certain
degree by careful attention to fine tuning or
selection of a stronger signal.

Static and fluttering f Never attempt to disassemble or oil any part f Learn to operate the hands-free phone, if it is
When the line-of-sight link between a transmitter of the player unit. Do not insert any object available, before you start driving. Then make
and vehicle is blocked by large buildings or other than a disk into the slot. Remember there use of the hands-free phone at all times.
mountains, the radio sound may be accompanied are no user-serviceable parts inside the
with static or fluttering because of the compact disk player. It is essential to observe the telephone
characteristic of FM. f Do not allow the disk to sustain any manufacturer’s instructions before operating
In a similar effect, a fluttering noise is sometimes fingerprints, scrapes or stickers on the the telephone.
heard when driving along a tree-lined road. surfaces. This may cause poor sound quality. Any portable telephone or radio transmitter which
Hold the disk only on the edge or center hole. is used in a Porsche must be properly installed in
f When not in use, take the disk out of the player,
This static and fluttering can be reduced by
adjusting the tone control for greater bass accordance with the technical requirements of
put the disk back into its case and store it Porsche.
response until the disturbance has passed.
away from dust, heat, damp and direct
Multipath The transmission power must not exceed
sunlight.
10 W.
Because of the reflecting characteristics of FM, Leaving the disk on the dashboard in the sun
direct and reflected signals may reach the antenna can damage the disk. The devices must possess a type approval for
at the same time (multipath) and cancel each other f If the disk gets dirty, clean the disk by wiping your vehicle and have an “e” symbol.
out. As a vehicle moves through these electronic the surfaces from the center to the outside in If you should require equipment with transmission
dead spots, the listener may hear a momentary a radial direction with a soft cloth. power values greater than 10 W, please consult
flutter or loss of reception. Do not use a conventional record cleaner or your authorized Porsche dealer for this purpose.
anti-static record preservative. They are familiar with the technical requirements
Station swapping
Disk cleaners are available in audio stores. for installing devices of this kind.
When two FM stations are close to each other, and The antennas for all radios and telephones with a
an electronic dead spot, such as static or transmitting antenna must be externally mounted.
Car Telephone and Aftermarket Alarms
multipath area, interrupts the original signal,
Important legal and safety information The improper installation of radios or telephones
sometimes the stronger second signal will be
regarding the use of cellular telephones or use of a radio or telephone with a transmitting
selected automatically until the original one antenna inside the car may cause the warning
returns. This swapping can also occur as you Some jurisdictions may prohibit the use of cellular
lights to come on.
drive away from the selected station and telephones while driving a vehicle. Check the laws
and regulations on the use of cellular telephones Improper installation of such equipment can
approach another station of a stronger signal.
in the areas where you drive. create a discharged battery or excessive current
draw from added equipment.
h DANGER Cell Phone Use
Compact disk player Looking away from the road or turning your
attention away from your driving to operate a cell
NOTICE phone will sooner or later cause an accident.
To avoid damage to compact disk player and f Do not attempt to operate a hand-held cell
disks. phone while you are driving. Safety is more
f Use only compact disks labeled as shown, important than a phone call.
having no dirt, damage or warpage.

If aftermarket systems are installed by non- Porsche Communication Serious tire slip (e.g. spinning wheels on snow)
dealership technicians or outside the selling may result in temporarily inaccurate navigation.
dealer, problems may result. Installation of
Management (PCM)
When the battery has been disconnected, it may
aftermarket equipment is not covered under the h WARNING Operation of On-Board take up to 15 minutes before the navigation
New Car Warranty. Systems system is operational once more.
f Consult your authorized Porsche dealer about Setting or operating the multi-function display,
the installation of non-Porsche approved Satellite radio
radio, navigation system, telephone or other
equipment. You must have the satellite radio activated before
equipment when driving could distract you from you can put it into operation. You will need a
Reception quality the traffic. You could lose control of the vehicle.
f Operate the components while driving only if
contract with a provider in order to use this radio.
The reception quality of your car telephone will f Refer to the separate radio operating
change constantly when you are driving. the traffic situation allows you to do so safely.
instructions before putting into operation.
Interference caused by buildings, landscape and
weather is unavoidable. It may become particu- procedures only with the vehicle stationary.
larly difficult to hear when using the hands-free f If it is necessary to operate these components
function due to external noise such as engine and while the vehicle is in motion, use the function
wind noise. keys on the multi-functional steering wheel.
Automatic car-wash f Refer to the separate operating instructions
f Unscrew external antennas before using an before putting the PCM into operation.
automatic car-wash. When put into operation for the first time, a
distance of approx. 3 miles (5 km) must be driven
in order for the navigation system to complete the
process of fine calibration. The same applies
when the tires are changed (e.g. summer/snow
tires) or new tires fitted. Full location accuracy is
not yet achieved during the fine-calibration
process.
If the vehicle has been transported (e.g. ferry, car
train), the system may take a few minutes after
being switched on before it determines the current
location.

USB/iPod® and AUX Voice Control

The USB/iPod® and AUX interfaces are located in Porsche Communication Management (PCM) can
the glove box. be operated by spoken commands using the voice
f Please refer to the chapter “EXTERNAL AUDIO control system.
SOURCE” in the separate PCM operating f Please refer to the chapter “VOICE CONTROL”
instructions. in the separate PCM operating instructions.
Activating voice control
Information f Press button .
Do not leave your iPod®, USB storage device or An acoustic signal sounds and help text for
an external audio source in the vehicle for using the five most important voice commands
extended periods of time because extreme appears on the multi-function display in the
ambient conditions (temperature fluctuations, instrument panel.
humidity) can occur in the vehicle. Simply say the command.
For information on switching the help text on and
off on the multi-function display:
f Please see the chapter “DISPLAYING PCM
INFORMATION ON THE MULTI-FUNCTION
DISPLAY” on page 119.

Porsche Doppelkupplung (PDK) Starting

Porsche Doppelkupplung (PDK) is a seven-speed The engine can be started only if the brake
transmission with an automatic and a manual pedal is depressed and the selector lever is in
selection mode. position P or N.
In automatic selection mode (selector-lever Driving off
position D), gear changing is automatic. f Only select the desired position for driving off
You can change temporarily from automatic (D, M or R) when the engine is idling and the
to manual mode using the shift buttons on the brake pedal is pressed.
steering wheel. f Since the vehicle crawls when in gear, do not
In manual selection mode (selector-lever release the brake until you are ready to drive
position M), you change gear using the shift off.
buttons or shift paddles on the steering wheel
or with the PDK selector lever. Driving off on hills
You can change between selector-lever The Drive-Off Assistant assists the driver when
positions D and M as you wish while driving. driving off on hills. The vehicle is held on the slope
for a short time during the change from the brake
pedal to the accelerator to facilitate driving off
Information Changing selector-lever position immediately after the brake is released.
f Take care not to operate the shift buttons on The selector lever is blocked in the P position f Please see the chapter “HOLD FUNCTION:
the steering wheel inadvertently in either when the ignition is switched off. DRIVE-OFF ASSISTANT, STANDSTILL
automatic or manual mode, thereby triggering When the ignition is switched on, the selector lever MANAGEMENT” on page 184.
undesired gear changes. can be moved from position P and N only when Stopping
f For a brief stop, e.g. at traffic lights, leave the
the release button is pressed, and when the brake
pedal is pressed.
selector lever in drive position and hold the
Release button vehicle with the brake pedal.
The release button (arrow) in the selector f Do not hold the vehicle on a slope using the
lever prevents the gear from being changed accelerator. Use the brake pedal or the
unintentionally. electric parking brake instead.
The release button must be pressed when f Before leaving the vehicle, always apply the
shifting to position R or P. electric parking brake and move the selector
lever to position P.
Parking
f Go easy on the accelerator!
f When parking or maneuvering in a small
space, control the speed by careful use of
the footbrake.

If the selector lever is inadvertently moved from P Failure of the selector lever display on the
or N into a gear (due to a fault or improper use) instrument panel
without pressing the brake, this gear will also flash Transm. failure Park vehicle safely
on the display and no power transmission will
occur. The warning “Transm. failure Park vehicle
f To drive off, press the brake and move the safely” is displayed in red on the multi-function
selector lever from P or N into the required display.
gear again. Effect:
– No selector-lever position is displayed on
Selector-lever position R or D flashes in the the instrument panel.
instrument panel Vehicle can be driven only until it comes to
No power transmission occurs. a stop.
Effects: Action required:
– The selector lever was engaged without the f It is not possible to continue driving. Stop the
footbrake being depressed. vehicle immediately in a suitable place. Have
– The selector lever was moved to R above the the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche
permissible limit speed. dealer. If the vehicle has to be towed:
Action required: Please see the chapter “TOWING”
Indicator for selector-lever position and f Press the footbrake and engage the required on page 278.
engaged gear selector-lever position again from P or N. If there is a fault in the transmission:
When the engine is running, the display shows the If reverse gear fails:
selector-lever position and engaged gear. f Please see the chapter “LIMP-HOME MODE” The warning “Transm. fault Poss. no R gear
on page 178. Drive on poss.” or “Drive temperature too
If the selector lever is between two positions high Reduce load” appears on the multi-function
Effects: display.
– The corresponding selector-lever position in f Please see the chapter “LIMP-HOME MODE”
the instrument panel flashes and the warning on page 178.
“Activate brake” or “Engage gear selector f Have the fault corrected immediately at an
properly” appears on the multi-function authorized Porsche dealer.
display.
Action required:
f Operate the footbrake and engage the
selector lever properly.

Selector-lever Positions D – Automatic selection mode However, if necessary, the gear can be selected
Select position D for “normal” driving. The gears manually.
P – Parking lock Upshifts and downshifts are avoided as far as
f Engage parking lock only when the vehicle is
are shifted automatically according to the
accelerator position and speed. possible when PSM is active. In the case of high
stationary. wheel slip when PSM is switched off, upshifts are
Depending on the way the vehicle is driven
If selector-lever position P is flashing in the prevented until slip is no longer detected.
(economical, comfortable or sporty driving style)
instrument panel, the parking lock is not
and on the resistance (e.g. uphill), the gear- Driving in coasting mode
engaged. The vehicle can roll away.
changing points are shifted towards higher or
Shift again from selector-lever position R to P. Through attentive driving, fuel can be saved in
f Activate the electric parking brake and then
lower engine-speed ranges. coasting mode. The vehicle rolls with the engine
The accelerator position, driving speed, engine
engage the parking lock. disengaged and at idle speed without engine
speed, longitudinal and lateral acceleration and
If selector-lever position P is flashing in the braking effect.
the road profile all have an influence on the gear-
instrument panel, the parking lock is not Preconditions for automatic coasting mode
changing characteristic.
engaged. The vehicle can roll away. – Driving in selector lever position D
Unwanted upshifts, e.g. when entering bends, are
Shift again from selector-lever position R to P. – Coasting mode is switched on.
prevented by swiftly releasing the accelerator
Vehicles without Porsche Entry & Drive: Indicator light on the button is off.
pedal.
The ignition key can only be removed in selector- – Sport and Sport Plus modes are switched off
Depending on lateral acceleration, upshifts on – PSM is active
lever position P.
bends are not made until the engine-speed limit is – Cruise control is not active
R – Reverse gear reached. – Engine, transmission and battery are at
f Select only if the vehicle is stationary and the When you brake, and depending on the amount of operating temperature
brake is applied. deceleration, the PDK transmission changes down – Calm/economic driving style
earlier. – Slight uphill or slight downhill gradients
f Slowly take your foot off the accelerator.
N – Neutral For subsequent cornering, the correct gear is
Selector-lever position N must be selected for engaged when pressure is applied to the brakes The engine is disengaged and runs at idle speed.
towing or in car washes, for example.
f Only select the desired position for driving off
before the bend. The bend is taken in the right The vehicle rolls with no engine braking effect.
gear, and when you accelerate out of the bend you Coasting mode is recognizable by the idle speed
(D, M or R) when the engine is idling and the do not have to change down. indicated on the tachometer.
brake pedal is pressed. With a sporty driving style, downshifts are already
initiated when the brake pedal is touched lightly.
This further enhances a dynamic driving style. Information
The PDK transmission temporarily changes to the In the case of a sporty driving or when swiftly
sportiest gear-changing map, i.e. to the highest releasing the accelerator pedal, coasting mode is
possible gear-changing points, if the accelerator suppressed to allow targeted use of the engine
pedal is pressed quickly. The transmission braking effect. On more pronounced uphill
accordingly shifts down immediately by one or two gradients, “coasting” is also prevented as the
gears (temporary downshift). coasting phases are very short due to the gradient
The transmission no longer selects 7th gear at and no significant fuel savings can be achieved.
very high driving speeds. On more pronounced downhill gradients, coasting

is suppressed because here, the vehicle does not “Sport” mode activated
slow down, despite the engine overrun torque and The PDK transmission switches to a sporty gear- Information
no fuel is consumed in this driving situation due to changing map and shortens the shifting times. Stress on components increases dramatically
utilization of the overrun shut-off. A sporty driving style is recognized more quickly when starting with maximum acceleration in
and the gear-changing speeds are adapted to comparison with normal driving off.
Ending coasting mode/utilizing engine driving performance.
braking effect Preconditions:
Braking downshifts are initiated earlier. Downshifts
f Press the accelerator or brake pedal occur for small decelerations, even at higher revs.
– Launch Control should only be used when the
or engine has reached operating temperature.
“Sport Plus” mode activated – “Sport Plus” mode must be switched on
Operate a shift paddle or a shift button or
Shift gear using the selector lever. In “Sport Plus” mode, the PDK transmission (indicator light on the button comes on and
changes to a shift program designed for driving SPORT PLUS appears on the digital
Initiating coasting mode manually on race circuits. 7th gear is not selected. speedometer or on the steering wheel).
– Driving in selector lever position D or driving in The gear-changing performance is enhanced 1. Press the brake with your left foot.
selector lever position M significantly again compared with “Sport” mode. 2. Quickly press the accelerator down fully
When coasting mode is suppressed, e.g. in the f Please see the chapter ““SPORT” AND “SPORT (kickdown activated) and hold it.
case of sporty driving, sudden release of the PLUS” MODE” on page 188. The engine speed will level off at around
accelerator pedal or excessively low engine 5,500 rpm.
temperature, coasting mode can be initiated Driving off with Launch Control “Launch Control activated” is displayed on
manually. Launch Control allows you to achieve maximum the multi-function display.
f Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and acceleration from standstill. Depending on equipment, the “LAUNCH
shift past the highest possible gear with the h WARNING
CONTROL” logo appears on the steering
Endangering Other Road
shift paddle, one of the shift buttons, or with wheel.
Users
the selector lever. 3. Release the brake within a few seconds.
Launch Control is designed to be used in a
Switching coasting mode on and off using Remaining stationary for a long time with LAUNCH
controlled environment on closed circuit driving
the Auto Start Stop button CONTROL can lead to overloading of the
courses where no vehicle cross traffic or
transmission.
Switching off pedestrian traffic is present.
f Use Launch Control only if conditions permit it
To protect the transmission, the engine power is
f Press button . then reduced and the LAUNCH CONTROL process
to be applied in a safe manner.
f Do not use Launch Control if there is a
The indicator light on the button lights up. is cancelled.
Coasting mode is switched off and automatic In order to drive off, the accelerator must
stopping of the engine is suppressed. possibility it could endanger other persons.
first be fully released.
Such a possibility exists if you cannot see that
Switching on you have a clear road with no possibility of
f Press button . cross traffic in your intended direction of
The indicator light on the button goes out. driving.
Coasting mode is switched on and the engine
is automatically stopped when the vehicle
stops.

Shifting gears on the steering wheel

With the shift buttons on the steering wheel, you
can change temporarily from automatic selection
mode D to manual mode M.
For example:
– Shifting down before bends and on entering
built-up areas.
– Shifting down on downward slopes (engine
braking).
– Shifting down for brief spurts of acceleration.
The manual selection mode remains engaged:
– For cornering (depending on the lateral
acceleration) and overrunning.
– When the vehicle is stationary
(e.g. at a junction).
The system leaves manual selection mode:
– automatically after around 6 seconds
(unless cornering or overrunning), PDK selector lever Steering wheel with shift buttons
– after driving off. M – Manual selection mode Shifting up using the selector lever or the
Kickdown The currently engaged gear is retained when you shift buttons
The kickdown function is active in selector-lever change from D to M. f Press the PDK selector lever or shift button on
positions D and M. If you change from M to D, the gear-changing map the steering wheel forward.
f For optimum acceleration, e.g. when suitable for your current driving style is selected Shifting down with selector lever or shift
overtaking, press the accelerator pedal and the appropriate gear is selected. buttons
beyond the full-throttle point (kickdown). The selector lever and the two shift buttons in the f Pull the PDK selector lever or shift button on
The transmission shifts down depending on the upper steering wheel spokes or the shift paddles the steering wheel back.
speed of travel and engine speed. behind these spokes permit comfortable and safe
Upshifts occur at the highest possible engine selection of the seven forward gears.
speeds.

Power transmission can be re-established by

pulling one of the shift paddles or by actuating
the selector lever.
At low speeds approaching standstill, the brake
must be actuated in order to establish power
transmission.
Fast gear shifting by repeated operation
of the selector lever, shift buttons or shift
paddles.
You can shift up or down by the corresponding
number of gears by quickly operating the selector
lever, the shift buttons or the shift paddles several
times in succession.
Gear changes that would exceed the upper or
lower engine-speed limit are not executed by the
control unit.
There is no automatic upshift at the upper engine-
Steering wheel with shift paddles Upshift prompt for fuel-economy-
speed limit in selector-lever position M. Upshift
Shifting up with selector lever or suppression can be cancelled by kickdown optimized driving
right “+” shift paddle operation. If, for example, the engine-speed limit The consumption-oriented upshift indicator A in
f Press the PDK selector lever forward or pull is reached during overtaking and an automatic the tachometer at the right beside the digital
the right shift paddle on the steering wheel upshift does not occur, the transmission shifts up speed display helps you to develop a fuel-saving
back. in this case as a result of kickdown operation. driving style.
Shifting down with selector lever or f Select an appropriately low gear on upward The upshift indicator lights up – prompting you to
and downward slopes. shift up to the next-higher gear – depending on the
left “–” shift paddle
f Pull the PDK selector lever or left shift paddle
This will ensure optimum use of engine power selected gear, engine speed and accelerator
and engine braking. pedal position.
on the steering wheel back. f Change to the next-higher gear when the
Shift to N – Neutral using the shift paddles upshift indicator lights up.
f Pull both shift paddles simultaneously and
release them again immediately. Transmission
in N – Neutral.
The vehicle rolls with the engine disengaged
and at idle speed without engine braking effect.
The number in the gear indicator goes out and
the selector lever position flashes.

Limp-home mode Transm. fault Poss. no R gear Transm. failure Park vehicle safely
Drive on poss.
Failure of the selector display in the
– Effects: – Effect:
tachometer
Restricted gearshift comfort, Vehicle can be driven only until it comes
Transm. failure Park vehicle safely reverse gear may not function. to a stop.
Action required: Action required:
The warning “Transm. failure Park vehicle Have the fault corrected immediately at an It is not possible to continue driving.
safely” appears on the multi-function display. authorized Porsche dealer. Stop the vehicle immediately in a suitable
– Effect: place. Have the fault corrected at an
No selector-lever position is displayed in the authorized Porsche dealer. If the vehicle has to
tachometer. be towed:
Vehicle can be driven only until it comes to Please see the chapter “TOWING”
a stop. on page 278.
Action required: Warning “Drive temperature too high Reduce
It is not possible to continue driving. Stop the load”
vehicle immediately in a suitable place. Have – Effects:
the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche “Warning jerks” can be felt when driving off
dealer. If the vehicle has to be towed: and the engine power may be restricted.
Please see the chapter “TOWING” Action required:
on page 278. Do not hold the vehicle with the accelerator on
If there is a fault in the transmission a hill, for example. Hold the vehicle with the
– Depending on priority, either the “Transm. brake. Reduce engine load. Stop the vehicle in
failure Park vehicle safely”, “Transm. fault a suitable place if possible. Allow the engine to
Poss. no R gear Drive on poss.” warning or run in selector-lever position P or N until the
the warning “Drive temperature too high warning disappears.
Reduce load” will appear on the multi-function
display.

Transmission and Chassis Control Systems

Your Porsche sports car features a complex integrated system made up of all control systems acting in power transmission and in the chassis.
All control systems are networked with the aim of combining the best possible driving performance with maximum safety.
The following systems are involved, depending on equipment:
System/designation Scope
PTM – Active allwheel drive with electronically regulated map-controlled multi-plate clutch
Porsche Traction Management
PSM – Driving stability control
Porsche Stability Management – Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
– Brake system prefilling
– Brake booster (Hydraulic Brake Assist)
– Automatic brake differential (ABD)
– Anti-slip control (ASR)
– Engine drag torque control (MSR)
– Steering torque recommendation
– HOLD function: Standstill management
PASM – Shock absorber system with adaptive, continuous shock absorber control
Porsche Active Suspension Management
PDCC – Active chassis control system to stabilize roll tendency of vehicle body when driving
Porsche Dynamic Chassis Control
PTV Plus – Laterally dynamic braking intervention for more agile cornering
Porsche Torque Vectoring Plus – Fully-variable electronically controlled rear differential lock

h WARNING Porsche Traction Management Advantages of PTM

Driver Responsibility
(PTM) – Clearly perceptible improvement in traction,
Despite the advantages of transmission and driving stability and steering ability of the
chassis control systems, it is still the driver’s Porsche Traction Management is an active
vehicle.
responsibility to adapt his driving style and allwheel control system designed to influence
– Vehicle is more manageable when driven at its
maneuvers in line with road and weather longitudinal and lateral dynamics. It is closely
performance limits.
conditions, as well as the traffic situation. linked with the Porsche Stability Management
– Improved straight-ahead tracking and greater
The increased safety that is provided should not (PSM) system.
stability.
induce you to take greater risks with your safety. The permanently driven rear axle enhances the – More sporty vehicle setup while making full use
The limits set by the physics of driving cannot be vehicle’s sporty features. Drive power is of all the advantages of four-wheel drive.
overcome. distributed fully variably to the front axle, – ASR, ABD and PTV Plus further enhance
These systems cannot reduce the risk of depending on the driving situation. traction for all wheels.
accidents due to inappropriate speed. In conjunction with PSM, the PTM system ensures
f Adapt your driving style, maneuvers and speed
For information on ASR and ABD:
perfect distribution of power among all four f Please see the chapter “PORSCHE STABILITY
to the road and weather conditions, as well as wheels in every driving situation. This improves MANAGEMENT (PSM)” on page 181.
the traffic situation. traction and driving stability and ensures the same
For information on current torque distribution
high level of agility and dynamic response.
between front and rear wheels in the multi-function
h WARNING
Loss of control over the display:
vehicle f Please see the chapter “ALLWHEEL MENU”
In spite of the advantages of PTM and four-wheel on page 114.
drive, it is still the driver’s responsibility to adapt
his driving style and maneuvers in line with road
and weather conditions, as well as the traffic
situation.
The increased safety that is provided should not
induce you to take greater risks with your safety.
The limits set by the physics of driving cannot be
overcome, even with PTM or four-wheel drive.
Risk of accidents due to inappropriate speed
cannot be reduced by PTM or four-wheel drive.

Porsche Stability Management – Improved braking stability on bends and on The events below inform the driver of PSM control
different or varying road surfaces. operations and warn him to adapt his driving style
(PSM) – Improved brake function and shorter stopping to the road conditions:
PSM is an active control system for stabilization of distance in the event of emergency braking. – PSM warning light on the instrument panel
the vehicle during extreme driving maneuvers. flashes.
Readiness for operation
PSM makes use of both the automatic brake – Hydraulic noises can be heard.
differential (ABD) and anti-slip regulation (ASR) PSM is switched on automatically every time – The vehicle decelerates and steering-wheel
systems, as well as the functions of the anti-lock you start the engine. forces are altered as PSM controls the brakes.
brake system (ABS) and engine drag torque Function – Reduced engine power.
control system (MSR). Sensors at the wheels, brakes, steering system – The brake pedal pulsates and its position is
h WARNING
Loss of control over the and engine continuously measure: changed during braking.
vehicle – Speed In order to achieve full vehicle deceleration,
In spite of the advantages of PSM, it is still the – Direction of travel (steering angle) foot pressure must be increased after the
driver’s responsibility to adapt his driving style and – Lateral acceleration brake pedal has begun vibrating.
maneuvers in line with road and weather – Axial acceleration Examples of PSM control operations
conditions, as well as the traffic situation. – Rate of turn about the vertical axis – If the “front wheels of the vehicle drift” on
The increased safety that is provided should not PSM uses these values to determine the direction a bend, the engine power is reduced and the
induce you to take greater risks with your safety. of travel desired by the driver. rear wheel on the inside of the bend is braked
The limits set by the physics of driving cannot be PSM intervenes and corrects the course if the if necessary.
overcome, even with PSM. actual direction of motion deviates from the – If the rear of the vehicle swings out on a bend,
Risk of accidents due to inappropriate speed desired course (steering-wheel position): the front wheel on the outside of the bend is
cannot be reduced by PSM. It brakes individual wheels as required. braked.
If necessary, PSM also influences the engine – Brake system prefilling:
Advantages of PSM power or the gear-changing characteristic of The brake system is prepared for possible
– Best possible traction and lane-holding ability Porsche Doppelkupplung (PDK) in order to subsequent emergency braking if the
in all driving situations – even on road surfaces stabilize the vehicle. accelerator pedal is released suddenly and
with varying friction. quickly. The brake system is prefilled and the
– The system compensates for undesired brake pads are already applied gently to the
vehicle reactions (Ferraria effect) when the brake disks.
driver releases the accelerator pedal or brakes – Brake booster (Hydraulic Brake Assist):
on bends. This compensation functions up to In the event of an emergency braking operation
the maximum lateral acceleration. where the pedal force is insufficient, a brake
– PSM actively helps to stabilize the vehicle if booster provides the braking pressure
necessary during dynamic driving maneuvers necessary for maximum deceleration at all
(e.g. rapid steering movements, during lane 4 wheels.
changes, or on alternating bends).

Combined operation of PSM and PTV Plus Engine drag torque control (MSR)
In order to ensure optimum stabilization of the In conditions of excessive slip, the engine drag
vehicle, the center differential lock is influenced torque control system prevents all driven wheels
when PSM interventions occur on vehicles with from locking up when the vehicle is overrunning.
PTV Plus. This is also the case for downshifts on a slippery
road.
Combined operation of PSM and PTM
In order to ensure optimum stabilization of the Steering torque pulse
vehicle, torque distribution between the front and The steering torque pulse provides the driver
rear wheels is adapted and the differential lock is with steering assistance when braking on road
influenced when PSM interventions occur on surfaces with differing friction values.
vehicles with PTV Plus. Additional steering forces also assist the driver
In the event of a PTM fault, PSM cannot be during counter steering.
switched off.
If PSM is switched off, it is switched on again
automatically.
Automatic brake differential (ABD)
The ABD system controls the front and rear axles Switching off PSM
separately. If one wheel of an axle starts to spin, f Press button for at least 1 second.
it is braked so that the other wheel on the same PSM is switched off after a short delay.
axle can be driven. The indicator light on the button and the
ABD recognizes different driving states, and it PSM OFF warning light on the instrument
features control strategies adapted to these panel light up.
states. In situations in which little propulsive power The warning “PSM off” appears on the
is required, such as when the vehicle moves off on multi-function display in the instrument panel.
a level gravel surface, traction control already When you brake in the ABS control range,
becomes active at low engine speeds. If a large the vehicle is stabilized even when PSM is
amount of propulsive power is required, e.g. when switched off.
driving off on an uphill slope or for rapid One-sided spinning of the wheels is prevented,
acceleration, the ABD system is adapted even with PSM switched off.
accordingly.
Anti-slip control (ASR)
The anti-slip control system prevents the wheels
from spinning by adjusting the engine power,
thereby ensuring good lane-holding ability and
stable handling.

h WARNING
No PSM assistance “Sport Plus” mode PSM warning light
A sportier setup is obtained when “Sport Plus” – The PSM warning light on the instrument panel
When PSM is switched off, PSM support is no
mode is switched on. lights up for a lamp check when the ignition is
longer provided in critical driving situations
PSM interventions occur later than in Normal switched on.
outside the ABS control range.
f PSM should always be switched on during
mode. The vehicle can be maneuvered with – The light indicates a control operation, even
greater agility at its performance limits, without when PSM is switched off, e.g. brake control in
“normal” driving.
having to dispense with the assistance of PSM the event of one-sided wheel spin.
However, it may be a good idea to switch off PSM in emergency situations. This helps to achieve – The light – in conjunction with the multi-function
temporarily in exceptional situations: optimal lap times, particularly on race circuits display – indicates a fault.
– On a loose surface and in deep snow. and on a dry road surface. The warning message “PSM failure Consult
– When “rocking the vehicle free”. a workshop Adapted driving permitted”
appears on the multi-function display in the
instrument panel.
Information
The vehicle retains its enhanced braking readiness multi-function display:
through prefilling of the brake system even when f Please see the chapter “OVERVIEW OF
PSM is switched off. WARNING AND INFORMATION MESSAGES”
When PSM is switched off, wheel-specific brake on page 129.
interventions and the anti-slip control system f Adapt your driving style according to the
(ASR) are also switched off. changed conditions.
The automatic brake differential (ABD) remains on. f Contact an authorized Porsche dealer.
Switching PSM back on Towing
f Press button . For information on towing:
PSM is active immediately. f Please see the chapter “TOWING”
The indicator light on the button and the PSM on page 278.
OFF warning light on the instrument panel
go out.
The message “PSM on” appears on the

HOLD function: Drive-Off h WARNING Limits of HOLD Function ABS Brake System
Assistant, Standstill Management The limits set by the physics of driving cannot be (Anti-lock Brake System)
The HOLD function, as an assistance function, overcome, even with the HOLD function. h WARNING
Loss of control over the
assists the driver when stopping and driving off on Responsibility for driving off on upward slopes is vehicle
upward slopes. still the driver’s, despite the HOLD function. In spite of the advantages of ABS, it is still the
The vehicle is automatically prevented from rolling Assistance by the HOLD function is not always driver’s responsibility to adapt his driving style and
back away from the desired direction of travel. guaranteed when stopping and driving off on maneuvers in line with road and weather
When the HOLD function is active, the indicator a slippery surface (e.g. on icy or loose surfaces). conditions, as well as the traffic situation.
light on the instrument panel comes on. In this case, the vehicle can slip.
f Always adjust your driving style to the driving
The increased safety that is provided should not
The vehicle is stopped and prevented from rolling induce you to take greater risks with your safety.
back away from the desired direction of travel conditions and vehicle load. Use the footbrake The limits set by the physics of driving cannot be
even without pressing the brake. if necessary. overcome, even with ABS.
Risk of accidents due to inappropriate speed
h CAUTION Drive-Off Assistant Not cannot be reduced by ABS.
Information
Working
The HOLD function is not available if the PDK
selector lever is in position P and N. If the Drive-Off Assistant is not functioning, the ABS helps provide:
driver cannot be assisted when driving off on hills. – Full steering control
f Hold the vehicle with the footbrake.
If the PDK selector lever is moved while the HOLD
function is active, the HOLD function is The vehicle remains steerable
deactivated. – Good driving stability
h CAUTION Vehicle Roll-back No skidding due to locked wheels
If the driver’s safety belt is unfastened and the – Optimum braking distance
If the vehicle comes to a standstill on a steep uphill
driver’s door is opened while the HOLD function is Shorter stopping distance in most cases
gradient without operation of the footbrake by the
active, the electric parking brake is activated – Prevention of wheel locking
driver, this may result in a certain roll-back before
automatically. No flat spots on the tires
the vehicle is held by the HOLD function. In this
For information on the electric parking brake:
f Please see the chapter “ELECTRIC PARKING
situation, the roll-back can be reduced by pressing
the footbrake.
BRAKE” on page 151.
f Assist holding of the vehicle by increasing the
braking force with the footbrake.
Information
When the HOLD function is active, the brake pedal
may feel different and you may hear hydraulic
noises.
This behavior is normal for the system. It is not
a fault.

Function In this case, the braking system will operate Porsche Active Suspension
The decisive advantage of ABS lies in the driving without lock prevention, as in vehicles without
ABS.
Management (PASM)
stability and maneuverability of the vehicle in
hazardous situations. f Adapt your driving style to the changed The PASM system actively adjusts the shock
braking behavior. absorbers. The adjustable damper system selects
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during full
The ABS must be checked by your authorized the appropriate damping level for each wheel
braking, on almost all road surfaces, until just
Porsche dealer in order to prevent the according to the driving situation and driving
before the vehicle stops.
occurrence of further faults with unpredictable conditions. Driving safety, agility and comfort are
ABS begins to control the braking process as optimized.
consequences.
soon as a wheel shows a tendency to lock.
Please contact an authorized Porsche dealer. Two different chassis setups can be selected at
This controlled braking process is comparable
The ABS control unit is adjusted for the approved the push of a button:
with extremely rapid cadence braking.
tire dimensions. – “Chassis Normal”
The pulsating brake pedal and a “juddering noise”
The use of tires with non-approved dimensions can – “Chassis Sport”
warn the driver to adapt his driving speed to the
lead to different wheel speeds, causing ABS to In Normal mode the vehicle is in a sporty and
road conditions.
f If full braking is necessary, press the brake switch off. comfortable setup.
Sport mode offers very sporty shock absorber
pedal fully during the whole braking operation,
tuning (e.g. for driving on the race circuit).
even though the pedal is pulsating. Do not
reduce brake pressure. In addition to manual mode selection, PASM also
adjusts shock absorber tuning for either sporty or
Warning light USA comfort driving, depending on the driving
Warning light Canada situation.
If the ABS warning light lights up on the instrument
panel while the engine is running, the ABS has
switched off because of a fault.
The warning message “ABS/PSM failure
Adapted driving permitted” appears on the
function display:
on page 129.

Porsche Torque Vectoring

Information
(PTV Plus)
The last selected chassis setup is stored in the
memory after the ignition is switched off. Functional Description
h WARNING
Loss of control over the
Warning message vehicle
The system automatically detects PASM faults and Despite the advantages of PTV, it is still the
displays them on the multi-function display in the driver’s responsibility to adapt his/her driving style
instrument panel. and maneuvers in line with road and weather
For information on warning messages on the conditions, as well as the traffic situation.
multi-function display: The increased safety that is provided should not
f Please see the chapter “OVERVIEW OF induce you to take greater risks with your safety.
WARNING AND INFORMATION MESSAGES” The limits set by the physics of driving cannot be
on page 129. overcome, even with PTV.
f Adapt your driving style according to the Risk of accidents due to inappropriate speed
changed conditions. cannot be reduced by PTV.
f Contact an authorized Porsche dealer in order
Selecting the PASM mode to correct the fault. PTV Plus consists of a control system that
performs braking interventions based on driving
dynamics to achieve variable drive torque
2. Press button (repeatedly).
distribution on the rear axle and of an
On the button: electronically controlled rear differential lock.
– No indicator light comes on when “Chassis
PTV Plus improves steering response and
Normal selected” is selected (default
precision through gentle braking interventions on
setting).
the inside rear wheel. This braking action cannot
– An indicator light comes on when “Chassis
be felt by the driver. The vehicle follows the
Sport selected” is selected.
steering angle of the front wheels more precisely.
In addition, the selected chassis setup is shown on Understeer is largely prevented in the limit range.
the multi-function display in the instrument panel This increases the lateral acceleration potential
for approx. 4 seconds. and higher cornering speeds are possible.
The electronically controlled rear differential lock
continuously monitors the driving condition of the
vehicle and distributes the drive torque to the rear
axle as required.

This has the following advantages: Porsche Dynamic Chassis Control Warning message
– Improved traction.
– Reduced load change responses when
(PDCC) The warning message “Fault of the PDCC
Loss of control over the stabiliser” appears on the multi-function display in
cornering at speed. h WARNING
vehicle the instrument panel if there is a system fault.
– Improved driving stability at higher speeds.
PTV Plus changes to a more dynamic map when In spite of the advantages of PDCC, it is still the
multi-function display:
“Sport Plus” is switched on. driver’s responsibility to adapt his driving style and
maneuvers in line with road and weather
conditions, as well as the traffic situation.
on page 129.
The increased safety that is provided should not f Adapt your driving style according to the
induce you to take greater risks with your safety. changed conditions.
The limits set by the physics of driving cannot be f Contact an authorized Porsche dealer.
overcome, even with PDCC.
Risk of accidents due to inappropriate speed Checking hydraulic fluid
cannot be reduced by PDCC and PTV Plus. The hydraulic fluid is checked and changed
regularly as part of servicing.
Porsche Dynamic Chassis Control (PDCC) is
For information on maintenance:
a system for roll stabilization of the vehicle body
when driving.
Driving comfort and driving safety are improved
on page 129.
by active intervention of the anti-roll bars on the
front and rear axles. Vehicle balance and agility
are optimized.
No separate controls are available for the PDCC
system.
When you select a chassis setup in Porsche Active
Suspension Management (PASM) the PDCC
system automatically activates the corresponding
on-road driving program.
For information on selecting a chassis setup:
f Please see the chapter “PORSCHE ACTIVE
SUSPENSION MANAGEMENT (PASM)”
on page 185.

Dynamic Engine Mounting (PADM) “Sport” and “Sport Plus” mode – PSM (Porsche Stability Management) control is
more sporty in “Sport Plus” mode. PSM
On vehicles with Sport Chrono package The selectable chassis settings mean that the
interventions are later than in Normal mode.
vehicle can offer various modes for a sportier
Dynamic Engine Mounting with variable damping is The driver can maneuver the vehicle with
overall setup.
a system designed to enhance both driving greater agility at its performance limits,
The “Sport” mode pushes the control systems
dynamics and driving comfort. Depending on the without having to dispense with the assistance
more in the direction of greater emotionality and
driving situation, the ideal mounting rigidity and of PSM in emergency situations. This helps to
performance during every day driving.
damping is automatically set in the range between achieve optimal lap times, particularly on race
an rigid engine-to-body connection (increase in In “Sport Plus” mode, maximum performance circuits with a dry road surface.
driving dynamics) and decoupling of the engine is set for race-circuit-like driving: – PADM changes to more sporty maps for the
from the body (increase in driving comfort). – In “Sport Plus” mode: dynamic engine mountings to achieve a stiffer
PASM (Porsche Active Suspension engine-to-body connection.
“Sport” mode Management) is automatically changed to In “Sport” for a sporty driving style, in
When “Sport” mode is switched on, a more rigid “Chassis Normal” or “Chassis Sport” mode. “Sport Plus” mode for race-circuit-like driving.
engine-to-body connection is achieved for a sporty – In “Sport Plus” mode: – PTV Plus changes to a more dynamic map
driving style. Like PASM, PDCC is switched to the when “Sport Plus” is switched on.
corresponding “Sport” mode, whereby the – The dynamic cornering light reacts more
“Sport Plus” mode rolling movements of the vehicle are reduced
When “Sport Plus” mode is switched on, an spontaneously to steering angle changes.
further, depending on the selected mode. – The sports exhaust system is be switched to
optimal engine-to-body connection is achieved – The PDK transmission switches to a sporty
for driving on race circuits. a sound-optimized mode, but can be switched
gear-changing map and shortens the gear off separately via the button.
Warning message shifting times when Sport mode is activated. The Auto Start Stop function and coasting
Gear changes take place faster. mode are deactivated.
Dynamic engine mounting faults are indicated by
a warning message on the multi-function display.
– The electronic accelerator pedal reacts f Please read the relevant chapters.
f Please see the chapter “OVERVIEW OF sooner, and the engine is more responsive to
throttle inputs. When Sport mode is switched Overboost function
on and the vehicle is traveling at a speed of On vehicles with Sport Chrono package
on page 129.
less than 40 km/h (25 mph), this function is When “Sport” or “Sport Plus” mode is switched
activated only after the driver has floored the on and the accelerator is fully pressed, the boost
accelerator pedal or released it briefly. pressure is temporarily increased by approx. 2 psi
– The rpm limiter characteristic is “harder”. (0.15 bar) in the medium engine-speed range and
In other words: the engine is immediately the maximum torque increases.
throttled when the performance limits are For information on the torque display:
reached (only in manual selection mode on f Please see the chapter “PERFORMANCE
vehicles with PDK). MENU” on page 116.

“Sport Plus” and

“PASM Chassis Sport” modes
Switching “Sport Plus” mode on and off
simultaneously activates and deactivates the
“PASM Sport” mode.
Switching “Sport” mode has no influence on the
PASM mode.
The PASM mode can be switched manually if you
want to use the characteristics of “Sport” or
“Sport Plus” mode, but prefer a more
comfortable chassis setup.
f Press button (repeatedly).
The indicator light for the selected chassis
setup on the button lights up.
f Please see the chapter “PORSCHE ACTIVE
SUSPENSION MANAGEMENT (PASM)”
on page 185.
Switching “Sport” mode on and off Switching “Sport Plus” mode on and off
f Press button . f Press button .
When “Sport” mode is switched on, the When “Sport Plus” mode is switched on, the
indicator light on the button lights up. indicator light on the button lights up.
The word “SPORT” appears on the digital The words “SPORT PLUS” appear on the
speedometer or on the steering wheel, digital speedometer or on the steering wheel,
depending on vehicle equipment. depending on vehicle equipment.
A sporty gear-changing map is enabled and the In “Sport Plus” mode, the PDK transmission
gear shifting times are shorter for the PDK changes to a shift program designed for driving
transmission. on race circuits. 7th gear is not selected.
A sporty driving style is recognized more quickly
and the gear-changing speeds are adapted to
driving performance.
Braking downshifts are initiated earlier. Downshifts
occur for small decelerations, even at higher revs.

Warning messages Extending Front and Rear Spoilers h WARNING

Failure of the extending
The warning message “Sport mode not spoilers
The extending spoilers improve driving stability at
available” appears on the multi-function display in high speeds. Display of the warning message “Spoiler loss
the instrument panel in the event of a fault. Reduce speed” indicates failure of the extending
For information on warning messages on the NOTICE spoilers. Driving stability will be adversely
multi-function display: Spoilers extended manually or as a result of affected, for example through increased rear axle
f Please see the chapter “OVERVIEW OF lift at higher speeds.
f Adapt your driving style and speed to the
selecting Sport Plus mode do not retract when the
WARNING AND INFORMATION MESSAGES” vehicle stops.
on page 129. f Please remember, for example when parking changed driving behavior.
or in multi-storey car parks, that the ground f Have the fault corrected at an authorized
clearance is limited. Porsche dealer.
Information
After the ignition is switched off, Sport mode is
automatically reset to Normal mode. Automatic mode
f Please see the chapter “PORSCHE ACTIVE Depending on the vehicle speed and the position
SUSPENSION MANAGEMENT (PASM)” of the sun roof, the spoilers extend automatically
on page 185. above approx. 75 mph (120 km/h) and retract
f Please see the chapter “PORSCHE DYNAMIC again below approx. 50 mph (80 km/h).
CHASSIS CONTROL (PDCC)” on page 187. If the automatic control system fails, the warning
message “Spoiler loss Reduce speed” appears
on page 129.

Moving manually above 9 mph (15 km/h): Rear Axle Steering

f Press button briefly to extend the Rear axle steering increases maneuverability and
spoilers. agility with greater vehicle stability and reduces
The indicator light on the button comes on and the turning circle of the vehicle by approx. 23.6 in.
stays on.
f Press button
(0.6 m) compared to a vehicle without rear axle
briefly to retract the steering.
spoilers. The following techniques are used, depending on
The indicator light goes out. the speed:
The spoilers enter automatic mode. – Up to approx. 30 mph (50 km/h):
Coupling with Sport Plus Mode “opposite-direction steering motion” for
In Sport Plus mode, the spoilers are extended to greater agility (virtual shortening of
their end position at speeds above 15 km/h wheelbase).
(9 mph). – Above approx. 50 mph (80 km/h):
The indicator light on the button comes on. “same-direction steering motion” for greater
stability (virtual extension of wheelbase).
The spoilers are not retracted automatically.
Moving manually at 0–9 mph (0–15 km/h):
Manual mode f Press and hold button to extend and
When the ignition is on, the spoilers can be retract the spoilers.
extended and retracted manually using the button The indicator light on the button flashes.
in the center console. The indicator light comes on (extended) or
When the spoilers are in manual mode or extended goes out (retracted) when the end position is
as a result of selecting Sport Plus mode, the reached.
indicator light on the button lights up. Moving manually above 9 mph (15 km/h):
f Press button briefly to extend the
Information spoilers.
Please note the additional information on the multi- The indicator light on the button comes on and
stays on.
f Press button
function display.
briefly to retract the
Moving manually at 0–9 mph (0–15 km/h): spoilers.
f Press and hold button to extend and
The indicator light goes out.
The spoilers enter automatic mode.
retract the spoilers.
The indicator light on the button flashes.
The indicator light comes on (extended) or
goes out (retracted) when the end position is
reached.

Storage, Luggage Compartment and Roof Transport System

Storage .....................................................193
Drinks Holder/Cupholder .............................194
Ashtray ......................................................195
Cigarette Lighter.........................................196
Sockets .....................................................196
Luggage Compartment ...............................197
Roof Transport System ...............................200
Loading Information ....................................204
192 Storage, Luggage Compartment and Roof Transport System

Storage Storage options

Unsecured or incorrectly There are various storage options available,
h WARNING
positioned objects or depending on the vehicle equipment:
loads – Drinks holder/cupholder,
– in the doors,
An unsecured or incorrectly positioned load can
– in the door sill next to the passenger’s seat,
slip out of place or endanger the vehicle
– in the center console, front and rear,
occupants as a result of braking, direction
– storage net in the passenger’s footwell,
changes or in accidents.
f Do not transport items of luggage or objects NOTICE
unsecured in the passenger compartment.
f Do not transport any heavy objects in open Heavy and bulky objects can damage the storage
oddments trays. net.
f Always keep the covers of the oddments trays f Do not place any heavy and bulky objects in the
closed while driving. storage net.
f Do not exceed the maximum gross weight and – behind the rear seat backrests
the axle load. (only with the convertible top closed on the
This information can be found under Cabriolet; when opening the convertible top
“Technical data” in this Owner’s Manual: there should not be any objects in the area
Glove box
Please see the chapter “WEIGHTS” behind the rear seats – risk of damage), h WARNING Open Glove
on page 288.
f Adapt the tire pressure to the load.
– oddments tray between the seats, Compartment
– glove box with pen holder, An open glove box may cause injury during an
If you change the tire pressure, you must – clothes hooks on back of front seat backrests accident.
f Keep the glove box closed while driving.
also update the setting for Tire Pressure (depending on vehicle equipment) and on the
Monitoring. B-pillars,
Information on tire pressures for partially and – enlarged storage space by folding the rear On the inside of the glove box lid, there is a clip for
fully loaded vehicles can be found under seat backrests forward. holding a pen.
“Technical data” in this Owner’s Manual:
Please see the chapter “TIRE PRESSURE FOR Opening
COLD TIRES (68 °F/ 20 °C)” on page 287. f Pull the latch handle (arrow) and open the lid.
Locking
f Always lock the latch handle with the
emergency key to secure the contents from
unauthorized access.
Storage, Luggage Compartment and Roof Transport System 193

Drinks Holder/Cupholder
You can place drinks in the cupholder.
h WARNING Hot Drink Spills
Hot drinks can cause scalding, if spilled, causing
potential loss of vehicle control.
f Only use containers that fit.
f Never put overfull containers in the cupholder.
f Do not use hot drinks.
NOTICE
Risk of damage due to drinks being spilt.

f Only use containers that fit.
f Never put overfull containers in the cupholder.
Oddments tray in the armrest between the Opening the cupholder

front seats There are two folding cupholders behind the panel
Opening above the glove box.
f Press the button (arrow) on the passenger’s
side of the armrest. Information
The lid pops up automatically. f Keep the cupholders closed while driving.
1. Press the cupholder panel.
The panel opens.

2. Press the symbol for the left or right Pulling cupholder out Ashtray
cupholder. 1. Pull out the holder (arrow).
The cupholder folds out. h WARNING Ashtray Fire Risk
2. Insert a cup/container.
3. Close the panel in the middle so that the 3. Carefully slide the holder inwards to adjust it to f Never use ashtray for waste paper disposal,
cupholder does not move while driving. the size of the cup/container. as it could pose a fire hazard.
The cupholders can be pulled out in order to fit
larger containers. Folding cupholder in Opening
1. Push cupholder drawer in.
1. Press briefly on the ashtray lid.
2. Open the panel in the middle.
The lid opens automatically.
3. Fold the cupholder in and engage it.
4. Close the panel in the middle. Emptying
2. To unlock, press ashtray insert forwards at the
top right until it is felt to disengage.
3. Pull the ashtray insert upwards to remove it.
f After emptying the ashtray insert, replace it
and push it downwards until it is felt to engage.

Using the cigarette lighter

The cigarette lighter is ready for use regardless of
ignition lock position.
f For information on using charging adapters in
the cigarette lighter:
Please see the chapter “USING CHARGING
ADAPTER FOR 12 VOLT SOCKET/CIGARETTE
LIGHTER” on page 197.
1. Press briefly on the ashtray lid.
2. Press the lighter into the receptacle. When the
element is red hot, the lighter will jump back to
its initial position.
Cigarette Lighter Sockets in the glove box and passenger footwell
h WARNING Cigarette Lighter Burns Sockets

The tip of the cigarette lighter becomes very hot Electrical accessories can be connected to the
in use. 12 V sockets.
f Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended. Depending on the vehicle equipment, these
f Never touch the heating element or sides of sockets are located in the glove box, the
the lighter. passenger footwell and in the oddments tray in the
f Only hold the heated lighter by the knob. center console.
f For information on using charging adapters in
12 volt sockets:
Please see the chapter “USING CHARGING
ADAPTER FOR 12 VOLT SOCKET/CIGARETTE
LIGHTER” on page 197.
Information
The maximum electrical load of a socket is 20 A,
but only if no other loads are switched on. Do not
exceed 10 A per socket if several loads are
operating simultaneously.

Luggage Compartment
f Please see the chapter “OPENING AND
CLOSING THE LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT LID
AND ENGINE COVER” on page 24.
Socket in the oddments tray between the front seats A - Suitable charging adapter
B - Unsuitable charging adapter
Information Using charging adapter for 12 volt

The sockets and thus the connected electrical socket/cigarette lighter
accessories function even if the ignition is NOTICE
switched off or the ignition key is removed.
Risk of damage to the electrical system.
f Only use a suitable charging adapter (A) that
If the engine is not running and the accessories
are switched on, the vehicle battery will be
meets the following requirements:
discharged. The power supply is interrupted after
The distance 1 between the ground
30 minutes to protect the vehicle battery. If the
connection and the upper edge of the charging
load is to be switched on again, the ignition must
adapter must be less than approx. 0.63 in.
be switched on once.
(16 mm).
Unsuitable charging adapters (B) with a larger
distance 1 than 0.63 in. (16 mm) between the
ground connection and the upper edge can
destroy the sockets.

Tire sealant C- Towing lug Tire filling compressor

D- Tool kit
The tire sealant is located in plastic box A. Removing the tire filling compressor
f Grasp plastic box A at the handle recess and
E- Crank for emergency operation of sliding roof
F- Adapter for security wheel bolts 1. Lift plastic cover A at the handle recesses
remove. G- Plastic wedge for emergency operation of
f To insert the plastic box, first insert the tab at
(arrows) until the clips are heard to disengage
PDK selector lever
and pull forwards slightly.
the rear. Tools 2. Lift the plastic cover at front.
Engage the box at the front. The tools are located in plastic box B.
f Grasp plastic box B at the handle recess and
remove.
f To insert the plastic box, first insert the tab at
the rear.
Engage the box at the front.

3. Unclip retaining strap B on the underside of the 4. Open the cover of the storage compartment 3. Detach retaining strap B and clip onto the
plastic cover and attach to the luggage for the tire filling compressor. plastic cover.
compartment lid. 5. Remove the tire filling compressor from the 4. Insert plastic cover A with the guides at the
storage compartment. rear edge and lay it on the yellow holder.
Lower the plastic cover at the front.
Stowing the tire filling compressor
5. Ensure that the centering pins on the
1. The tire filling compressor is wedge-shaped. underside of the cover engage in the guide.
Insert the tire filling compressor in the storage Press the cover downwards at the handle
compartment so that the narrower side faces recesses until the clips are heard to engage.
forwards (illustration).
2. Close the cover of the storage compartment
for the tire filling compressor.

Roof Transport System When the Roof Transport System is loaded, the
maximum speeds depends on the nature, size and
A roof transport system can be fitted on the
weight of the load being carried.
f Driving, braking and steering behavior change
vehicle for transporting various sports and hobby
equipment.
due to the higher center of gravity and the
Various objects can be transported safely and greater wind resistance. You should adapt your
securely using the roof transport system and driving style accordingly.
additional attachments, e.g. ski rack, bicycle rack, Nevertheless, Porsche recommends that you
surfboard rack, roof box or snowboard holder.
f Only use roof transport systems that have
do not exceed the posted speed limit.
f Never drive faster than 80 mph (130 km/h)
been tested and approved by Porsche. It is not when the Roof Transport System is fitted and
possible to fit commercially available roof rack loaded.
systems. f With the basic carrier fitted and no load, do not
h WARNING Roof Load Instability exceed a maximum speed of 110 mph
f Install individual load-carrying devices, such as

(180 km/h).
ski rack or roof box as centrally as possible

NOTICE
with respect to the supports.
f Do not exceed the permissible roof load, Washing the vehicle in a car wash or failure to A - Front carrier (long)
observe the overall vehicle height or the maximum B - Rear carrier (short)
permissible gross weight and permissible axle C - Cover trims
loads. permitted gross weight can damage the vehicle or D - Torque wrench
Details of these weights and loads can be roof transport system.
f Remove the complete roof transport system
E - Key
found under “Technical data” in this Owner’s
Manual: before washing the vehicle in a car wash. Fitting the roof transport system
Please see the chapter “WEIGHTS” f Check the overall vehicle height with the roof When fitting the roof transport system for the first
on page 288. transport system fitted before driving into time, the front and rear carrier must be adjusted
f Distribute load evenly, with heavy items as low multi-storey car parks, garages, underground according to the width of the vehicle.
as possible. Items of luggage must not project garages and tunnels.
beyond the side of the load area. f Do not exceed the permissible roof load,
f Fix and secure every item to the basic carrier permissible gross weight and permissible axle
with a rope or lashing strap (do not use elastic loads.
rubber tensioners). Details of these weights and loads can be
f Before every trip, and at regular intervals found under “Technical data” in this Owner’s
during long trips, check that the Roof Manual:
Transport System and load are secure. Re- Please see the chapter “WEIGHTS”
tighten if necessary and secure further by on page 288.
locking. Tighten all fastening screws again.

1. Lift seals F on the roof rail using the hook of 2. Fold out all eight rotary holders G using the 3. Unlock cover flaps H using the key and fold
the torque wrench and pull them out. hook of the torque wrench. upwards as far as possible.
4. Ensure that the carriers are fitted in
accordance with the stickers on the underside
of the carriers.

5. When fitting for the first time: Place long carrier A at the front and short Remove the carriers and retighten the screws
Remove the handle from the torque wrench. carrier B at the rear on the rotary holders G on the underside sections of the carriers using
Loosen screws on the underside of the and, at the same time, adapt to the vehicle the short side of the torque wrench.
carriers using the short side of the torque width by means of the moveable carrier 6. Refit the handle of the torque wrench.
wrench. supports.
Tighten the screws on the underside sections
of the carriers slightly.
Information
It is only necessary to loosen the screws on one
underside section of the relevant carrier.

7. Place the carriers on rotary holders G. 9. Fold the cover flaps H of the carriers fully 10. Cut the cover trims C to size and push them
downwards and push the desired load-carrying sideways into the carriers or press them into
NOTICE device (e.g. ski box, bicycle carrier) into the the carriers from above to protect against
Risk of damage to the seals through unintentional carrier. moisture and dirt as well as to prevent wind
pinching between roof and supports. noise.
f Insert seals F in the supports. 11. Fold up and lock the cover flaps.
8. First, screw in all eight carrier fastening

screws using torque wrench D until flush with Information
the surface. Then tighten all eight screws until f After driving 30 miles (50 km), retighten all
the arrow markings on the torque wrench are screws on the carriers and load-carrying
exactly aligned. devices.

Loading Information The Gross Combined Weight Rating is the h DANGER Riding in a Cargo Area
maximum total weight rating of vehicle,
Definitions passengers and cargo. Injuries are much more likely in an accident if
The rear-axle load is the vehicle weight on the persons ride in the cargo area.
f Persons must ride only on the seats provided
The Vehicle Capacity Weight – Load Limit - is
rear axle plus the weight of the transported load. the maximum total weight limit specified of the
The Curb weight – actual weight of your vehicle - for this purpose.
f Make sure that everybody fastens their safety
load (passengers and cargo) for the vehicle. This
vehicle weight including standard and optional is the maximum weight of passengers and cargo
equipment, fluids, and emergency tools. This that can be loaded into the vehicle. This infor- belts.
weight does not include passengers and cargo. mation can be found on the tire pressure plate.
The Gross Vehicle Weight is the sum of the curb h DANGER Overloading Vehicle
The maximum loaded vehicle weight is the
weight and the weight of passengers and cargo sum of curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle Overloading will lead to dangerous vehicle
combined. capacity weight and production options weight. reactions and long braking distances.
The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating is the The load rating is the maximum load that a tire f Never exceed the specified axle loads.
maximum total weight of vehicle, passengers, is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure.
luggage and optional equipment. The maximum load rating is the load rating for NOTICE
The Gross Axle Weight Rating is the maximum a tire at the maximum permissible inflation
load limit for the front or the rear axle. This Risk of damage to the vehicle if the vehicle is
pressure.
information is located on the safety compliance overloaded.
The cargo capacity is the permissible weight of
sticker located in the driver’s side door aperture Overloading can shorten the service life of the
cargo, the subtracted weight of passengers from
area. tires and car. Damage due to overloading is not
the load limit.
f Never exceed the permissible limits.
covered by the vehicle warranty.
f Never exceed the specified axle loads.
For determining the compatibility of the tire and
vehicle load capabilities:
f Please see the chapter “TIRES AND WHEELS”
on page 244.
The load capacity coefficient (e.g. “106”) is a
minimum requirement. For more information:
f Please see the chapter “INSCRIPTION ON
RADIAL TIRE” on page 252.

in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo

and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. [1400 -
600 (4 x 150) = 800 lbs.].
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in
Step 4.
Example for determining the combined weight of

occupants and cargo
Vehicle Load Capacity Determining the combined weight of

f The combined weight of occupants and cargo occupants and cargo:
should never exceed the weight shown on the f Add the weight of all occupants and then add
tire plate in the vehicle. the total luggage weight (figure).
Please see the chapter “TIRE PRESSURE Steps for determining correct load limit
PLATE” on page 284.
f Never exceed the number of passengers
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX
shown on the tire pressure plate in the vehicle.
pounds” on your vehicle’s placard (depending
on the date of manufacture).
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX
pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400
lbs. and there will be four - 150 lb passengers

Parking
ParkAssist..................................................207
Reversing Camera ......................................209
Swivelling Down Mirror Glass as Parking Aid .210
Garage Door Opener HomeLink®
(Universal Remote Control) ..........................211
206 Parking
ParkAssist h WARNING ParkAssist Limits

When the driver is parking and maneuvering Responsibility for parking and for assessing the
the vehicle, ParkAssist indicates the distance risk to persons, children, pets, and small objects
between the vehicle and a large obstacle by around the vehicle lies completely with the driver.
means of signal tones. f Make sure that no persons (especially small
f On vehicles with front and rear sensors: children), animals or obstacles are within the
For information on the ParkAssist visual maneuvering area.
display, please refer also to the section f If the continuous tone sounds, stop and do not
“PARKASSIST” in the operating instructions move your vehicle further in that direction.
for the Porsche Communication Systems
PCM/CDR.
ParkAssist is activated automatically when
reverse gear is selected and the ignition is on.
If the vehicle has front ParkAssist, this also issues
an automatic warning when the distance between
the vehicle and an obstacle in front is less
– than approx. 40 in./100 cm (acoustically)
and approx. 32 in./80 cm (visually). Ultrasound sensors
A warning signal sounds when Sensors

– the distance between the vehicle and an The ultrasound sensors A in the rear bumper and
obstacle at the rear is less than the sensors A in the front bumper (depending on
approx. 71 in./180 cm. vehicle equipment) measure the distance to the
The ParkAssist visual display appears on the closest obstacle:
central screen of the Porsche communication – Range behind the vehicle:
system. approx. 71 in. (180 cm)
Front and rear ParkAssist is not activated: – Range at the side of the vehicle:
– At a speed of more than approx. 9 mph approx. 24 in. (60 cm)
(15 km/h). – Range in front of the vehicle:
– When the electric parking brake is activated. approx. 47 in. (120 cm)
– When the ParkAssist has been switched off Obstacles cannot be detected in the “blind”
with button A in the overhead console with sensor area (above and below the sensors,
the ignition switched on. e.g. objects hanging down or close to the
The indicator light in button A lights up. ground).
Parking 207
Signal tones/function h WARNING Care Required Parking

When reverse gear is selected, ParkAssist
confirms that it is switched on by issuing a short Even when using ParkAssist, the driver is still
signal tone. responsible for taking due care when parking and
when assessing obstacles.
If the vehicle has front ParkAssist, no signal tone
A continuous tone sounds when there is a risk of
will be issued when reverse gear is selected.
collision.
f Do not drive rearward any further once
Instead, the ParkAssist visual display will appear
on the central screen of the Porsche
a continuous tone sounds.
communication system.
A detected obstacle is signaled by an Limits of ultrasonic measurement
intermittent tone. The intervals decrease
– ParkAssist cannot detect sound-absorbing
as the obstacle is approached.
obstacles (e.g. winter driving, powder snow,
If the distance drops to less than approx. 12 in.
clothing made from fabric or fur),
(30 cm), a continuous tone sounds.
f Set the radio volume so that the signal tones
– sound-reflecting obstacles (such as glass
surfaces and flat painted surfaces),
are not drowned out.
– and very thin obstacles (e.g. thin posts).
The volume of the signal tones can be changed
Ultrasound sensors Other ultrasound sources (e.g. pneumatic brakes
individually.
of other vehicles, sweeping machines and jack
Maintenance notes For information on changing the signal tone hammers) can interfere with the detection of
f The sensors must always be kept free of dust, volume:
f Please see the chapter “ADJUSTING
obstacles.
ice and snow in order to ensure that they are
fully functional. PARKASSIST VOLUME” on page 126.
f Do not damage sensors by abrasion or
scratching.
f Maintain sufficient distance when cleaning with
high-pressure cleaning equipment.
The sensors will be damaged if the pressure is
too high.
208 Parking
Display due to environmental factors

Correct operation is no longer guaranteed if there
is a temporary fault (e.g. caused by ice formation
or heavy soiling on the sensors).
Depending on the environmental factor, it is
possible that a stop warning with acoustic warning
or a warning triangle without acoustic warning is
displayed on the central screen of the Porsche
communication system.
ParkAssist is ready for operation again when the
interference has been eliminated.
In the event of a permanent fault in ParkAssist,
a continuous tone sounds for three seconds after
reverse gear has been selected.
On vehicles with front and rear sensors only:
In the case of a sensor problem, a warning triangle
appears in the monitoring area for the relevant
Deactivating ParkAssist bumper and a continuous tone sounds for three Reversing Camera
On vehicles with front and rear ParkAssist, the seconds. The reversing camera is located between the
ParkAssist function can be deactivated manually. Possible cause:
f Press button A on the overhead operating
number plate lights in the bumper (illustration).
– Defect or system fault. f Please refer to the chapter “REVERSING
console. f Have the fault corrected. Please contact an CAMERA” in the separate PCM/CDR operating
The indicator light in the button lights up. authorized Porsche dealer. instructions.
ParkAssist is switched off. f Always keep the reversing camera clean and
free of ice and snow so that vision is not
impaired.
For car care instructions:
f Please see the chapter “CAR CARE
INSTRUCTIONS” on page 231.
Parking 209
Swivelling down mirror glass manually

If the function was deactivated on the
multi-function display, the exterior mirror on the
passenger’s side can also be swiveled down
manually.
1. Engage reverse gear.
The indicator light B on the selection button A
for adjusting the exterior mirror on the driver’s
side lights up.
2. Press the selection button D for adjusting
the exterior mirror on the passenger’s side.
The mirror on the passenger’s side swivels
down.
Information
The position of the automatically lowered mirror
glass can be changed as required using the
Swivelling Down Mirror Glass as adjustment button C. On vehicles with memory
Parking Aid package, the setting is stored on the car key or
When reverse gear is engaged, the mirror on the the person buttons on the driver’s side.
passenger’s side swivels down slightly to show
Moving mirror to its initial position
the curb area.
The mirror swivels back to its initial position:
Preconditions – after a certain time delay, if the vehicle is
– The ignition must be switched on. shifted out of reverse gear, or
– The function must be activated on the – immediately, if the vehicle reaches a speed
multi-function display. of more than 9 mph (15 km/h).
For further information on setting the parking aid: The exterior mirror on the passenger’s side can
f Please see the chapter “ADJUSTING also be moved to its initial position manually.
REVERSING OPTIONS” on page 122. f Press the selection button A for the exterior
mirror on the driver’s side.
210 Parking
f Please read the instructions for the original f When the button is pressed, the transmitter
remote control. unit sends the signal forward in direction of
f Information on the compatibility of your travel.
vehicle’s HomeLink® system with the original Always align the vehicle with the receiver.
remote control can be obtained from your Otherwise, range restrictions cannot be ruled
authorized Porsche dealer, on the HomeLink® out.
website (www.homelink.com) or by calling the f Before selling the vehicle, delete the
free HomeLink® hotline (1-800-355-3515). programmed signals for the garage door
opener on the keypad.
h WARNING Garage Door Opener f If the equipment cannot be operated after the
Use initial programming, check whether the original
When opening and closing the equipment being remote control has fixed or changeable code.
operated, parts of the body could become To find this out, read the instructions for the
trapped or crushed. original remote control.
f When using the garage door opener, make
Garage Door Opener HomeLink® sure that no persons or animals are within the
(Universal Remote Control) range of movement of the equipment that is
being operated.
With the HomeLink® of your Porsche, a wide
f Observe the safety notes for the original
range of remote-controlled equipment
remote control.
(e.g. garage door/gate to your property, security
systems, house lights) can be activated from
inside the vehicle.
The HomeLink® system replaces up to three
different original remote controls. The signal for
a remote control can be assigned to one of the
three memory buttons I, II and III on the overhead
operating console keypad. The respective
equipment can then be operated using the
programmed memory button.
Transmission of the signal is indicated by the
indicator light in the button II.
Parking 211
Operating the garage door opener Assigning garage door opener signal to key
The ignition must be switched on. with fixed code system
f Press and hold the corresponding HomeLink® On the overhead operating console:
button on the overhead operating console 1. Switch on ignition.
keypad. 2. The standard factory-set codes must be
The indicator light A lights up during signal deleted before programming for the first
transmission. time.
3. Press and hold the desired button on the
Programming garage door opener: overhead operating console keypad until the
Deleting and storing signals indicator light A on button II starts to flash
The HomeLink® system is programmed on slowly.
the overhead operating console and in direct You now have 5 minutes to teach the button.
proximity to the vehicle’s radiator grille. 4. Stand in front of the vehicle with the original
Preconditions remote control of the system to be
programmed.
In order to delete programmed signals and
store garage door opener signals,
– the ignition must be switched on,
– the turn signals must be off and Deleting programmed signals from the
– the engine must be off. buttons
When using the garage door opener, the vehicle This process clears all of the HomeLink®
must be within the range of the receiver. programming. It is not possible to individually
clear the programmed buttons.
Do not repeat this process if you want to assign
additional signals to the buttons.
f Keep the two outer buttons I and III on the
overhead operating console keypad pressed
for approx. 20 seconds until the indicator
light A on button II starts to flash quickly.
f Release the buttons.
The HomeLink® buttons are cleared and can be
reprogrammed.
212 Parking
6. The turn signal lights will flash once when the For information on deleting the factory-set codes:
5 minute teaching readiness period has f Please see the chapter “PROGRAMMING
elapsed. GARAGE DOOR OPENER: DELETING AND
Repeat steps 3 to 5. STORING SIGNALS” on page 212.
7. Repeat steps 3 to 5 to assign further signals 3. Press and hold the desired button on the
to the remaining buttons. overhead operating console keypad until the
indicator light A on button II starts to flash
Assigning garage door opener signal to
slowly.
button with changeable code system
You now have 5 minutes to teach the button.
With some systems, a changeable code also 4. Stand in front of the vehicle with the original
needs to be programmed for the HomeLink® remote control of the system to be
system. A second person makes programming programmed.
easier.
In front of the vehicle:
Identifying the changeable code 5. Hold the original remote control approx. 12 in.
f Press and hold the previously programmed (30 cm) away from the marked position
HomeLink® button. (illustration) and press and hold the transmit
If the indicator light A on button II in the overhead button (for more than approx. 1 minute in
In front of the vehicle: operating console starts to flash quickly and lights some cases) until the vehicle’s turn signal
5. Hold the original remote control approx. 8 in. up continuously after approx. 2 seconds, it means lights flash on and off three times or the
(20 cm) away from the marked position that the equipment has a changeable code indicator light A on the overhead operating
(illustration) and press and hold the transmit system. console starts flashing quickly.
button (for more than approx. 1 minute in f Information on synchronization can also be The turn signal lights flash three times and the
some cases) until the vehicle’s turn signal found in the operating instructions for the indicator light A flashes quickly to confirm that
lights flash on and off three times or the system to be programmed. the new signal has been programmed
indicator light A on the overhead operating successfully.
Assigning garage door opener signal to key Several attempts with different distances
f Park the vehicle within the range of the remote-
console starts flashing quickly.
The turn signal lights flash three times and the between the vehicle and the original remote
controlled equipment. control may be necessary.
indicator light A flashes quickly to confirm that
On the overhead operating console: With some systems, the transmit button on the
the new signal has been programmed
1. Switch on ignition. original remote control may need to be
successfully.
2. The standard factory-set codes must be pressed again when the indicator light on the
Several attempts with different distances
deleted before programming for the first time. original remote control goes out.
between the vehicle and the original remote
control may be necessary.
With some systems, the transmit button on the
original remote control may need to be
pressed again when the indicator light on the
original remote control goes out.
Parking 213
6. The turn signal lights will flash once when the Reprogramming an individual button on the 5. The turn signal lights will flash once when the
5 minute teaching readiness period has keypad 5-minute teaching readiness period has
elapsed. A HomeLink® button can be individually elapsed.
Repeat steps 3 to 5. reprogrammed without deleting the rest of the Repeat steps 1 to 4.
7. Repeat steps 3 to 5 to assign further signals button assignments. 6. Repeat steps 1 to 4 to assign further signals
to the remaining buttons. On the overhead operating console: to the other buttons.
8. Locate the programming button on the 1. Switch on ignition.
receiver of the equipment to be programmed, 2. Press and hold the button to be programmed Information
f Please consult an authorized Porsche dealer if
e.g. on the motor unit of the garage door on the overhead operating console keypad
opener. (approx. 20 seconds), until indicator light A on you have not been able to successfully assign
Synchronizing the system button II flashes slowly. signals to the buttons even though you have
9. Activating the motor unit: You now have 5 minutes to teach the button. carefully followed the instructions in this
Press the programming button on the receiver 3. Stand in front of the vehicle with the original section and the operating instructions for the
of the garage door opener. remote control of the system to be original remote control. Your authorized
You then usually have approx. 30 seconds to programmed. Porsche dealer has a list of all garage door
initiate step 10 (a setting indicator is usually In front of the vehicle: opener signals that can be adapted.
activated on the motor unit). 4. Hold the original remote control approx. 12 in. f Make sure that the battery in the remote
10. Programming on the overhead operating (30 cm) away from the marked position control for the garage door opener is new.
console: (illustration) and press and hold the transmit If the battery voltage is inadequate, faults may
Press the button you selected in step 3 three button (for more than approx. 1 minute in occur in signal transmission. The system in the
times on the overhead operating console some cases) until the vehicle’s turn signal vehicle then learns the wrong code, which will
keypad (you must press the button on the lights flash on and off three times or the not be recognized reliably by the garage door
keypad several times to complete the setting indicator light A in the overhead operating opening mechanism.
process for some devices). console starts to flash quickly.
11. Repeat steps 3 to 10 to assign signals to the The turn signal lights flash three times and the
other buttons. indicator light A flashes quickly to confirm that
12. After completing programming on the the new signal has been programmed
overhead operating console, the system successfully.
should recognize the HomeLink® signal and Several attempts with different distances
launch as soon as the memory button is between the vehicle and the original remote
pressed when the ignition is switched on. control may be necessary.
With some systems, the transmit button on the
original remote control may need to be
pressed again when the indicator light on the
original remote control goes out.
214 Parking
Alarm System and Theft Protection

Alarm System and
Passenger Compartment Monitoring.............216
Immobilizer.................................................217
Theft Protection ..........................................217
Alarm System and Theft Protection 215

Alarm System and Passenger The alarm system monitors the following alarm
contacts: Information
Compartment Monitoring – Alarm contacts in doors, luggage f If you unlock the vehicle with the emergency
FCC Numbers: compartment lid, engine compartment lid and
USA: KR55WK50138 key in the door lock, you must switch the
headlights. ignition on (ignition lock position 1) within
Canada: 7812D-5WK50138 – Interior surveillance: Movement in the interior 10 seconds of opening the door in order to
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC when the vehicle is locked, e.g. attempted prevent the alarm system from being
Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Canada. theft after breaking a window. triggered.
Operation of this device is subject to the following – Inclination sensor country-specific equipment:
two conditions: inclination of the vehicle (e.g. when attempting
1. This device may not cause harmful to tow).
interference, and If one of these alarm contacts is interrupted, Information
2. this device must accept any interference the alarm horn sounds for approx. 30 seconds If button on the car key is pressed and a door
received including interference that may cause and the emergency flasher flashes. or the luggage compartment lid is not opened, the
undesired operation. After 5 seconds of interruption, the alarm is vehicle is locked again automatically after 30
Changes or modifications not expressly approved triggered again. This cycle is repeated up to ten seconds.
by the party responsible for compliance could void times.
the user's authority to operate the equipment. Switching on Switching off the alarm system if it is
f The alarm system is activated when the vehicle
triggered
Information is locked. f Unlock vehicle or
switch on ignition.
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio
Switching off
f The alarm system is deactivated when the
or TV interference caused by unauthorized Switching off interior surveillance and
modifications to this equipment. inclination sensor
vehicle is unlocked.
Such modification could void the user's authority If people or animals are remaining in the locked
to operate the equipment. vehicle or the vehicle is being transported on,
e.g. a train or ship, the interior surveillance
system and inclination sensor must be switched
off temporarily.
door is opened.
Using the car key
f Quickly press button on the car key twice
within 2 seconds.
The emergency flasher flashes slowly once.
The doors are locked, but can be opened from
inside.
216 Alarm System and Theft Protection

On vehicles with Porsche Entry & Drive Alarm system is activated Theft Protection
f Quickly press button A in the door handle – The indicator lights flash quickly twice when When leaving the vehicle, always:
twice within 2 seconds. the vehicle is being locked, then flash normally. f Close the windows.
The emergency flasher flashes slowly once. Alarm system is activated, interior f Close the sunroof.
The doors are locked, but can be opened from surveillance and inclination sensor are f Close the Convertible top (Cabriolet).
inside. switched off f Activate the electric parking brake.
– The indicator lights flash quickly while you are f Remove the ignition key (or switch ignition off
Information on vehicles with Porsche Entry & Drive).
f Close the glove box.
locking the vehicle, go out for 10 seconds and
f Close all storage compartments.

The interior surveillance system and inclination then flash normally.
f Remove valuables, vehicle registration

sensor remain switched off if: Faults in the central locking system and
– The interior surveillance system and inclination alarm system documents, telephone and house keys from
sensor were switched off when you last locked
The indicator lights come on for 10 seconds, flash the vehicle.
f Close the luggage compartment lid.
the vehicle
at double speed for 20 seconds and then flash
f Close the engine compartment lid.
and
normally.
f Lock the doors.
If button A was pressed and a door or the
luggage compartment lid was not opened. Avoiding false alarms
f If people or animals are remaining in the locked
Function indication vehicle or the vehicle is being transported on
On vehicles without Porsche Entry & Drive, a train or ship, for example, the interior
the locking condition of the vehicle is indicated by surveillance system and inclination sensor
the indicator lights in the central locking button must be switched off temporarily.
flashing at different frequencies. f Always close the sunroof and all door windows.
The indicator lights go out when the vehicle is
unlocked. Immobilizer
On vehicles with Porsche Entry & Drive, the There is a transponder (an electronic component),
locking condition of the vehicle is indicated by the containing a stored code, in each key.
indicator lights in the doors flashing at different Before the ignition is switched on, the ignition lock
frequencies. checks the code.
The immobilizer can be deactivated and the
engine started using an authorized ignition
key only.
Alarm System and Theft Protection 217

Maintenance and Car Care

Exercise Extreme Caution when
Working on your vehicle ..............................219
Engine Oil...................................................221
Checking Engine Oil Level............................222
Topping Up Engine Oil .................................222
Washer Fluid windshield...............................224
Wiper Blades ..............................................224
Emission Control System.............................225
How Emission Control Works .......................226
Fuel Economy.............................................226
Operating Your Porsche in other Countries ...227
Fuel ...........................................................227
Portable Fuel Container ...............................229
Fuel Recommendations ...............................230
Fuel Evaporation Control ............................231
Car Care Instructions ..................................231
218 Maintenance and Car Care

Exercise Extreme Caution when h WARNING

f Take care when working near hot parts of the
Fluid Health Hazards
vehicle, in particular engine parts and parts of
Working on your vehicle Refill fluids, e. g. engine oil, brake fluid or coolant the exhaust system.
The engine compartment of any motor vehicle is a are hazardous to health (poisonous, irritant, f Before working in the engine compartment,
potentially hazardous area. If you are not fully caustic). always switch the engine off and let it cool
familiar with proper repair procedures, do not f Keep these fluids out of children's reach and sufficiently.
attempt the adjustments described on the dispose of them in accordance with the f Allow the engine to cool down before opening
following pages. appropriate State, Local and Federal the cap of the coolant reservoir and protect
This caution applies to the entire vehicle. regulations. your hands, arms and face from any possible
h DANGER
f Only work on your vehicle outdoors or in a well escape of hot coolant.
Fire and Explosion
ventilated area.
Hazards
h WARNING Moving Engine Parts
Many vehicle fluids are highly flammable, e. g. h WARNING Exhaust Gas Inhalation
fuel, engine and transmission oil. Fuel vapors can Take great care to ensure that hands, fingers,
cause an explosion. When a battery is being Engine exhaust is dangerous if inhaled. articles of clothing (e. g. ties, sleeves, etc.),
charged, highly explosive gases can develop. Engine exhaust fumes have many components necklaces or long hair cannot be caught up by the
f Do not smoke or allow an open flame around which you can smell. They also contain carbon radiator fans, drive belt or other moving parts.
the battery or fuel. monoxide (CO), which is a colorless and odorless The radiator fans in the front of the vehicle may be
Pay attention to sparks, e. g. when coming into gas. operating or unexpectedly start operating when
contact with cables. Carbon monoxide can cause unconsciousness the engine is switched on.
Keep a fire extinguisher close at hand. and even death if inhaled. f Exercise extreme care that parts of the body,
f Ensure that there are no open flames in the f Only work on your vehicle outdoors or in a well articles of clothing or jewelry do not get caught
area of your vehicle at any time when fuel ventilated area. in the radiator fan, drive belt or other moving
fumes might be present. Be especially parts.
cautious of devices such as hot water heaters h WARNING Hot Engine Parts, f Carry out work in these areas only with the
which ignite a flame intermittently. Exhaust System and engine off and exercise extreme caution.
f Only work on your vehicle outdoors or in a well Fluids
ventilated area. The engine and surrounding components, exhaust h WARNING Electric Shock from
system and coolant become very hot when the Ignition System
engine is running. When the ignition is on, all cables and wires of the
The coolant reservoir is pressurized. Careless ignition system carry a high voltage.
opening of the coolant reservoir can lead to hot f Exercise special care when working on the
coolant suddenly spraying out. ignition system.
Maintenance and Car Care 219

h WARNING Failure to Secure Vehicle

If the vehicle is not secured, or incorrectly f Incomplete or improper servicing may cause f Only use genuine Porsche spare parts for your
secured, during repair work, it could move problems in the operation of the car. If in doubt vehicle or spare parts of similar quality which
unexpectedly or fall from the car jack or car lift.
f Be alert and cautious around the engine at all
about any servicing, have it done by your have been manufactured according to the
authorized Porsche dealer. specifications and production requirements of
times while it is running. Improper maintenance during the warranty Porsche. These parts are available from your
If you have to work on the engine while it is period may affect your Porsche warranty authorized Porsche dealer. Safety-related
running, always apply the electric parking coverage. accessories should only be used if they are
brake and put the PDK selector lever in f Some countries require additional tools and from the Porsche Tequipment range or are
position P or N.
f Always support your car with safety stands if it
special spare parts to be carried in your tested and approved by Porsche. Your
vehicle. Please make enquiries before driving authorized Porsche dealer will be pleased to
is necessary to work under the car. The jack abroad. advise you and answer any questions you may
supplied with the car is not adequate for this have.
purpose.
Technical Modifications However, the use of other parts or
f Modifications may be carried out on your
Switch off level control of air suspension and accessories may adversely affect the safety
height adjustment. of your vehicle, and Porsche can take no
vehicle only if approved by Porsche.
Please see the chapter “RAISING THE VEHICLE responsibility for any loss or damage caused
This ensures that your Porsche will remain
WITH A LIFTING PLATFORM, TROLLEY JACK by their use.
reliable and safe to drive, and that it will not be
OR STANDARD JACK” on page 254.
f Jack up the vehicle only at the specified damaged as a result of the modifications. Even if the supplier of other accessories or
Your authorized Porsche dealer will be pleased parts is a recognized supplier, the safety of
jacking points on the underside of the vehicle.
f Never start the engine when the vehicle is to advise you. your vehicle may still be affected if such items
are installed.
jacked or lifted up. Vibration from the engine Due to the large variety of products offered in
could cause the vehicle to fall.
f When working under the car without safety
the accessory market, it is not possible for
Porsche to inspect and approve every one.
stands but with the wheels on the ground, f In addition, please note that the use of
make sure the car is on level ground, the replacement parts that are not genuine
wheels are blocked, and that the engine Porsche parts or approved parts, or the use of
cannot be started. accessories not approved by Porsche may
Withdraw ignition keys (switch ignition off in also detrimentally affect your vehicle warranty.
vehicles that have Porsche Entry & Drive). f Check your vehicle regularly for signs of
damage. Damaged or missing aerodynamic
components, such as spoilers or underbody
panels, impair vehicle handling and must
therefore be replaced immediately.

Radiator fan, engine compartment Measurements on test stands as the amount of dilution and oxidation of the
blowers lubricant.
Performance test
If the vehicle is used for repeated short trips, and
h WARNING Radiator Fans, Engine Performance tests on roller-type test stands are
consumes a normal amount of oil, the engine oil
Compartment Blowers not approved by Porsche.
measurement may not show any drop in the oil
The engine-compartment blowers are mounted Brake tests level at all, even after 600 miles (1000 km) or
under the engine compartment lid. Brake tests must be performed only on roller-type more. This is because the oil is gradually
After the engine is switched off, the engine test stands. becoming diluted with fuel or moisture, making it
compartment temperature is monitored for The following limit values must not be exceeded appear that the oil level has not changed.
approx. 30 minutes. on roller-type test stands: The diluting ingredients evaporate out when the
During this period, and depending on – Test speed 4.7 mph (7.5 km/h) vehicle is driven at high speeds, as on an
temperature, the engine-compartment blowers – Test duration 20 seconds expressway, making it then appear that oil is
may continue to run or start to run. excessively consumed after driving at high
f Carry out work in this area only with the engine Testing the electric parking brake speeds.
off and exercise extreme caution. Electric parking brake tests on the brake test If the conditions you drive your vehicle in are
The radiators and radiator fans are in the front of stand must only be performed with the ignition dusty, humid, or hot, the frequency of the oil
the vehicle. switched on and with the Porsche Doppelkupplung change intervals should be greater.
The radiator fans in the front of the vehicle may be selector lever in position N. If the vehicle is driven at a high rate of speed,
operating or unexpectedly start operating when The vehicle switches automatically to brake test climatic conditions are warm, and the load is high,
the engine is switched on. stand mode, in which the electric parking brake the oil should be checked more frequently, as
f Carry out work in these areas only with the can be tested. driving conditions will determine the rate of oil
engine switched off. The message “Electric parking brake in consumption.
f Take great care to ensure that parts of the service mode” appears on the multi-function – The engine in your vehicle depends on oil to
body, items of clothing or jewelery cannot be display in the instrument panel. lubricate and cool all of its moving parts.
drawn in by the radiator fan, engine- Balancing wheels on the vehicle Therefore, the engine oil should be checked
compartment blower, drive belt or other regularly and kept at the required level.
During finish balancing of the wheels, the entire
moving parts. – Make it a habit to have the engine oil level
vehicle must be lifted and the wheels must be free
to turn. checked with every refueling.
– The oil pressure warning light is not an oil level
Engine Oil indicator.
It is important to perform oil changes regularly in The oil pressure warning light indicates serious
accordance with the intervals specified in your engine damage may be occurring when lit, if
Maintenance Schedule. engine rpm is above idle speed.
Engine oil consumption

It is normal for your engine to consume oil.
The rate of oil consumption depends on the quality
and viscosity of oil, the speed at which the engine
is operated, the climate, road conditions as well

Checking Engine Oil Level Measuring the oil level after topping up h WARNING Hot Engine Parts
f Check the oil level on the multi-function display
engine oil or opening the engine
compartment lid Risk of burns from hot parts in the engine
at regular intervals before refueling.
f Please see the chapter “DISPLAY AND
compartment.
f Exercise extreme caution when working in the
The oil level can be checked after waiting for
MEASUREMENT OF THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL” approx. 1 minute with the vehicle parked on a level
engine compartment.
f Please see the chapter “MEASUREMENTS ON
on page 101. surface and the engine at operating temperature.
If the engine compartment lid (Cabriolet
h DANGER Swallowing Engine Oil convertible-top compartment lid) is opened when
TEST STANDS” on page 221.
Engine oil is hazardous to your health and may be the engine is cold (e.g. in order to top up engine
fatal if swallowed. oil), the oil level cannot be displayed for a certain
Information
f Keep engine oil out of children's reach. time.
The “Check Engine” warning light may come on if
The message “No information about oil level
available at present” appears on the the cap of the oil filler opening is opened while the
h WARNING Engine Oil Cancer Risk
multi-function display. engine is running.
Used engine oil contains chemicals that have f Engine oil should therefore only be topped
caused cancer in laboratory animals. up with the engine at operating temperature. Topping Up Engine Oil
f Always protect your skin by washing This ensures short waiting times for the Porsche recommends .
thoroughly with soap and water. soonest possible oil level display.
The right oil for your vehicle:
If you suspect an oil leak in the engine have your h WARNING
Engine-compartment
authorized Porsche dealer check it out blowers or other moving Complies with Viscosity class2)
immediately. parts in the area of the approval1)
engine
Top-up quantity Porsche A40 SAE 0W - 403)
Hands, fingers, items of clothing (ties, sleeves, SAE 5W - 404)
The difference between the minimum and
etc.), necklaces or long hair can be drawn in by SAE 5W - 504)
maximum marks on the segment display is
moving parts, e.g. the engine-compartment
approx. 1.8 quarts (1.7 liters). 1) Generally, you can find details on the
f Never add more engine oil than required to
blowers, drive belt, etc., when working in the
engine compartment. manufacturer approvals on the oil containers or as
reach the maximum mark. a notice displayed by the retailer.
The engine-compartment blowers are mounted
Oil-level warning under the engine compartment lid. The current approval status is also available from
After the engine is switched off, the engine your authorized Porsche dealer.
2) SAE viscosity class – Example: SAE 0W - 40
compartment temperature is monitored for
approx. 30 minutes. Specification 0W = Viscosity specification for low
If the oil level is too low, this is indicated by the
During this period, and depending on temperatures (winter).
oil-warning light on the multi-function display.
f Add engine oil immediately. temperature, the engine-compartment blowers Specification 40 = Viscosity specification for high
f Please see the chapter “OVERVIEW OF may continue to run or start to run. temperatures.
WARNING AND INFORMATION MESSAGES” f Carry out work in this area only with the engine 3) For all temperature ranges.
4)
on page 129. off and exercise extreme caution. For the temperature range above –13 °F
(–25 °C).

Always observe the following points:

– Use engine oils approved by Porsche only. This
is a precondition for optimum and problem-free
driving.
– Regular oil changes are part of servicing.
It is important that the service intervals,
particularly the oil change intervals, are
observed in accordance with the specifications
in the “Maintenance” booklet.
– Oils approved by Porsche can be mixed with
each other.
– Porsche engines are designed so that no oil
additives may be used.
– A label is located in the engine compartment,
which provides you with information on suitable
oil for your engine.
Your authorized Porsche dealer will be pleased to
advise you. Coupé Cabriolet
h WARNING Engine Oil Fire Hazard 1. Before opening the engine compartment lid
(Cabriolet convertible-top compartment lid), Information
Fire hazard if engine oil comes into contact with read off the engine oil level on the multi- After opening the engine compartment lid
hot engine parts.
f Exercise extreme caution when topping up
function display. (Cabriolet convertible-top compartment lid), the oil
f Please see the chapter “DISPLAY AND level can only be measured after a certain waiting
engine oil.
f Top up engine oil only with the engine stopped
MEASUREMENT OF THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL” time.
on page 101.
and ignition switched off. 2. Park the vehicle on a level surface.
3. Switch off engine (at operating temperature).
4. Open the engine compartment lid (Cabriolet:
convertible-top compartment lid).
5. Unscrew cap on oil filler opening (illustration).
6. Top up engine oil according to the gauge on
the multi-function display.
7. Carefully close cap on the oil filler opening.

f Only use window cleaner concentrate that Wiper Blades

meets the following requirements:
– Dilutability 1:100, Maintenance notes
– Phosphate-free, NOTICE
– Suitable for plastic headlight lenses.
Risk of damage if wiper blades are not cleaned
We recommend window cleaner concentrates
properly. The graphite coating on the wiper blades
approved by Porsche. Your authorized Porsche
may be damaged.
f Do not clean the wiper blades using a cloth or
dealer will be pleased to advise you.
The washer fluid reservoir for windshield and
sponge, but rinse with clean water.
headlights is located in the rear left of the luggage
compartment (driving direction).
NOTICE
Warning message
Risk of damage due to unintentional folding back
A warning message appears on the multi-function of wiper arm and frozen wiper blades.
display if the washer fluid level is too low. f Always hold the wiper arm securely when
f Add washer fluid at the next opportunity. replacing the wiper blade.
The maximum filling capacity is approx. 6.3 US f Thaw the wiper blades before lifting them from
quarts (6 liters). the window.
Washer Fluid windshield
Observe the following points: Adding washer fluid Wiper blades that are in perfect condition are vital
f Depending on the season, mix the water with 1. Open cap on washer fluid reservoir. for a clear view.
the appropriate additives (window cleaner 2. Add washer fluid. f Have the wiper blades replaced twice per year
concentrate, antifreeze) in the correct mixture 3. Close cap carefully. (before and after the cold season) or if wiper
ratio. performance deteriorates or the blades are
damaged.
Summer filling with water + window cleaner f After switching off the ignition, press the wiper
concentrate in the mixture ratio specified on stalk down once 4.
the container. The wipers move upwards by approx. 45°.
f Clean the windshield regularly with window
Winter filling with water + antifreeze + cleaner, especially after washing the vehicle in
window cleaner concentrate in the mixture a car wash.
ratio specified on the container. We recommend Porsche window cleaner.
If they are very dirty (e.g. soiled with insect
Always follow all the instructions on the remains), they can be cleaned with a sponge
containers of the additives used. or cloth.
If the wiper blades judder or squeak, this may be
due to the following:
– If the vehicle is washed in an automatic car
wash, wax residues may adhere to the

windshield. These wax residues can be Emission Control System f Do not alter or remove any component of the
removed only by using window cleaner emission control system.
concentrate. In the interest of clean air f Do not alter or remove any device, such as
– The wiper blades may be damaged or worn. Pollution of our environment has become a heat shields, switches, ignition wires, valves,
f Have damaged wiper blades replaced problem that is of increasing concern to all of us. etc., which are designed to protect your
immediately. We urge you to join us in our efforts for cleaner air vehicle's emission control system. In addition
f Please see the chapter “WASHER FLUID in controlling the pollutants emitted from the to serious engine damage, this can result in a
WINDSHIELD” on page 224. automobile. fire if excess raw fuel reaches the exhaust
Porsche has developed an emission control system.
f Do not continue to operate your vehicle if you
Replacing wiper blades
f After switching off the ignition, press the wiper
system that controls or reduces those parts of
emissions that can be harmful to our environment. detect engine misfire or other unusual
stalk down once. Your Porsche is equipped with such a system. operating conditions.
The wipers move upwards to an angle of
Porsche warrants the Emission Control System in
approx. 45°. Parking
f Please read the separate instructions provided
your new car under the terms and conditions set
forth in the Warranty Booklet. h WARNING Fire Risk When Parking
by the wiper blade manufacturer.
f We recommend that you get your authorized
You, as the owner of the vehicle, have the The exhaust system becomes very hot when the
responsibility to provide regular maintenance engine is running and remains hot for some time
Porsche dealer to replace the wiper blades.
service for the vehicle and to keep a record of all after the vehicle is turned off. Flammable material
NOTICE maintenance work performed. To facilitate record close to the exhaust system could ignite.
Risk of damage. If the wiper blades are not
keeping, have services performed by authorized f Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
Porsche dealers. They have Porsche trained where the hot exhaust system may come in
changed properly, they can come loose when the
technicians and special tools to provide fast and contact with dry grass, brush, fuel spill or
car is moving.
f Check that the wiper blades are seated
efficient service. other flammable materials.
securely. To assure efficient operation of the Emission f If your car catches on fire for any reason, call
The wiper blades must engage properly in Control System: the fire department. Do not endanger your life
the wiper arm. f Have your vehicle maintained properly and in by attempting to put out the fire.
accordance with the recommendations
described in your Maintenance Booklet. Lack
of proper maintenance, as well as improper
use of the vehicle, will impair the function of
the emission control system and could lead to
damage.

Undercoating In addition, carbon monoxide (CO) and oxides of The exclusive use of unleaded fuel is
nitrogen (NOx) contribute to engine emissions. critically important for the life of the
h WARNING AfterMarket They, too, are formed during the combustion catalytic converters. Therefore, only
Undercoating process and discharged into the exhaust system. unleaded fuel must be used.
Additional undercoating or rust protection agents To reduce these pollutants, your Porsche is The catalytic converters will be damaged by:
on or near the exhaust system can become too equipped with a precisely calibrated fuel injection
hot when driving and ignite, causing a fire. – Push or tow starting the vehicle,
system to assure a finely balanced air/fuel mixture
f Do not apply additional undercoating or rust under all operating conditions.
– Misfiring of the engine,
protection agent on or near the exhaust – Turning off the ignition while the vehicle is
manifolds, exhaust pipes, catalytic converters Oxygen sensor moving,
or heat shields. During driving the substance The oxygen sensor, installed in the exhaust pipe – Driving until the fuel tank is completely empty,
continuously senses the oxygen content of the – By other unusual operating conditions.
f Do not continue to operate your vehicle under
used for undercoating could overheat and
ignite. exhaust and signals the information to an
electronic control unit. The control unit corrects these conditions, since raw fuel might reach
the air/fuel ratio, so the engine always receives an the catalytic converters. This could result in
How Emission Control Works accurately metered air/fuel mixture. overheating of the converters. Federal law
When an automobile engine is running, it uses prohibits use of leaded fuel in this car.
energy generated through the combustion of a Crankcase ventilation
mixture of air and fuel. Depending on whether a Through crankcase ventilation, undesirable Fuel Economy
car is driven fast or slowly or whether the engine emissions from the engine crankcase are not Fuel economy will vary depending on where,
is cold or hot, some of the fuel (hydrocarbons) permitted to reach the outside atmosphere. These when and how you drive, optional equipment
may not be burned completely, but may be emissions are recirculated from the crankcase to installed, and the general condition of your
discharged into the engine crankcase or exhaust the air intake system. From here the emissions car.
system. Additional hydrocarbons may enter the mix with the intake air and are later burned in the A car tuned to specifications and correctly
atmosphere through evaporation of fuel from the engine. maintained, will help you to achieve optimal
fuel tank. These hydrocarbons (HC), when fuel economy.
f Have your vehicle tuned to specifications. Air
released into the air, contribute to undesirable
Catalytic converters
pollution. The catalytic converters are efficient “clean-up” cleaner should be dirt free to allow proper
devices built into the exhaust system of the engine “breathing”.
vehicle. The catalytic converters burn the Battery should be fully charged.
undesirable pollutants in the exhaust gas before it Wheels should be properly aligned.
is released into the atmosphere. Tires should be inflated to the correct
pressure.

f Always monitor your fuel consumption. Operating Your Porsche in other Fuel
f Drive smoothly, avoid abrupt changes in speed
as much as possible.
Countries When the ignition is on, the fuel level is displayed
f Avoid jack rabbit starts and sudden stops. Government regulations in the United States and on the instrument panel.
f Please see the chapter “FUEL GAUGE”
f Do not drive longer than necessary in the lower Canada require that automobiles meet specific
emission regulations and safety standards. on page 90.
gears. Shifting into a higher gear early without
Therefore, cars built for the U.S. and Canada differ
lugging the engine will help save fuel. h DANGER
f Prolonged “warm up” idling wastes gas. Start from vehicles sold in other countries. Refueling Fire Risk
the vehicle just before you are ready to drive. If you plan to take your Porsche outside the f Fire, open flame and smoking are prohibited
Accelerate slowly and smoothly. continental limits of the United States or Canada, when handling fuel.
f Switch off the engine if stationary for longer there is the possibility that:
periods. – Unleaded fuel may not be available, h WARNING Fuel Vapors and Skin
f Any additional weight carried in the vehicle – Unleaded fuel may have a considerably lower Contact
reduces fuel economy. Always keep cargo to octane rating. Excessive engine knock and Fuel and fuel vapors are hazardous to health.
a minimum and remove all unnecessary items. serious damage to both engine and catalytic f Avoid contact with skin or clothing, since injury
f Organize your trips to take in several errands converters could result, to your skin may occur.
in one trip. – Service may be inadequate due to lack of f Do not inhale fuel vapors, since they may make
f All electrical accessories contribute to proper service facilities, tools or diagnostic you ill and possibly cause death if inhalation is
increased fuel consumption. equipment, prolonged and occurs in a closed space.
f Only switch on the air conditioning when – Replacement parts may not be available or
necessary. very difficult to get.
f Do not drive with the Roof Transport System
NOTICE
Porsche cannot be responsible for the
mounted unless you need it. mechanical damage that could result To prevent damage to the emission control
because of inadequate fuel, service or parts system and engine:
f Never drive the tank dry.
The EPA estimated miles per gallon (mpg) is
availability.
f Avoid high cornering speeds after the warning
to be used for comparison purposes, actual
mileage may be different from the estimated If you purchased your Porsche abroad and want to
bring it back home, be sure to find out about lights have come on.
mpg, depending on your driving speed,
weather conditions and trip length. Your shipping and forwarding requirements, as well as f Please see the chapter “FUEL ECONOMY”
actual highway mileage may be less than the current import and customs regulations. on page 226.
estimated mpg.
f Please observe all local and national speed
Check engine warning light
limits. If the warning lights in the instrument panel come
on and remain on while driving, it suggests:
– a potential engine control problem and the
need for system service or
– an improperly fastened tank cap or
refueling with engine running.

Information
It is important that the service intervals,
particularly the oil change intervals, are observed
in accordance with the specifications in the
“Maintenance” booklet.
Refueling
h DANGER Refueling Fires /
Cellphones
The RF energy from a cellphone can cause a
sparking on bare metal, much like aluminum foil in
a microwave oven. The spark could ignite gasoline
fumes present while refueling.
f Do not use a cellphone while pumping gas.
h DANGER Refueling Fires / Static 1. Stop the engine and switch off the ignition. 3. Slowly open and remove the tank cap.
Electricity 2. Open the filler flap by pressing on the rear part Put the tank cap into the holder (arrow).
Static discharge from your body can ignite of the filler flap (arrow). 4. Insert the pump nozzle fully into the filler neck.
gasoline fumes present when you get back out of The vehicle must be unlocked. The handle of the pump nozzle must point
the vehicle and touch the fuel nozzle. downwards.
f Do not re-enter the vehicle while pumping gas.
Total capacity
– approx. 18.0 US gallons (68 liters),
including approx. 3.17 US gallons (12 liters)
reserve

5. Operate the pump nozzle and refuel the Portable Fuel Container
vehicle.
Do not add further fuel once the correctly h DANGER Transporting Filled Fuel
operated automatic pump nozzle has switched Containers
off. Fuel could spray back or could flow over If the portable fuel container is damaged in an
when heated. accident and fuel escapes, it could ignite or
6. Replace the tank cap immediately after explode.
refueling and close it until you hear and feel it f Do not carry a portable fuel container on
locking. journeys.
7. Close the filler flap and press on the rear of the f Observe the relevant laws which prohibit fuel
filler flap until it engages securely. transport.
Information h WARNING Portable Fuel Container

If you lose the tank filler cap, you must replace it Vapor Hazard
only with an original part. Vapors from the fuel are hazardous to health.
f Do not carry a portable fuel container in the
NOTICE occupant compartment.
Emergency unlocking of the filler flap
Risk of damage to decorative foils.
If the electrical release mechanism is faulty, the
Decorative foils may fade if they come into filler flap can be opened as follows:
contact with fuel. f Open the passenger’s door.
f Wipe off any spilled fuel immediately. f Pull the button in the right-hand door aperture
(arrow).
The filler flap pops open.

Fuel Recommendations Unleaded fuels may not be available outside the Octane ratings
continental U.S. and Canada. Therefore, we Octane rating indicates a fuel’s ability to resist
Your Porsche is equipped with catalytic
recommend you do not take your car to areas or detonation. Therefore, buying the correct octane
converters and must use UNLEADED FUEL
countries where unleaded fuel may not be gas is important to prevent engine “damage”.
WITHOUT METALLIC ADDITIVES ONLY.
available.
Your engine is designed to provide optimum The RON octane rating is based on the research
performance and fuel economy using unleaded method. The CLC (U.S. Cost of Living Council
premium fuel with an octane rating of 98 RON/ Information octane rating) or AKI (antiknock index) octane
88 MON (93 CLC or AKI). Porsche therefore In some countries the available fuel quality may rating usually displayed on U.S. fuel pumps is
recommends the use of these fuels in your not meet the requirements of your Porsche vehicle calculated as research octane number plus motor
vehicle. and can result in coking inside or around the octane number, divided by 2, that is written as:
Porsche also recognizes that these fuels may not injector bores or other serious damage to the
always be available. Be assured that your vehicle engine, fuel system or exhaust system. RON+MON or R+M
will operate properly on unleaded premium fuels In this case, the fuel may be mixed only with the 2 2
with octane numbers of at least 95 RON/ additive sold and recommended by Porsche after
85MON (90 CLC or AKI), since the engine’s consulting your authorized Porsche dealer. The CLC or AKI octane rating is usually lower than
“Electronic Octane™ knock control” will adapt the the RON rating:
Porsche part number 000 043 206 89.
ignition timing, if necessary. f Observe the instructions and mixture ratios For example: 95 RON equals 90 CLC or AKI.
If fuels of less than 95 RON/85 MON (90 CLC stated on the container. Fuels containing ethanol
or AKI) are used however, this could reduce It is important that the service intervals, Do not use any fuels containing more than
performance and increase fuel consumption. particularly the oil change intervals, are observed
f Avoid driving at full throttle.
15 percent ethanol by volume.
in accordance with the specifications in the We recommend, however, to change to a different
It is important to observe the regular service “Maintenance” booklet. fuel or station if any of the following problems
intervals, and particularly the oil change intervals, occur with your vehicle:
specified in the “Maintenance” booklet. NOTICE – Deterioration of drivability and performance.
The use of UNLEADED FUEL WITHOUT – Substantially reduced fuel economy.
Risk of destruction of the engine, fuel system or
METALLIC ADDITIVES ONLY is critically – Vapor lock and non-start problems, especially
exhaust system if non-approved additives are
important to the life of the catalytic at high altitude or at high temperature.
used.
f Use only additives approved by Porsche.
converters. Deposits from leaded fuels or – Engine malfunction or stalling.
metallic additives will ruin the converters and
The use of other additives can result in
make them ineffective as an emission
destruction of the engine, fuel system or
control device. Metallic additives can cause
exhaust system of your vehicle.
serious engine damage.
Cars with catalytic converters have a smaller fuel
tank opening, and gas station pumps that
dispense unleaded fuel have smaller nozzles. This
will prevent accidental pumping of leaded fuel into
cars with catalytic converters.

Fuel Evaporation Control Car Care Instructions h WARNING Chemical Cleaners

Fuel tank venting f Please see the chapter “MEASUREMENTS ON Cleaning agents may be hazardous to your health.
TEST STANDS” on page 221. Most chemical cleaners are concentrates which
The evaporation chamber and the carbon canister
prevent fuel vapors from escaping to the Regular Maintenance and correct care helps require dilution. High concentrations might cause
atmosphere at extreme high outside to maintain the value of your car and is also problems ranging from irritation to serious injury.
temperatures, when driving abruptly around a requirement for maintaining the f Keep cleaning agents out of reach from
curves and when the car is parked at an incline or manufacturers vehicle warranties. children.
in any other non level position. Your authorized Porsche dealer has specially f Observe all caution labels.
developed car-care products from the f Always read directions on the container before
Vapor control system and storage Porsche program available either singly or using any product. These directions may
When the fuel tank is filled, vapors are collected in as complete car-care sets. They will be contain information necessary to avoid
the evaporation chamber by a vent line leading the pleased to help you select suitable products. personal injury.
vapors to the carbon canister where they are Whether you use Porsche products or other f Do not use fuel, kerosene, naphtha, nail polish
stored as long as the engine does not run. commercially available cleaning agents first remover or other volatile cleaning fluids. They
Purge system make sure of their correct application. may be toxic, flammable or hazardous in other
A Porsche that is well-cared for can look like new ways. Only use spot removing fluids in a well
When the engine is running, the fuel vapors from
for years. It all depends on the amount of care the vented area.
f Do not clean the underside of chassis,
the canister will be mixed with fresh air from the
owner is willing to give the car.
ambient air of the canister. This mixture will be
fenders, wheel covers, etc., without protecting
directed to the intake air housing by the tank vent
your hands and arms as you may cut yourself
line, mixed with the intake air and burned during
on sharp-edged metal parts.
normal combustion.
NOTICE
Risk of damage to the vehicle or property from
cleaning agents.
f Observe all caution labels.
Information
Moisture and road salt on brakes may affect
braking efficiency.
f Test the brakes after each vehicle washing.

High-pressure cleaning equipment, steam Decorative film f New cars should be washed carefully with
cleaners plenty of clear water to protect the new paint
NOTICE work. Dark paint finishes show up the smallest
NOTICE of surface damage (e.g., scratches) more
Risk of damage due to separation of the
Risk of damage as a result of using high-pressure decorative film when using high-pressure cleaning readily than lighter colors.
cleaning equipment, steam cleaners or similar. equipment, steam cleaners or similar cleaning Dark colors are slightly more susceptible to
High-pressure cleaning equipment, steam equipment. scratching and require particularly careful
cleaners or similar can damage the following f Do not use high-pressure cleaning equipment, paint care.
components: steam cleaners, etc. to clean decorative films. Dark paints make even the smallest surface
– Convertible top blemishes (scratches) more conspicuous than
– Tires Care of door lock lighter colors.
– Logos, emblems f To prevent the door lock from freezing during f Do not wash your Porsche in direct sunlight or
– Painted surfaces when its body is hot.
f
the cold season, cover the lock barrel with
– Alternator suitable adhesive tape while washing the When washing by hand, use a car shampoo,
– Electrical components and plug connections in vehicle. plenty of water, and a soft sponge or
the engine compartment washing brush.
If the lock still freezes, use an ordinary de-icer.
– ParkAssist sensors We recommend Porsche car shampoo.
f
In many cases, a well warmed key can help.
– Radar sensor for adaptive cruise control f Never use excessive force. Start washing the vehicle by thoroughly
– Reversing camera wetting the paintwork and rinsing the heavy
f Always read the operating instructions Car washing dirt off.
provided by the equipment manufacturer. The best protection for the vehicle from the f After washing the vehicle, rinse it thoroughly
f Always cover the lid of the brake fluid reservoir damaging effects of the environment is frequent with water and rub it dry with chamois-leather.
prior to cleaning. Never point the cleaning jet washing and preservation. Do not use the same chamois for rubbing dry
directly at the lid. The longer road salt, road dust, industrial dust, as you use for cleaning the windshield and
f When cleaning with a flat-jet nozzle or insect remains, bird excrement, and tree windows.
a so-called “dirt blaster”, maintain a minimum exudations (e.g. resin, pollen), etc. are allowed h WARNING Wet Brakes
distance of 20 in. (50 cm). to remain on the bodywork, the more harmful
f Never use high-pressure cleaning equipment their effect. Reduced or uneven braking action may be caused
or steam cleaners with a round-jet nozzle. by wet brakes.
f After washing the vehicle, test the brakes and
Observe the following points in order to ensure
A high-pressure cleaning device or steam that the vehicle is washed thoroughly without
cleaner fitted with a round nozzle will damage damaging the paintwork: steering and briefly brake the disks dry.
your vehicle. The tires are particularly f The underside of the vehicle should also be When doing so, make sure that vehicles
susceptible to damage. thoroughly washed at the end of the gritting traveling behind you are not affected.
f Do not point the cleaning jet directly at any of season at the latest.
the aforementioned components. f Wash your vehicle only at sites provided for
this purpose to prevent soot, grease, oil and
heavy metals from entering the environment.

Cleaning in car washes Convertible top f In the case of leakage in the convertible-top
Optional add-on parts or parts that project beyond The service life and appearance of the convertible covering or at its seams and folds, use a
the contours of the vehicle may be damaged by convertible-top care product.
f
top depend largely on expert care and operation.
design features of car washes. Please observe the information on the
Incorrect care and operation can damage the
The following parts are particularly at risk: containers.
convertible top or cause it to leak.
– Convertible top (hot wax treatment must not We recommend Porsche convertible-top care
Never remove snow and ice with sharp-edged
product.
f
be used, as the wax attacks the convertible objects.
top material), Remove bird excrement immediately. The acid
– Windshield wipers and rear wiper (always Cleaning the convertible top this contains makes the rubber swell and the
convertible top will leak.
f
switch them off – wiper stalk in position 0 – NOTICE
to prevent them wiping unintentionally in Open the convertible top only when completely
intermittent or sensor operation). Risk of damage to the convertible top due to dry, otherwise damp stains and abrasion
the cleaning jet of the high-pressure cleaning marks may occur which cannot be removed.
f
– Exterior mirrors (always fold in).
equipment or hot wax treatment. Attempt to remove spots from the convertible-
f Do not clean the convertible top with high-
– External antenna (always unscrew).
– Roof transport system (always remove top covering by rubbing carefully with a soft
pressure cleaning equipment. rubber sponge.
f Do not use hot wax treatment.
completely).
– Spoilers.
– Wheels (the wider the rim and the lower the tire Do not wash the convertible top every time you
height, the greater the risk of damage). wash the vehicle.
– High-gloss or silk-gloss wheels (to prevent Normally, rinsing the convertible top with clean
these from getting scratched, do not clean water is sufficient.
with the wheel-cleaning brushes of the car f Brush dust off the convertible top in the
wash).
f Please consult the operator before using
direction of the weave using a soft brush.
f Only in the case of heavy soiling, wet the
automatic car washes.
f All parts not reached by a car wash, such as
convertible top with lukewarm water and
a wash-shampoo & convertible-top cleaner and
door and lid seams or door sills, must be rub gently using a sponge or soft brush.
washed and polished by hand. Rinse off wash-shampoo & convertible-top
cleaner thoroughly from the convertible top
Information with clean water.
We recommend Porsche wash-shampoo.
f After washing, treat the convertible top at least
Automatic car washes spray water at odd angles
and high pressures, which are not seen in normal
driving. Therefore, water can sometimes find its once a year with a convertible-top care
way into the passengers compartment during or product.
shortly after the car wash. Do not allow the convertible-top care product
to come into contact with paint or glass.
If it does, remove immediately.

Paint care Polishing Cleaning windows

In order to protect the paint on your vehicle in the Only when the original shine can no longer be f Clean all windows regularly, inside and out,
best possible way against mechanical and obtained using preservatives should paint polish with window cleaner.
chemical damage, you should be used to clean the paint. We recommend Porsche window cleaner.
– preserve it regularly, We recommend Porsche paint polish. f Do not use the same chamois for painted
– polish it if necessary, Removing spots and stains surfaces and for drying the windows.
f Remove tar spatters, traces of oil, insects etc.
– remove spots and stains, and Preservative residues could reduce
– repair damaged paintwork. transparency.
f Do not apply care products containing silicone f Remove insect residues with insect remover.
as soon as possible using an insect remover,
as they discolor the paint if left to work on it
to the windows.
over time.
f Wash the treated areas carefully afterwards. Information
Information The door windows have a water-repellent
f Never rub a dusty vehicle with a dry cloth,
Repairing minor paint damage
f Have minor paint damage (cracks, scratches
(hydrophobic) coating, which prevents soiling of
because the grains of dirt will damage the the windows.
or stone damage) repaired immediately
paintwork. This coating is subject to natural wear and can be
f Do not treat matt-painted components with
before corrosion begins.
renewed.
Please contact an authorized Porsche dealer.
preservatives or polishes as these remove the
matt effect. If traces of corrosion have already formed, these
must be thoroughly removed. An anti-corrosion
Care of windshield wiper blades
Preservation primer must then be applied to these spots,
followed by top-coat paint. Windshield wiper blades that are in perfect
The paint surface becomes dull over time due to condition are vital for a clear view.
f Please see the chapter “WIPER BLADES”
Paint data can be found on the vehicle data
weathering.
f Preserve paint regularly. carrier.
f Please see the chapter “VEHICLE
on page 224.
f Apply paint preservative after washing the
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER” on page 284.
vehicle and polish it smooth to preserve the
paintwork.
This keeps the paint shiny and elastic. Dirt is
prevented from adhering to the paint surface and
industrial dust is prevented from penetrating the
paint.

Repairing the underbody protection f Always apply a fresh coating of suitable f Never use other chemical cleaners or
preservative to unprotect areas after cleaning solvents.
f Rinse cleaned surfaces with clear water.
The underside of your car is durably protected
against chemical and mechanical influences. the underside of the body, the transmission,
the engine or carrying out repairs to under-
As it is not possible to exclude the risk of damage
to this protective coating in day to day driving, it body, engine or transmission components. Alloy wheels
is advisable to have the underside of the car Effective rust-proofing is particularly important Metal particles (e.g. brass or copper in brake
inspected at certain intervals - preferably before during the cold weather season. If your car is dust) must not remain too long on alloy wheels.
the start of winter and again in spring - and the driven frequently in areas where salt has been Contact corrosion can cause pitting.
undercoating restored as necessary. spread on the roads, the whole engine
compartment should be cleaned thoroughly after
Your authorized Porsche dealer is familiar with the Information
the winter to prevent salt from causing any lasting
bodyseal treatment procedures and has the Cleaners with an oxide-removing effect or wrong
damage. A full under-body wash should also be
necessary equipment for applying factory pH value, as are commonly used for other metals,
performed at the same time.
approved materials. We recommend that you as well as mechanical tools and products, will
entrust them with such work and inspections. Cleaning headlights, lights, interior and damage the oxide layer and are therefore
Unlike conventional spray oils, undercoating and exterior plastic components, adhesive unsuitable.
rust-proofing compounds based on bitumen or foils, reversing camera and radar sensor f Use only cleaners for alloy wheels
wax do not attack the sound-proofing materials for adaptive cruise control (pH value 9.5). Products with the wrong
applied at the factory. Observe the following points: pH value can destroy the protective layer
h WARNING
f Use only clean water and a little dishwashing on the wheels.
Exhaust System Fire
liquid or interior window cleaner to clean We recommend Porsche cleaner for alloy rims.
f If possible, wash the wheels every two weeks
Risk
headlights, lights, plastic components and
The exhaust system becomes very hot when the surfaces. with a sponge or washing brush. If the wheels
engine is running. Flammable material close to the Use a soft sponge or a soft, lint-free cloth. are exposed to road salt, grit or industrial dust,
exhaust system could ignite. Additional f Do not spray water or interior window cleaner weekly cleaning is necessary.
undercoating or rust protection agents on or near directly onto the plastic components in the f Every three months, after cleaning, grease the
the exhaust system can become too hot when passenger compartment, but first onto a wheels with car wax or an acid-free grease
driving and ignite.
f Do not apply additional undercoating or rust-
sponge or cloth. Cleaning agents may, for (e.g. Vaseline).
example, enter controls or switches and cause Rub the grease in well with a soft cloth.
proofing on or near the exhaust manifold, damage. f Please see the chapter “CLEANING IN CAR
exhaust pipes, catalytic converters or heat WASHES” on page 233.
shields. During driving the substance used for
undercoating could overheat and ignite. Information
f Before applying fresh underseal, carefully

An interior window cleaner can also be used to
clean plastic surfaces (always read the cleaning
remove deposits or dirt and grease. Once it
instructions on the container).
has dried, the new undercoating compound
We recommend Porsche interior window cleaner.
forms a tough protective coating which
f Gently wipe the surface without applying too
provides efficient rust-proofing of the floor
much pressure.
panels and components.
f Do not clean when dry.
h WARNING Leather care Seats with seat ventilation

Cleaning Agents on
Brake Disks The natural surface markings of leather, Care instructions for water or moisture
If cleaning agents (e.g. wheel cleaning agents) e.g. creases, healed scars, insect sting marks, stains.
come into contact with the brake disks, the structural differences and slight variations in Rain water or moisture can stain the perforated
resulting film on the brake disks can impair shade and grain add to the attractiveness of the leather.
braking performance. high-quality natural leather product.
f Make sure that no cleaning agent comes into Observe the following care instructions: Removing water and moisture stains
Preconditions:
contact with the brake disks.
f If cleaning agent has come into contact with
NOTICE – Seat heating and seat ventilation must be
The leather will be damaged by the use of switched off.
the brake disks, clean the brake disks
unsuitable cleaning and care agents and by – No direct sunlight.
thoroughly with a strong jet of water.
f Paying attention to any road users behind you, inappropriate treatment. – Do not use leather cleaners or care products
f Do not use caustic cleaners or hard cleaning to remove water and moisture stains.
f Blot the entire seat or backrest surface using
dry the brake disks by applying the brakes.
objects!
Stainless steel tailpipes f Make sure that perforated leather does not get a clean, absorbent sponge and distilled water.
wet on its reverse side. Make sure that the perforated leather does not
f Remove water drops from the leather without
Stainless steel tailpipes can discolor due to get wet on its reverse side.
soiling, strong heat and combustion residues.
delay. f Allow the seat covering to dry completely at
The original shine can be achieved again using
f Clean all types of leather regularly to remove
room temperature out of direct sunlight.
commercially available metal luster paste or Do not dry the seat covering by switching on
metal polish. fine dust using a soft, damp, white woolen the seat heating and seat ventilation.
Cleaning door, roof, lid and window seals
cloth or a commercially available microfiber f Once dry, wipe the seat covering with a dry,
cloth.
f Remove heavy contamination (not water or
lint-free cloth.
NOTICE
moisture stains) with a leather cleaner. Cleaning carpet, floor mats
The lubricant coating on the inner door seals may
Always read the instructions for use given on f Use a vacuum cleaner or a brush (not too soft)
be damaged by unsuitable cleaning and care for cleaning.
the containers.
agents. f Heavy dirt and stains can be removed with
f Do not use any chemical cleaning agents or
We recommend Porsche leather care liquid.
f Treat cleaned leather only with a leather care a stain remover.
solvents.
f Do not use any preservative agents.
product. We recommend Porsche stain remover.
We recommend Porsche leather care liquid. To protect carpets, the Porsche range of
f Wash dirt (e.g. abrasion, dust, road salts) from accessories includes mats of the correct size and
all seals regularly using warm soapy water. with the appropriate fastening.
f If there is a risk of frost, protect the outer door
seals and the lid and flap seals against freezing
into place with a suitable care product.

h WARNING Obstructed Pedals Alcantara® care Storing your Porsche

Do not use leather care products to clean If you intend to store your Porsche for a prolonged
Improperly secured floor mats can obstruct pedal
Alcantara®. Alcantara® is a manufactured period, please consult your authorized Porsche
travel.
f Always check the movement of the pedals
product. It is not genuine leather or suede. dealer. The staff will be glad to advise you on the
For regular care, it is sufficient to clean the cover most suitable and necessary methods.
f Clean your vehicle thoroughly inside and
before driving and make sure that they are not
with a soft brush.
obstructed by a floor mat or any other object.
f Secure the floor mat to prevent it from sliding Strong abrasion or rubbing when cleaning will outside.
produce a lasting change to the surface. The under carriage and chassis components
into positions that could interfere with the safe
should be free of dirt and salt deposits.
f Fill up the fuel tank.
operation of your vehicle – do not lay them Cleaning when lightly soiled
loosely in the vehicle. f Wet a soft cloth with water or a neutral soap f Change the oil and oil filter, and run the engine
Your authorized Porsche dealer will be glad to solution and wipe off the dirt. for several minutes.
f Increase the tire pressure to 50 psi/3.5 bar/
offer you floor mats of correct size including a
securing possibility. Cleaning when heavily soiled
f Wet a soft cloth with lukewarm water or 350 kPa.
It is not recommended to lift the vehicle, due to
Cleaning airbag covers thinned white spirit and dab the dirt from the
the possibility of corrosion on shock absorber
outside in.
h DANGER Vehicle Interior piston shafts.
Modifications Cleaning the safety belts The vehicle should be moved slightly,
f Use mild detergent to clean soiled belts. approximately every four weeks, to prevent flat
f
Incorrect modifications may damage the airbag
When drying, avoid direct sunlight. spot on the tires.
f
system. The airbag may not deploy properly in the
Only use suitable cleaning agents.
f
event of an accident. Climate control
f Do not make any modifications whatsoever to Do not tint or bleach the belts.
The air conditioning system should be in good
individual components, such as the padded The belt fabric could be weakened, thus
working condition and fully charged.
covers on the steering wheel, the instrument affecting safety.
Windshield/Headlight washer
panel, the underside of the instrument panel,
front seats and door panels. f Check and correct antifreeze/cleaning solution
f Have your authorized Porsche dealer to clean level as necessary.
these components.
Cleaning fabric linings

f Fabric linings on pillars, roofliner and sun
blinds, etc. must be cleaned only using
suitable cleaning agents or a suitable dry foam
and a soft brush.

Electrical system
f Remove the battery from the vehicle and store
it in a cool dry place, not on a cement floor.
When the battery is disconnected, the
alarm system is deactivated.
f Recharge the battery every 3 months. If the
battery remains in the vehicle with the cables
connected, it is necessary to check, remove
and recharge the battery every 2-3 weeks.
Do not fast charge the battery.
f Please see the chapter “BATTERY (12 VOLT)”
on page 271.
Vehicle interior
The interior must be dry, especially in the area of
the floor carpets. The use of drying agents (Silica-
Gel) is recommended in vehicles with leather
interior and in areas with high humidity. The
recommended amount is 3 fabric bags of 1.1 lbs.
(500 grams) each placed on the floor carpets.
Windows, doors and lids must be closed. The air
vents should be opened.

Minor Repairs
Exercise Extreme Caution when
Working on your vehicle .............................. 240
Checking the Coolant Level and
Adding Coolant .......................................... 242
Brake Fluid ................................................ 243
Electromechanical Power Steering............... 244
Changing Air Cleaner .................................. 244
Changing Particle Filters ............................. 244
Tires and Wheels........................................ 244
Changing Wheels........................................ 254
Wheel Attachment Faces............................. 257
Wheel Bolts................................................ 257
Wheels with Central Lock ............................ 258
Central Bolts.............................................. 258
Changing a Wheel....................................... 258
Rim Cleaner ............................................... 263
Central Bolt Emergency Fastening ............... 263
Flat Tire..................................................... 265
Electrical System ....................................... 267
Battery (12 volt) ......................................... 271
External Power Supply, Emergency
starting with jumper cables ......................... 273
Changing Car Key (Remote Control) Battery . 275
Replacing bulbs.......................................... 276
Headlights ................................................. 276
Headlight Adjustment.................................. 277
Towing ...................................................... 278
Fire extinguisher......................................... 282
Minor Repairs 239

Exercise Extreme Caution when h WARNING

f Take care when working near hot parts of the
Fluid Health Hazards
vehicle, in particular engine parts and parts of
Working on your vehicle Refill fluids, e. g. engine oil, brake fluid or coolant the exhaust system.
The engine compartment of any motor vehicle is a are hazardous to health (poisonous, irritant, f Before working in the engine compartment,
potentially hazardous area. If you are not fully caustic). always switch the engine off and let it cool
familiar with proper repair procedures, do not f Keep these fluids out of children's reach and sufficiently.
attempt the adjustments described on the dispose of them in accordance with the f Allow the engine to cool down before opening
following pages. appropriate regulations. the cap of the coolant reservoir and protect
This caution applies to the entire vehicle. f Only work on your vehicle outdoors or in a well your hands, arms and face from any possible
ventilated area.
h DANGER Fire and Explosion escape of hot coolant.
Hazards
h WARNING Exhaust Gas Inhalation h WARNING Moving Engine Parts
Many vehicle fluids are highly flammable, e. g.
fuel, engine and transmission oil. Fuel vapors can Engine exhaust is dangerous if inhaled. Take great care to ensure that hands, fingers,
cause an explosion. When a battery is being Engine exhaust fumes have many components articles of clothing (e. g. ties, sleeves, etc.),
charged, highly explosive gases can develop. which you can smell. They also contain carbon necklaces or long hair cannot be caught up by the
f Do not smoke or allow an open flame around monoxide (CO), which is a colorless and odorless radiator fans, drive belt or other moving parts.
the battery or fuel. gas. The radiator fans in the front of the vehicle may be
Pay attention to sparks, e. g. when coming into Carbon monoxide can cause unconsciousness operating or unexpectedly start operating when
contact with cables. and even death if inhaled.
f Only work on your vehicle outdoors or in a well
the engine is switched on.
Keep a fire extinguisher close at hand. f Exercise extreme care that parts of the body,
f Ensure that there are no open flames in the ventilated area. articles of clothing or jewelry do not get caught
area of your vehicle at any time when fuel in the radiator fan, drive belt or other moving
fumes might be present. Be especially h WARNING Hot Engine Parts, parts.
cautious of devices such as hot water heaters Exhaust System and f Carry out work in these areas only with the
which ignite a flame intermittently. Fluids engine off and exercise extreme caution.
f Only work on your vehicle outdoors or in a well The engine and surroundings components, the
ventilated area. exhaust system and coolant become very hot h WARNING Electric Shock from
when the engine is running. Ignition System
The coolant reservoir is pressurized. Careless When the ignition is on, all cables and wires of the
opening of the coolant reservoir can lead to hot ignition system carry a high voltage.
coolant suddenly spraying out. f Exercise special care when working on the
ignition system.
240 Minor Repairs

h WARNING Failure to Secure Vehicle Measurements on test stands

Information Performance test
If the vehicle is not secured, or incorrectly f Incomplete or improper servicing may cause Performance tests on roller-type test stands are
secured, during repair work, it could move problems in the operation of the car. If in doubt
unexpectedly or fall from the car jack or car lift. not approved by Porsche.
f Be alert and cautious around the engine at all
about any servicing, have it done by your
authorized Porsche dealer. Brake tests
times while it is running. Improper maintenance during the warranty Brake tests must be performed only on roller-type
If you have to work on the engine while it is period may affect your Porsche warranty test stands.
running, always apply the electric parking coverage. The following limit values must not be exceeded
brake and put the PDK selector lever in f Some countries require additional tools and on roller-type test stands:
position P or N.
f Always support your car with safety stands if it
special spare parts to be carried in your – Test speed 4.7 mph (7.5 km/h)
vehicle. Please make enquiries before driving – Test duration 20 seconds
is necessary to work under the car. The jack abroad.
supplied with the car is not adequate for this Testing the electric parking brake
purpose. Electric parking brake tests on the brake test
h WARNING
T
Radiator Fans, Engine

Switch off level control of air suspension and stand must only be performed with the ignition
Compartment Blowers
height adjustment. switched on and the Porsche Doppelkupplung
Please see the chapter “RAISING THE VEHICLE The engine-compartment blowers are mounted selector lever in position N.
WITH A LIFTING PLATFORM, TROLLEY JACK under the engine compartment lid. The vehicle switches automatically to brake test
OR STANDARD JACK” on page 254. After the engine is switched off, the engine stand mode, in which the electric parking brake
f Jack up the vehicle only at the specified compartment temperature is monitored for can be tested.
jacking points on the underside of the vehicle. approx. 30 minutes. The message “Electric parking brake in
f Never start the engine when the vehicle is During this period, and depending on service mode” appears on the multi-function
jacked or lifted up. Vibration from the engine temperature, the engine-compartment blowers display in the instrument panel.
could cause the vehicle to fall. may continue to run or start to run.
f When working under the car without safety f Carry out work in this area only with the engine Balancing wheels on the vehicle
stands but with the wheels on the ground, off and exercise extreme caution. During finish balancing of the wheels, the entire
make sure the car is on level ground, the The radiators and radiator fans are in the front of vehicle must be lifted and the wheels must be free
wheels are blocked, and that the engine the vehicle. to turn.
cannot be started. The radiator fans in the front of the vehicle may be
Withdraw ignition keys (switch ignition off in operating or unexpectedly start operating when Information
vehicles that have Porsche Entry & Drive). the engine is switched on.
f Carry out work in these areas only with the
The tools required for changing a wheel (e.g. jack,
wheel bolt wrench, assembly aids) are not
engine switched off.
f Take great care to ensure that parts of the
supplied as standard with the vehicle. Your
authorized Porsche dealer will be pleased to
body, items of clothing or jewelery cannot be
advise you.
drawn in by the radiator fan, engine-
compartment blower, drive belt or other
moving parts.
Minor Repairs 241

Checking the Coolant Level and

Adding Coolant
The coolant provides year-round protection from
corrosion and freezing down to –31 °F (–35 °C)
(–40 °F (–40 °C) in Nordic countries). Regular
checking of the coolant level is part of servicing.
The coolant level only needs to be checked when
a warning message appears on the multi-function
display in the instrument panel.
on page 129.
f Use only antifreeze authorized by Porsche.
h DANGER Swallowing Engine
Coolant
Coolant is hazardous to health. Coolant can be
deadly to children or pets if consumed. Coupé Cabriolet
f Keep coolant out of children's reach. Checking the coolant level when a warning 3. Top up with coolant if necessary.
f Also, keep coolant away from your pets. They message appears on the multi-function display in Only add a mixture of antifreeze and distilled
can be attracted to it should there be a spill, or the instrument panel: water in equal parts.
to used coolant left in an open container. 1. If the engine is hot, cover the reservoir cap Antifreeze in coolant:
with a cloth. 50 % provides antifreeze protection down
h WARNING Hot Engine Coolant Open cap carefully and allow any overpressure to –31 °F (–35 °C).
to escape. The maximum fill level is reached when the
The coolant becomes very hot when the engine is
Then unscrew cap completely. red display is at the max marking.
running and can burn you.
2. Read off the engine coolant level. Do not exceed the Max marking.
The coolant reservoir is pressurized. Careless
When the engine is cold and the vehicle is 4. Screw the cap on the reservoir closed until
opening of the coolant reservoir can lead to hot
level, the red display (ball) must be within the it locks securely.
coolant suddenly spraying out.
f Do not open the cap on the reservoir when the
area of the arrow between the min and max 5. Have the cooling system checked.
markings. Please contact an authorized Porsche dealer.
engine is hot.
f Allow the engine to cool down before opening
the cap and protect your hands, arms and face
from any possible escape of hot coolant.
242 Minor Repairs

h DANGER Swallowing Brake Fluid

Information
If pure water is added in an emergency, the mixing Brake fluid is hazardous to your health, and may
be fatal if swallowed.
f Keep brake fluid out of children's reach.
ratio will have to be corrected.
f If brake fluid gets into your eye, immediately

A significant loss of coolant indicates a leak in the
cooling system.
f The cause must be eliminated without delay. rinse with clean water for a few minutes. Then
see a doctor immediately.
f Please note all the information on the refill
Engine-compartment container of the brake fluid.

h WARNING
blowers or other moving
parts in the area of the NOTICE
engine
Brake fluid attacks and can damage paintwork.
Hands, fingers, items of clothing (ties, sleeves, f Immediately rinse off spilled brake fluid with
etc.), necklaces or long hair can be drawn in by clean water.
moving parts, e.g. the engine-compartment
blowers, drive belt, etc., when working in the Changing brake fluid
engine compartment.
Brake Fluid Brake fluid absorbs moisture from the air over
The engine-compartment blowers are mounted time. The absorbed water can impair braking
under the engine compartment lid. Regular checking of the brake fluid is part of
efficiency.
After the engine is switched off, the engine servicing.
f It is important therefore to have the brake fluid
compartment temperature is monitored for The fluid level should always be between the changed in accordance with the change
approx. 30 minutes. MIN and MAX markings. intervals specified in the “Maintenance”
During this period, and depending on A slight decrease in the fluid level due to wear and booklet.
temperature, the engine-compartment blowers automatic readjustment of the disk brakes is f Use only brake fluid authorized by Porsche.
may continue to run or start to run. normal.
f Carry out work in this area only with the engine However, if the fluid level falls significantly or goes Brake warning light USA
off and exercise extreme caution. below the MIN marking, the brake system may Brake warning light Canada
have developed a leak.
f Have the brake system checked immediately.
Hot engine parts The warning light on the instrument panel and the
h WARNING
warning message on the multi-function display
Please contact an authorized Porsche dealer. alert you to the fact that the brake fluid level is too
The engine and adjacent components become
very hot when the engine is running. low and could indicate brake circuit failure if the
f Exercise extreme caution when working in the pedal travel is greater than normal.
engine compartment.
Minor Repairs 243

Changing Particle Filters Tires and Wheels

Information
Regular replacement of the filters is part of The original equipment tires and wheel rims on
If the warning light and warning message appear servicing. your Porsche comply with all applicable Federal
when driving:
f Stop immediately in a suitable place.
Dirty filters can be the cause of reduced air Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
f Do not continue driving.

throughput, e.g. the windows can mist up.
f Have the filters replaced. Information
For information on warning messages on the multi- The summer tires of your Sports Car have been
function display: specially developed and adapted for high
f Please see the chapter “OVERVIEW OF Information performance.
WARNING AND INFORMATION MESSAGES” The particle filters ensure that the fresh air The tire characteristics change at low outside
on page 129. entering the passenger compartment is virtually temperatures (below 15 °C).
free of dust and pollen. This can result in noises when parking or
f If the outside air is polluted by exhaust fumes, maneuvering at low outside temperatures.
Electromechanical Power Steering press the recirculated-air button.
h WARNING
No Power Steering For your safety remember the following:
Assist
– Wheel rims and wheel bolts are matched to fit
When the engine is stopped (e.g. when on tow), your Porsche.
no power steering assistance is available. – If you intend to use other than original
Increased force is required for steering.
f Exercise extreme care when your vehicle is
equipment wheels, be sure that they conform
to Porsche specifications for your model. Only
being towed.
f Have the fault corrected. Please contact an
tires with the same make and with the same
specification code (e.g. “N0”, “N1”...) can be
authorized Porsche dealer. mounted.
– The use of wheel rims and wheel bolts that do
Changing Air Cleaner not meet specifications of the original factory
Regular replacement of the filter element is part of installed equipment will affect the safe
servicing. operation of your vehicle and affect warranty
f In dusty conditions, clean the filter element coverage.
more frequently and replace it if necessary. – Before you plan on exchanging wheels, or
f Please see the chapter “MEASUREMENTS ON snow tires already mounted on the wheel rims,
TEST STANDS” on page 241. consult your authorized Porsche dealer.
Your dealer has the technical information
necessary to advise you which wheel rims and
wheel bolts are compatible with the original
factory installations.
244 Minor Repairs

h DANGER
Traction AA, A, B, C
Tire Damage While
Driving The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C and they represent the tire's ability
Driving with damaged tires could cause you to
to stop on wet pavement as measured under
lose control of the vehicle.
f If while driving, your vehicle experiences a
controlled conditions on specified government
test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
sudden vibration or ride disturbance, and/or
marked C may have poor traction performance.
you suspect that possible damage to your tires
or vehicle has occurred, you should
immediately reduce your speed without Information
excessive use of the brakes. The traction grade assigned to this is based on
f Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, and braking (straight-ahead) traction tests and does
inspect the tires. not include cornering (turned) traction,
If you cannot determine the cause for the acceleration, hydroplaning or peak traction
disturbance, have your vehicle towed to the characteristics.
nearest Porsche or tire dealer to have your
vehicle or tire(s) inspected. Temperature A, B, C
f Continuing to operate the vehicle without The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and
correction could result in a loss of control. Example
C, representing the tire's resistance to the
Uniform Tire Quality Grading generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
Quality grades can be found where applicable on when tested under controlled conditions on a
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
maximum section width. Sustained high temperatures can cause the
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire
Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure.
Treadwear
The grade C corresponds to a level of
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating performance which all passenger car tires must
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
under controlled conditions on a specific Standard No. 109.
government test course. For example, a tire Grades B and A represent higher levels of
graded 150 would wear one and a half (1-1/2) performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
times as well on the government course as a tire minimum required by law.
graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
Minor Repairs 245

h WARNING
f Use only plastic valve caps. For further information on the tire pressure
f For safety reasons, don't use tire inflating
Tire Abuse
monitoring:
The temperature grade for this tire is established bottles. f Please see the chapter “TIRE PRESSURE
f Please see the chapter “TIRE PRESSURE FOR
for a tire that is properly inflated and not MENU (TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or SYSTEM, TPMS)” on page 105.
excessive loading, either separately or in COLD TIRES (68 °F/ 20 °C)” on page 287.
When tires are warm, the tire pressure is
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should
increased.
f Never let air out of hot tires. This could cause
tire failure. be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the
f Do not exceed the permitted maximum speed inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle the tire pressure to fall below the prescribed
for the tires fitted to the vehicle. manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire
f Ensure that the tires are set to the correct
value.
inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of
Insufficient tire pressure can cause tires to over-
inflation pressure. a different size than the size indicated on the
f Observe the maximum load for the vehicle.
heat and thus be damaged – even invisibly. Hidden
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you tire damage is not eliminated by subsequently
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure correcting the tire pressure.
Tire pressures for those tires.)
Overloading
h DANGER Low Tire Pressure As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System h DANGER Overloading Tires
Driving the vehicle with low tire pressure increases (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale
risk of a tire failure and resulting loss of control. Overloading can lead to dangerous vehicle
when one or more of your tires is significantly
Furthermore, low tire pressure increases rate of reactions and long braking distances.
f Do not overload your vehicle. Be careful about
under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire
wear of the affected tires and causes damage. pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and
f Always use an accurate tire pressure gauge the roof load.
f If you plan to load the vehicle, first correct the
check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
when checking inflation pressures. them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
f Do not exceed the maximum tire pressure significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
tire pressure. Tire pressure for loaded vehicle
listed on the tire sidewall. (Also refer to can be found on the tire pressure plate and in
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-
“Technical data”). the chapter technical data.
f Never exceed the specified axle load.
inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread
f Please see the chapter “TIRE PRESSURE life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
PLATE” on page 247. stopping ability.
f Cold tire inflation pressure means: all tires Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
must be cold, ambient temperature maximum proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
68 °F (20 °C), when adjusting the inflation responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
pressure. Avoid sunlight striking the tires even if under-inflation has not reached the level to
before measuring cold pressures, since the trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
pressures would rise from temperature tell-tale.
influence.
f Valve caps protect the valve from dust and dirt,
and thus from leakage. Always screw caps
tightly down. Replace missing caps
immediately.
246 Minor Repairs

NOTICE
Risk of damage to the vehicle and to the tires.
Damage due to overloading is not covered by the
vehicle warranty.
Tire damage may also be caused by overloading,
and this damage is not covered by your tire
warranty.
f Do not overload your vehicle. Be careful about
the roof load.
f If you plan to load the vehicle, first correct the
tire pressure. Tire pressure for loaded vehicle
can be found on the tire pressure plate and in
the chapter technical data.
f Never exceed the specified axle load.
f Please see the chapter “LOADING
INFORMATION” on page 204.
Example of a tire pressure plate C Original tire size
Tire Pressure plate Size of tires mounted at the factory.
D Recommended cold tire inflation pressure
Information on the tire pressure plate
These values are for cold tires (68 °F/20 °C).
A Seating capacity
Maximum number of vehicle occupants, including Tire traction
the driver. h WARNING Hydroplaning
B Vehicle load limit
Is the maximum total weight limit specified of the When driving on wet or slushy roads, a wedge of
load (passengers and cargo) for the vehicle. This water may build up between the tires and the road.
is the maximum weight of passengers and cargo This phenomenon is known as “hydroplane” and
that can be loaded into the vehicle. may cause partial or complete loss of traction,
vehicle control or stopping ability.
f Reduce speed on wet surfaces.
Please see the chapter “LOADING INFORMATION”
on page 204.
Minor Repairs 247

Tire life pressure and condition at least every two Tire damage, puncture
Tire life depends on various factors, i.e., road weeks. f Please see the chapter “HIGH-PRESSURE
surfaces, traffic and weather conditions, driving f If you notice that tires are wearing unevenly, CLEANING EQUIPMENT, STEAM CLEANERS”
habits, type of tires and tire care. consult your authorized Porsche dealer. on page 232.
f Inspect your tires for wear and damage before Uneven wear may not always be due to improper h DANGER Damaged Tire Check
driving off. If you notice uneven or substantial wheel alignment. It can be the result of individual
wear, wheels might need alignment or tires driving habits such as cornering at high speeds. If Driving the vehicle with low tire pressure increases
should be balanced or replaced. the tire pressure is not checked and adjusted risk of a tire failure and resulting loss of control.
regularly, abnormal tire wear can also occur. Furthermore, low tire pressure increases the rate
Tire wear of wear of the affected tires.
The original equipment tires on your Porsche have Tire care f Check tires – including sidewalls – regularly for
built-in tire wear indicators. They are molded into f Avoid damaging tires and wheel rims. foreign bodies, nicks, cuts, cracks and bulges.
the bottom of the tread grooves and will appear as f If you must drive over a curb or other obstacle, f After driving off road, examine tires for signs
approximately 1/2 in. (12 mm) bands when the drive slowly and at an obtuse angle. of damage such as cuts, tears, bulges or
tire tread depth is down to 1/16 of an in (1.6 mm). f Check tires for uneven wear and damage foreign objects stuck in the tread. Replace a
When the indicators appear in two or more before driving off. damaged tire if necessary.
adjacent grooves, it is time to replace the tires. f Remove embedded material. f Cross curb edges slowly and at right angles if
We recommend, however, that you do not let the f Replace worn or damaged tires immediately. possible.
tires wear down to this extent. f Keep oil, fuel, brake fluid, etc. away from tires. Avoid driving over steep or sharp curbs.
Worn tires cannot grip the road surface properly f Replace missing valve stem caps. f In cases of doubt, have the wheel (particularly
and are even less effective on wet roads. f Keep tires inflated correctly. the inner side) checked by an authorized
In the United States, state laws may govern the f Wash tires when washing the vehicle. Also Porsche dealer.
minimum tread depth permissible. Follow all such clean inner side of wheels.
laws. f Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing In case of tire damage, where it is uncertain
the wheels. whether there is a break in the ply with all its
h DANGER Excessively-worn Tires
f Check wheel rims for corrosion. consequences or tire damage caused by thermal
Driving on worn tires can result in loss of control f Remove road salt, if driving in winter. or mechanical overloading due to loss of pressure
of the vehicle and could cause serious personal or any other prior damage, we recommend that
injuries or death. the tire be replaced for safety reasons.
f Do not drive with worn tires or tires showing If one faulty tire is replaced it should be noted that
cuts or bruises as they may lead to sudden the difference in tread depth on one axle must not
deflation and loss of control which could cause exceed 30%. Handling inconsistencies may result.
severe personal injury. f Recommendation: Replace both tires on one
f Specialized high performance tires on high axle so that no handling inconsistencies may
performance sports cars exhibit more wear result due to different tread depths.
than those on a family sedan, or even a high f Perform a visual inspection if necessary.
performance sedan.
Therefore, it is important to check your tire
248 Minor Repairs

Tire replacements If new tires are installed only on one axle, a Parking at the curb
f Use only tire makes and types tested by noticeable change in handling occurs due to the
h DANGER
different tread depth of the other tires. This Curb Impact / Tire
Porsche.
happens especially if only rear tires are replaced. Damage
If you do not use a Porsche recommended
However, this condition disappears as the new Hard impacts against curbs (or traffic islands) are
replacement tire, make sure that you
tires are broken in. dangerous and may cause hidden tire damage
f Please adjust your driving style accordingly.
purchase your new tires from a reputable tire
which is not noticeable until later. Such damage
dealer and that the dealer complies with all
Installation of new tires should only be done by a can result in accidents at high speeds. Depending
manufacturers warnings for those tires.
qualified tire technician. on the force of impact, the edge of the rim can
Only tires with the same manufacturer and
also be damaged.
f After such an impact, have the wheel checked
with the same specification code (e.g. “N0”, Valves
“N1”…) should be mounted on the vehicle. f Use only plastic valve caps.
f Please read the fitting and replacement
by an expert.
Before mounting new tires, check with your f If you must drive over a curb or other obstacle,
Porsche dealer about the current release instructions regarding metal valves.
f Use original Porsche metal valves only.
drive slowly and at an obtuse angle.
status.
f Valve inserts with valve caps protect against
Exercise care when parking along curbs.
Use tires with “ZR” quality standards. There
are currently no standards concerning tire soiling.
strength at speeds above 150 mph (240 km/h). Soiled valve inserts can cause a gradual loss Information
Tires should be replaced no less than on one axle of air. Tire repairs are not permissible under any
at the time. Only tires of the same make and type circumstances.
must be used. Mixed tires are not permissible and
will affect vehicle performance, safety, and can
affect vehicle warranty.
Porsche dealers can recommend the most current
replacement tire options for your vehicle.
Initially, new tires do not have their full traction.
You should therefore drive at moderate speeds
during the first 60 - 120 miles (100 - 200 km).
Tires must always remain on the same side
of the vehicle.
When wheels are removed, the direction of
rotation and position of each wheel should be
marked.
Minor Repairs 249

Wheel alignment, wheel balancing Wheels with Tire Pressure Monitoring Example
As a precaution, have wheels with summer tires System (TPMS) sensors FR (front right), FL, RR and RL.
balanced in the spring, and those with mud and Before changing wheels, make sure that the Wheels must always be fitted in accordance with
snow tires before winter. Unbalanced wheels may wheels are compatible with your vehicle’s TPMS. their marking.
affect car handling and tire life. f Check this with your authorized Porsche The perception that tire durability and
Only the specified weights may be used for wheel dealer. performance are not affected by storage and age
balancing. is unfounded.
Removing and storing tires
f After changing, adjust tire pressure and torque
Self-adhesive weights must not come into contact Chemical additives, which make the rubber
with cleaning agents, since they could drop off. elastic, lose their effectiveness over the course of
Uneven tread wear indicates wheel imbalance. In wheel bolts diagonally. time and the rubber becomes brittle and cracks.
this event, the vehicle should be checked at an Please see the chapter “CHANGING WHEELS”
Therefore, the tires should be inspected from
on page 254.
f Store tires in a cool and dry place. Rotate
authorized Porsche dealer. time to time.
h DANGER High-Speed tire periodically to avoid flat spots.
Vibration f Do not store summer tires or park vehicles Information
If, during a trip, uneven running or vibrations occur fitted with summer tires at ambient Under no circumstances should tires older than
temperatures below 5 °F (-15 °C). 6 years be used on your Porsche.
f Avoid contact with fuel, oil and grease.
that could be caused by damage to tires or the
car, the speed must be reduced immediately, but The age of the tire can be obtained from the “DOT”
without braking sharply. If you continue your trip Tires must always remain on the same side code number. If, for example, the last four
without having the cause of the fault remedied, of the vehicle. numbers read 1213, then the tire was produced in
you might lose control of your vehicle. When wheels are removed, the direction of the 12th week of 2013.
f Stop the vehicle and check the tires. rotation and position of each wheel should be
f If no cause for the fault can be found, drive marked. Snow tires
carefully to the nearest authorized Porsche The installation of Porsche approved snow tires is
dealer. recommended.
The summer tires of your Sports Car have been Use Porsche approved snow tires for grip on snow
specially developed and adapted for high and ice. Summer performance tires are not
performance. At low outside temperatures suitable for usage in cold, snowy, or icy
(<15°C (60°F)), the tire characteristics change. conditions.
This can result in noises occurring when parking Check with your local Motor Vehicle Bureau for
or maneuvering at low outside temperatures. possible restrictions.
250 Minor Repairs

h WARNING
Wheel change
f When wheels are removed, mark the direction
Snow Tire Use
Information
The standard tires profile and rubber mixture are We recommend that you fit snow tires on the of rotation and position of each wheel.
optimized for wet and dry driving conditions, and vehicle at temperatures below 45 °F (7 °C) since Example: FR (front right), FL, RR and RL.
may not prove favorable for snow conditions. f Always fit the wheels in accordance with the
f Install snow tires before driving in such
the driving performance of summer tires is
reduced at low temperatures and a lower level of markings.
conditions. comfort can also be expected. For example,
juddering noises caused by the tires can occur
Snow chains
NOTICE while maneuvering the vehicle or accelerating out NOTICE
Risk of insufficient road grip leading to loss of of bends on both dry and wet road surfaces.
Risk of damage to body, axle or brake
control and damage to the vehicle. Extremely low temperatures of below 5 °F (-15 °C)
components.
f Fit snow chains only to the rear wheels, and
The standard tires profile and rubber mixture are can cause permanent damage to summer tires.
optimized for wet and dry driving conditions, and Snow tires lose their suitability when their tread
only with the tire/rim combination listed in the
may not prove favorable for snow conditions. depth falls below 5/32 in. (4 mm).
f Install snow tires before driving in such
Technical Data.
Comply with all state and local laws f Use only the fine-link snow chains
conditions. governing snow tire and tread depth recommended and authorized by Porsche so
requirements. that sufficient clearance between the wheel
Before mounting snow tires, consult with your
well and the chain is assured.
f Please see the chapter “WHEELS, TIRES”
Porsche dealer. They have the technical
h DANGER Excessive Speed for
information necessary to advise you on wheel and
Tires on page 286.
f Follow instructions issued by the supplier of
tire compatibility.
f Snow tires should have the same load capacity Exceeding the maximum permitted speed for the
as original equipment tires and should be tires fitted could cause tire failure. the chains.
mounted on all four wheels. f Always check the maximum speed rating on
the tire sidewall on any tire on the vehicle.
h DANGER Tire Hazards f Never exceed the maximum speed rating of
Driving the vehicle with low tire pressure increases the tires.
risk of a tire failure and resulting loss of control.
Furthermore, low tire pressure increases the rate
of wear of the affected tires and causes damage.
Tires with badly worn treads are very dangerous
and could cause accidents.
f Make sure they are replaced immediately.
f Do not exceed the snow tire speed rating.
Snow tires do not have the same degree of
traction on dry, wet or snowfree roads as normal
tires. Furthermore, snow tires wear rapidly under
these conditions.
Minor Repairs 251

Fitting snow chains

f Before fitting chains, remove accumulated ice
and snow from the wheel well.
f Vehicles with snow chains must not be driven
faster than 30 mph (50 km/h).
Different states and countries have varying
statutory requirements regarding maximum
speed.
f Check with local authorities for possible
restrictions.
f Remove chains as soon as the roads are free
of ice and snow.
Example of Inscription
Inscription on radial tire – Y - Speed code letter

– XL (Extra Load) - Tire with increased load
A – Tire size
rating
Example: P 265/40ZR18 (101Y)
– P - The tire is designed for Passenger vehicle. B – TIN (Tire Identification Number)
This information is not included on all tires. Example: DOT xx xx xxxx xxxx
– 265 - Indication of tire width in mm – DOT
– 40 - Indication of tire height to tire width ratio The DOT symbol indicates that the tires
in percent comply with the requirements of the
– ZR - Belt type code letter for radial US Department of Transportation and provides
– 18 - Indication of rim diameter in inches information about:
– 101 - Load capacity coefficient – first two-digit code means manufacture’s
identification mark.
– second two-digit code means tire size.
252 Minor Repairs

– third four-digit code means tire type code. Speed code letters
– fourth four-digit code means date of The speed code letter Y indicates the maximum
manufacture. permitted speed for the tire.
If, for example, the last four numbers read This code letter is shown on the tire sidewall.
0211, the tire was produced in the 2nd week
of 2011. T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
H up to 131 mph (210 km/h)
C – Tire ply composition and material
V up to 150 mph (240 km/h)
The number of layers in the tread and sidewalls
and their material composition. W up to 167 mph (270 km/h)
Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
D – Maximum permissible inflation pressure
(Y) up to 186 mph (300 km/h) as for Y tires.
The maximum permissible cold inflation pressure
Speeds of more than 185 mph
to which a tire can be inflated.
f Do not exceed the permissible inflation (300 km/h) are also possible at a
maximum tire load capacity of 85 %
pressure.
(confirmation from tire manufacturer
E – Maximum Load rating required for speeds of more than
The maximum load in kilograms and pounds can 185 mph (300 km/h)).
G - Rim width in inches
be carried by the tire. If you replace tires always H - Rim-flange contour code letter
use a tire that has the same maximum load rating I - Symbol for drop-center rim
as the factory installed tire. Information J - Rim diameter in inches
K - Double hump
F – Radial Tires with a maximum speed rating that is lower L - Rim offset in mm
The identification indicates if the tire has radial than the specified maximum vehicle speed may be
structure. mounted only if they bear an M+S identification on Inscription on alloy wheels
the tire sidewall. The information is provided on the rear of the
G – Term of tubeless or tube tire f Please note that in addition to snow tires, spokes. The rim width in inches A and the rim
Identification for tubeless tires. all-season tires are also subject to speed limits offset F are visible from the outside. This
and bear this identification. information can be found near the tire valve.
f Never drive faster than the speed rating of the
tires, and obey all speed and traffic laws.
Minor Repairs 253

Changing Wheels
h DANGER Unsafe Stopping
Other vehicles could collide with your vehicle if you
are parked in a dangerous position.
f If you have a flat tire, move a safe distance off
the road. Turn the emergency flasher on and
use other warning devices to alert other
motorists.
f Do not remain in the car. Someone
approaching from the rear may not realize your
vehicle is stopped and cause a collision.
h WARNING Stopping Over Nearby

Flammable Matter
hot when the engine is running. The exhaust
Jacking point for lifting platform and jack at the front Jacking point for lifting platform and jack at the rear system remains hot for some time after the
Raising the vehicle with a lifting platform, vehicle is turned off.
f Do not park your vehicle in areas where the hot
NOTICE
trolley jack or standard jack
f Before driving the vehicle onto a lifting
Risk of serious damage to the engine or vehicle if exhaust system may come in contact with dry
you lift the vehicle improperly. grass, brush, fuel spill or other flammable
f Lift only at the jacking points provided.
platform, make sure that there is sufficient
material.
f Before driving the vehicle onto a lifting
space between the lifting platform and the
vehicle.
platform, make sure that there is sufficient h WARNING Jacking Risks
space between the lifting platform and the
vehicle. If the vehicle is not secured, or incorrectly
f To avoid serious damage, never jack up the secured, during a wheel change, it could move
vehicle at the engine, transmission or at the unexpectedly or fall from the car jack.
axles. f Passengers must not be in the vehicle when it
f Use only level anti-slip rubber pads on a lifting is jacked up.
platform.
f Do not damage any sensitive components in
the vicinity of the jacking points.
254 Minor Repairs

f Before you change a wheel, be sure the ground 3. Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling
is level and firm. If necessary, use a board Information away, e.g. by means of wedges under the
under the jack to ensure that the jack does not The tools required for changing a wheel (e.g. jack, wheels on the opposite side.
sink into the ground. wheel bolt wrench, assembly aids) are not This is particularly important on slopes.
f Set the electric parking brake and block the supplied as standard with the vehicle. Your 4. Slightly loosen the wheel bolts on the wheel to
wheels opposite the flat tire on the other side authorized Porsche dealer will be pleased to be changed.
of the vehicle. advise you. 5. Lift the vehicle only at the specified jacking
f The jack is only to be used for changing a points.
wheel. Do not use it as a support to work under 6. Raise the vehicle until the wheel lifts off the
the car. Information ground.
f The car must be jacked up only at the The tire and wheel sizes on both axles are f Please see the chapter “RAISING THE VEHICLE
illustrated jacking points. Lifting at any other different. WITH A LIFTING PLATFORM, TROLLEY JACK
place may result in personal injury. f Do not fit the wrong wheels on the wrong axle. OR STANDARD JACK” on page 254.
f Only use wheels/tires with approved 7. Remove 1 or 2 wheel bolts (see corresponding
NOTICE dimensions for the relevant axle. figure).
Risk of damage to the engine or vehicle if you lift
Sequence of operation
the vehicle improperly.
f The car must be jacked up only at the h WARNING Working Under Vehicle
illustrated jacking points. Lifting at any other
The jack must be used only to raise the car for
place may result in damage to the vehicle.
f Never jack up the car by the body, bumpers,
wheel changing. The jack must never be used as
a support to work underneath the vehicle. If the
engine, transmission or at the axles.
f Do not damage any sensitive components in
jack is accidentally dislodged, you or bystanders
could suffer severe personal injury.
the vicinity of the jacking points.
f Never jack up other vehicles or other loads
f For safety reasons do not use tire inflating bot- with the jack.
tles. Do not use commercially available sealant
f Always place the car on stable supports if you
bottles. Use only the tire inflating bottle
have to work under it. When working under the
located in the luggage compartment.
vehicle, always use safety stands specifically
designed for this purpose.
f Please use a suitable knee rest to protect your
clothing against soiling.
1. Activate the electric parking brake and move
the PDK selector lever to position P.
Remove the ignition key or control unit on
vehicles with Porsche Entry & Drive.
2. Switch on the emergency flasher if necessary.
Minor Repairs 255

15.Tighten wheel bolts in diagonally opposite

sequence.
Immediately after changing a wheel, use
a torque wrench to check the prescribed
tightening torque of the wheel bolts
(160 Nm/118 ftlb.).
Note on operation for vehicles with Tire
Pressure Monitoring
f On vehicles with Tire Pressure Monitoring, the
settings on the multi-function display must be
updated after the wheel change.
f Please see the chapter “TIRE PRESSURE
MENU (TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM, TPMS)” on page 105.
Checking tire pressure with a pressure
gauge
Screw in one assembly aid on vehicles without PCCB Screw in two assembly aids on vehicles with PCCB 1. Remove the valve stem cap from the tire.
8. Screw in assembly aids instead of wheel bolts. 12.Remove assembly aids and screw in remaining 2. Press the pressure gauge onto the valve stem.
wheel bolts.
NOTICE
Initially tighten bolts only slightly in diagonally Information
Risk of damage to brake disks. opposite sequence so that the wheel is f Do not press too hard or force the valve stem
f Always screw in both assembly aids when centered. sideways, or air will escape.
changing a wheel. 13.Inflate the tire if necessary.
If the sound of air escaping from the tire is
9. Remove the remaining wheel bolts. heard, reposition the pressure gauge.
COLD TIRES (68 °F/ 20 °C)” on page 287.
10.Take the wheel off and put a new wheel on.
f Please see the chapter “WHEEL BOLTS”
14.Lower the vehicle fully and remove the jack. 3. Read the tire pressure on the gauge stem and
compare it to the permissible tire pressure.
on page 257. This information can be found on the tire
11.Insert wheel bolts and tighten by hand. pressure plate or in the chapter Technical
Data.
4. Remove the pressure gauge.
5. Please see the chapter “TIRE PRESSURE
MENU (TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
256 Minor Repairs

Wheel Bolts
f Always clean the wheel bolts before fitting.
f Wheel bolts must not be greased.
f Replace damaged wheel bolts.
Only use genuine Porsche wheel bolts
assigned especially to this model or wheel
bolts of similar quality that have been
manufactured according to Porsche
specifications and production requirements.
Tightening torque
Tightening torque for wheel bolts: 160 Nm
(118 ftlb.).
Do not grease wheel attachment face B Security wheel bolts

Wheel Attachment Faces The adapter (wrench socket) for the security
wheel bolts is stored in the tool box in the luggage
NOTICE compartment.
There is a risk of damage to the wheel and wheel f If the wheels have to be removed at the
attachment face. workshop, do not forget to hand over the
f The wheel attachment face B on the brake disk socket for the security wheel bolts along with
and on the wheel itself must not be greased. the car key.
f Only the areas A may be greased. Grease f To loosen or tighten the wheel bolt with anti-
these areas very thinly with Optimoly® TA. theft protection, the adapter must be used
Do not use any other grease/paste. between the wheel bolt and the wheel bolt
wrench.
f When positioning the wrench socket, ensure
that it engages fully in the teeth of the wheel
bolt.
Minor Repairs 257

Wheels with Central Lock f Axis components subject to high loads Central Bolts
must be replaced at intervals specified by
Racing technology for the road. The central bolt and central bolt lock are safety-
Porsche. Always make enquiries with your
Wheels with a central lock are perfectly normal in related components. Always check them for signs
authorized Porsche dealer about the current
motor sport, but are not common on normal roads. of wear and damage.
f The conical surface, trapezoidal thread and
stipulations before driving on race circuits.
f Other parts such as ball joints, rubber mounts,
Instead of the central lock nuts conventionally
used in motor sport, the wheel has an inner toothing of the central bolt must not be
etc., where wear may result in modified vehicle
encapsulated central bolt, which is used to fasten scratched or cracked.
f Replace damaged central bolts.
handling, must be checked and if applicable
it to the wheel hub.
replaced without delay.
Only use the genuine Porsche central bolts
Driving on a race circuit (e.g. sports Deferred inspection,
h WARNING allocated specifically to this vehicle model.
f The conical surface and trapezoidal thread on
driving school, club sport events) maintenance and
Wheels are subjected to significantly higher replacement measures the central bolt must be perfectly clean.
stresses during extremely sporty driving – Deferring inspection, maintenance and Tightening torque for central bolts: 443 ftlb.
particularly when driving on race circuits – replacement measures can result in accidents. (600 Nm).
compared to driving on public roads. For this
This is particularly true if you are clocking up
reason, all the instructions specified below must Changing a Wheel
high mileage on race circuits.
f Get an authorized Porsche dealer to change
always be noted and followed for driving on race
We recommend that you get an authorized
circuits.
f Always make enquiries with your authorized
Porsche dealer to carry out these measures. the wheel.
Porsche dealer about any other driving and Inadequate screw
h WARNING
maintenance instructions before driving on connections when using Information
race circuits. unapproved The tools required for changing a wheel (e.g. jack,
The central lock, like all chassis components, components and wheels torque wrench) are not supplied as standard with
requires greater attention while driving on race Components can break or become damaged. the car. Your authorized Porsche dealer will be
circuits. pleased to advise you.
f Check the tightening torque of the central bolts
Unsuitable wheel sizes or incorrectly dimensioned
components in the hub area of accessory
before, if necessary during and after driving on wheels, the use of spacers, etc. can impair the
a race circuit.
f Whenever wheels are changed, apply some
overall function of the wheel mounting.
f Only use wheel/tire combinations approved by
aluminum paste to the trapezoidal thread on Porsche.
the wheel hub or have a second set of greased f Under no circumstances should spacers be
screws on hand.
f Never drive the vehicle without a central lock
used.
bolt in the hub.

f All central wheel lock components, such as the
central bolt, wheel, wheel hub, wheel hex and
brake disk must always be checked for wear
and replaced if necessary after driving on a
race circuit.
258 Minor Repairs

If a wheel needs to be changed, the procedure 1. Apply the electric parking brake, move the
described below must be adhered to exactly, as PDK selector lever to position P and remove
otherwise the wheel may loosen, resulting in the key from the ignition.
damage. Porsche cannot be held liable if this 2. Secure the vehicle carefully in both
happens. directions to prevent it from rolling away, e.g.
To achieve the high tightening torque required for using wedges at the wheels on the opposite
the central bolt, a suitable, commercially available side.
443 ftlb. (600 Nm) torque wrench must be used. This is particularly important on slopes.
Alternatively, a corresponding tool with torque 3. Raise the vehicle until the wheel lifts off the
multiplier (part no. 997.450.323.90) is available ground. Lift the vehicle only at the specified
from Porsche Motorsport. When a torque jacking points.
multiplier is used, the torque must be reduced in f Please see the chapter “RAISING THE VEHICLE
accordance with the tool’s operating instructions. WITH A LIFTING PLATFORM, TROLLEY JACK
When loosening and fastening the wheel, a OR STANDARD JACK” on page 254.
second person is needed to prevent the wheel
from turning by firmly braking it.
h WARNING Tipping or falling vehicle
4. Open the luggage compartment and lift the
The high mounting forces involved can cause the plastic cover A.
vehicle to roll away and slip off the jack. Please see the chapter “TIRE FILLING
f Always use a lifting platform if there is one COMPRESSOR” on page 198.
available. Open the receptacle B and remove the
Information polygon tool.
NOTICE The central bolt must only be opened using
The vehicle must not be standing on the wheel to
Risk of damage due to vehicle tipping over or this original polygon tool. Always leave the
be secured during fitting.
falling off lifting equipment or using the wrong polygon tool in the luggage compartment to
tool. ensure that it is always available in the event of
a breakdown.
The high mounting forces involved can cause the
vehicle to roll away and slip off the jack. An impact NOTICE
wrench can damage the central lock.
f Always use a lifting platform if there is one Risk of damage from scratching.
available. f Proceed with care when removing the wheel-
f Do not use an impact wrench. hub cap.
Minor Repairs 259

5. The polygon tool contains an auxiliary tool. 6. Position the polygon tool and insert it until it f Turn in the correct direction.
Remove this from the square and replace it engages. f Make sure there is sufficient clearance so that
afterwards. This opens the safety lock on the central bolt. neither people nor vehicle parts will be harmed
Use the auxiliary tool to carefully lever the if the lever breaks away.
wheel-hub cap out of its seating. For this Information f The wheel should be prevented from turning by
purpose, insert the metal tongue of the getting a second person to brake firmly using
auxiliary tool deep into the opening groove A A very high torque is required to loosen the central the brake pedal.
on the central bolt and then swivel the handle bolt, especially if it has not been opened in a long f Hold the steering wheel securely when
back. time. loosening the front wheels.
NOTICE
Risk of damage to the central bolt lock.
f When loosening the central bolt, make sure
that the tool remains pushed on fully and
does not slide out of position.
7. Unscrew the central bolt and set it down in
such a way that no dirt can enter the cone area
or the thread.
260 Minor Repairs

Always grease the conical area A (45° area)

of the central bolt and the cylindrical part B
of the wheel hub with a light coating of
aluminum paste before fitting the central bolt.
Make sure that no dirt sticks to the
components.
All other parts must be free of grease.
h WARNING
Damaged, missing,
soiled or incorrectly
greased central wheel
lock components
Deferring inspection, maintenance and
replacement measures can result in accidents.
Carry out a visual inspection of all parts before
fitting the wheel.
The central bolt and central bolt lock are safety-
related components. Always check them for signs
of wear and damage. f The central bolt lock C prevents the
f The affected parts must be replaced by your
NOTICE
central bolt from being lost and must not
There is a risk of damage to brake disks on authorized Porsche dealer if they are damaged therefore be removed from the wheel hub.
vehicles with Porsche Ceramic Composite Brake or if you suspect that they are not in perfect
(PCCB).
f Do not tilt the wheel when removing it.
working order. NOTICE
f There must be no scratches or cracks on the There is a risk of damage to brake disks on
cone area, thread or inner teeth of the bolt.
f The cone ring must turn easily in the central
8. Remove wheel carefully. vehicles with Porsche Ceramic Composite Brake
9. Check that the toothed locking bolt C moves (PCCB).
bolt. f Do not tilt the wheel or place it against the
f There must be a generous coating of grease
smoothly.
When you press the bolt into its element, it brake disk when mounting it.
on the thread of the central bolt and wheel hub.
f Only brake disks that were approved for the
must return firmly to its original position
without catching. 11.Fit the wheel carefully.
central lock may be fitted.
f All contact surfaces on the wheel, wheel hub
The toothing on the locking bolt C must not be
damaged.
The cone ring A must turn easily in the central and brake disk as well as the thread in the
bolt. wheel hub must be free of abrasion, sand, dust
10.There must be a generous coating of grease or shavings.
on the thread of the central bolt and wheel hub.
Whenever wheels are changed, apply some
aluminium paste to the trapezoidal thread on
the wheel hub.
Minor Repairs 261

Information
The vehicle must not be standing on the wheel to
be secured during fitting.
12.Insert the central bolt into the polygon tool
(until it engages), fit the central bolt at right
angles to the wheel hub and screw it on without
tilting.
13.Tighten the central bolt to 443 ftlb. (600 Nm)
using a suitable torque wrench. Prevent the 14.Loosen the central bolt again by 1/4 turn. 16.Remove the polygon tool and check whether
resultant turning of the wheel by getting a 15.Tighten the central bolt again to 443 ftlb. the locking pin C has already automatically
second person to firmly press the brake (600 Nm). engaged in the central bolt.
pedal. Hold the steering wheel securely when The locking pin then completely covers the
tightening the front wheels. inner teeth of the central bolt.
Information The locking pin is usually still in the rear
If you do not have a suitable torque wrench in a position and must be turned to the left and
breakdown situation, the emergency procedure right slightly using the auxiliary tool until it
for fastening the central bolt must be performed. engages with spring force in the central bolt.
f Please see the chapter “CENTRAL BOLT
EMERGENCY FASTENING” on page 263.
262 Minor Repairs

h WARNING
Central bolt lock not Central Bolt Emergency Fastening
engaged
If there is no suitable torque wrench available
Deferring inspection measures can result in for tightening the central bolt to the high
accidents.
f Never drive when the locking pin is not
tightening torque of 443 ftlb. (600 Nm) in an
emergency situation, the emergency fastening
engaged. procedure must be used.
f The central bolt must always be fitted using the
NOTICE original tool (stored in the luggage
Risk of damage due to central bolt lock not compartment, see point 4).
engaging. f The vehicle must not be standing on the wheel
f Never drive when the locking pin is not to be secured during fitting.
engaged. 1. Tighten the central bolt with great force using
a long lever (3/4-inch adapter required) and
loosen again by 1/4 turn.
2. Tighten the central bolt using a commercially
available torque wrench (3/4-inch adapter
required) to exactly 74 ftlb. (100 Nm).
17.Position the wheel-hub cap in the central bolt
so that the positioning tab is facing the
screw groove. Then press the cap into
position.
Do not drive without the wheel-hub cap in
place. Otherwise water and dirt can get into
the central bolt and impair the function of the
central bolt lock.
A little grease on the rubber ring makes fitting
and subsequent removal easier.
18.The vehicle can now be lowered.
Rim Cleaner
NOTICE
Using rim cleaners:
Rim cleaners can bleach the anodized surface of
the central bolt.
f Only use rim cleaners approved by Porsche
and use these sparingly and in accordance
with instructions for use.
Minor Repairs 263

h WARNING Loose central bolt

Driving without the central bolt tightened
sufficiently can result in accidents.
f Never use the emergency fastening method
for driving on race circuits.
You will see the markings and on the central 4. Tighten the central bolt further using the long
bolt. lever until the STOP marking covers the
3. Draw a guide line on the wheel opposite the guide line.
marking using a pen. The bolt is then securely tightened.
5. Always complete steps 16 to 18.
f Please see the chapter “CHANGING A WHEEL”
on page 258.
f You should have the central bolt loosened by a
qualified specialist workshop again as soon as
possible and then tightened to the specified
tightening torque of 443 ftlb. (600 Nm) using
a suitable torque wrench.
We recommend that you get an authorized
Porsche dealer.
264 Minor Repairs

Flat Tire The tire sealant set comprises: In the event of contact with sealant:
1. Stop the vehicle as far away from the driving
– a filler bottle f If sealant gets on your skin or into your eyes,
– a filler hose thoroughly rinse the affected part of your body
lane as possible.
– a valve turner immediately with plenty of water.
f Change soiled clothing immediately.
The vehicle must be parked on a firm and flat
– a spare valve insert
f See a doctor immediately in the event of an
surface offering adequate grip.
– a sticker with the maximum permitted speed
2. Switch emergency flasher on.
– a compressor allergic reaction.
f If sealant is swallowed, thoroughly rinse out
3. Apply the parking brake.
– operating instructions
4. Move the PDK selector lever to position P.
5. Straighten the front wheels. h WARNING
the mouth without delay and drink plenty of
Limits on Tire Sealant
6. Remove the ignition key, or the control unit on water. Do not induce vomiting.
Use
vehicles with Porsche Entry & Drive, in order to See a doctor immediately.
Always observe the following points:
lock the steering and prevent the engine from f Use the tire sealant only in the case of cuts or
being started. punctures no larger than 0.15 in. (4 mm).
7. Get all passengers to leave the vehicle. f Never use the tire sealant if the rim is
8. Set up the warning triangle at a suitable damaged.
distance.
Filling in tire sealant h WARNING Tire Sealant
The tire sealant can be found in the right-hand box Flammability
in the luggage compartment. The compressor is The sealant is highly flammable and harmful to
located under the cover in the luggage health.
compartment. f Fire, naked flame and smoking are prohibited
The tire sealant can be used to seal small cuts, when handling tire sealant.
especially in the tire tread. f Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing due to
Sealing the tire with the tire sealant is only an caustic chemical properties of the tire sealant.
emergency solution so you can drive to the f Keep tire sealant away from children.
nearest workshop. Even if the tire is air-tight, f Do not inhale vapors, due to the consequent
it may only be used for short journeys in an harm to personal health resulting in serious
emergency. personal injury or death.
Minor Repairs 265

5. Screw filler hose B onto the filler bottle. 16.Please contact an authorized Porsche dealer.
The filler bottle is now open. f Also follow the separate operating instructions
6. Unscrew valve cap from the tire valve F. for the tire sealing compound.
7. Remove valve insert E from the tire valve with
h WARNING Pressure Loss
valve turner D.
Keep the valve insert in a clean, dry place. A tire pressure sensor that is soiled with sealant
8. Remove plug C from the filler hose B. cannot determine the tire pressure correctly.
9. Push filler hose onto the tire valve. f When the defective tire is replaced, the tire
10.Hold the filler bottle higher than the level of the pressure sensor must be replaced.
tire valve and squeeze it forcefully until the
bottle is completely emptied into the tire. h DANGER Damaged Tires
11.Pull filler hose off the tire valve.
Damaged tires could burst causing loss of control
12.Screw valve insert E securely into the tire
of the vehicle.
f Have the tire replaced by a specialist
valve with the valve turner D.
13.Connect the compressor to a socket in the
workshop as soon as possible.
f Avoid hard acceleration and high cornering
vehicle and inflate the tire to at least 37 psi/
2.5 bar/25 kPa.
speeds.
f Observe maximum speed of 50 mph
A - Filler bottle
If this tire pressure cannot be reached, the tire
B - Filler hose is too severely damaged.
(80 km/h).
f Always observe the safety and operating
C - Filler hose plug Do not continue driving with this tire.
D - Valve turner 14.Screw valve cap onto the tire valve F.
E - Valve insert instructions, which can be found in the
15.Check the tire pressure after driving for
F - Tire valve separate operating instructions for the sealant
around 10 minutes.
Filling in sealant and on the compressor.
If the tire pressure is less than 22 psi/1.5 bar/
1. Leave the object that caused the puncture in 15 kPa, do not continue driving.
the tire. If a value of more than 22 psi/1.5 bar/15 kPa
2. Remove sealant and the enclosed sticker from is indicated, correct the pressure to the
the luggage compartment. prescribed value.
3. Stick the sticker in the driver’s field of vision. f Please see the chapter “TIRE PRESSURE FOR
4. Shake filler bottle A. COLD TIRES (68 °F/ 20 °C)” on page 287.
266 Minor Repairs

Electrical System Changing fuses

In order to avoid damage and faults in electrical or In order to prevent damage to the electrical
electronic systems, electrical accessories should system due to short circuits and overloads,
be installed at an authorized Porsche dealer the individual circuits are protected by fuses.
f Use only accessories approved by Porsche. The fuse boxes are located in the side walls of the
driver’s and passenger’s footwell respectively.
h WARNING Changing Fuses 1. Switch off the load with the defective fuse.
Replacing fuses or relays with the engine running 2. Detach the appropriate plastic cover at the
or the ignition on could cause electrical shock. finger hole.
f Disconnect the negative terminal on the 3. Remove the relevant fuse (see fuse
battery during all work on the electrical assignment) from its slot using the yellow
system. plastic gripper A (left fuse box) in order to
f Please see the chapter “BATTERY (12 VOLT)” check it.
on page 271. A blown fuse can be identified by the melted
metal strip.
Relays 4. Replace only with fuses of the same rating.
Relays should be checked or changed only at an Spare fuses can be found in the left-hand fuse
authorized workshop. box, next to the yellow plastic gripper. A - Plastic gripper
We recommend that you use genuine Porsche B - Spare fuses
fuses for replacement. C - Diagnostic socket
Fuses in left footwell

Information Row A
If a fuse blows repeatedly, the cause of the fault No. Designation A
must be corrected immediately.
1 Lower left: 40
Air-conditioning fan
2 Upper left: 40
PSM control unit
3 Lower right: 25
Seat adjustment
4 Upper right:
not used
Minor Repairs 267

Row B No. Designation A No. Designation A

No. Designation A 8 Air conditioning control unit 7,5 5 Cabriolet: Convertible-top lock 30
1 Front lid light 40 9 Instrument cluster 10 closing mechanism open/closed
Front lid actuator Steering column Filler flap
High beam, FL stopwatch Cabriolet: Convertible top storage
Low beam, FL 10 PCM 25 compartment catch open/close
Side marker light, FR Rear spoiler control extend/retract
Turn signal lights, RL, FL 6 Power window control unit, FL 25
Row C 7 Headlight cleaning system 30
2 Raised brake light, spoiler 15
Rear lid actuator No. Designation A 8 PSM control unit 25
Rear fog light, right 1 Center console button panel 15 9 Alarm siren 5
Gateway control unit 10 Not used
Reversing light, left
Diagnostic socket
Brake light, left
Ignition lock
Tail light, left
Passenger compartment monitoring
Daytime driving light, FL sensor
3 Alarm horn 15 Light switch
4 Interior lighting 15 Bluetooth phone charger
Hall sensors 2 Start-relevant loads 40
Orientation light Footwell lights
License plate light Electric ignition lock anti-removal
Rear wiper electronics activation lock
Heated rear window relay Turn signal light indicator, FL/FR
Central locking LED Emergency flasher button LED
Door panels LED Electric ignition lock light
Ambient light Side turn signal lights, FR/FL
Raised brake light High beam, FR
Rear fog light, left Low beam, FR
Brake light, right Turn signal light indicator, RR
Reversing light, right Side marker light, FL
Daytime driving light, FR 3 Vehicle Tracking System control 5
Tail light, right unit
5 Fuel pump relay and control unit 20 4 Horn 15
6 Filler flap close/open 10
Washer pump, front/rear
7 Front spoiler control unit 30
268 Minor Repairs

Row D Row B
No. Designation A No. Designation A
1 Rear wiper 15 1 Rain sensor 5
2 HomeLink 5 2 Air conditioning control unit 25
3 Left headlight 5 3 Not used
4 PDC control unit 5 4 PDCC control unit 10
AFS control unit 5 TPMS control unit 5
Front spoiler control unit 6 TV tuner 5
Front camera 7 High-end subwoofer amplifier 40
Gateway/diagnostic socket Subwoofer amplifier 25
Air quality sensor
8 Not used
5 PSM control unit 5
9 Allwheel control unit 10
6 Steering column switching module 5
10 Reversing camera control unit 5
Electronic steering gear
Refrigerant pressure sensor
7 Selector lever control unit 5 Row C
8 Right headlight 5 Fuses in right footwell
No. Designation A
9 Interior mirror 5 Row A 1 Not used
10 Seat ventilation, left 5
No. Designation A 2 Electric parking brake button 5
1 Lower left: 40 3 Not used
DC/DC converter, infotainment 4 Cabriolet: Rear power window 20
2 Upper left: 40 control unit
DC/DC converter roof console 5 Temperature sensor for DMTL tank 5
power supply leakage diagnosis
3 Lower right: 40 6 Front wiper motor 30
Fresh-air blower motor 7 Power window control unit, FR 25
Blower regulator 8 Steering column adjustment 25
4 Upper right: 25 9 Roof console 5
Right seat control unit 10 Sound system amplifier 40
Seat adjustment 25
Minor Repairs 269

Row D Emergency unlocking of luggage

No. Designation A
compartment lid
If the battery is discharged, the luggage
1 Airbag control unit 5
compartment lid can be opened only with the
2 Allwheel control unit 5
aid of a donor battery.
3 PDCC control unit 7,5
4 ACC control unit 5
Information
5 Occupant sensing for the 5
The engine cannot be started with this method.
f Please see the chapter “EXTERNAL POWER
passenger's seat
6 Seat ventilation, right 5
SUPPLY, EMERGENCY STARTING WITH
7 Control unit, DME, PDK, VTS 5
JUMPER CABLES” on page 273.
BCM rear
8 Footwell socket 20 Unlocking lids
9 Center console socket 20 1. Use the key to unlock the vehicle at the
Cigarette lighter door lock.
10 Socket in glove box 20 2. Remove the plastic cover from the left-hand
fuse box.
3. Pull out positive terminal C (red) in the fuse A - Plastic gripper (yellow)
C - Positive terminal (red)
box using the plastic gripper A (yellow).
4. Use the red jump lead to connect the positive
terminal of the donor battery to the positive
terminal C in the fuse box.
Information
If the vehicle was locked, the alarm horn will sound
when the negative lead is connected.
270 Minor Repairs

h DANGER Battery Explosion

Hazard
f Charge battery in a well-ventilated area.
f Never charge a frozen battery. It may explode
because of gas trapped in the ice. Allow a
frozen battery to thaw out first.
f Do not expose the battery to an open flame,
electrical spark or a lit cigarette, since they
can ignite hydrogen gas from the battery.
h DANGER Static Electricity

f Do not wipe the battery with a dry cloth.
f Before touching the battery, discharge any
static electricity by touching the vehicle.
h WARNING Chemical Exposure

5. Use the black jump lead to connect the Battery (12 volt) f After handling battery, always protect your skin
negative terminal of the donor battery to the and remove surface chemicals by washing
The battery is located under the cover in the
door arrester D. thoroughly with soap and water.
luggage compartment.
6. Press button on the remote control for
For information on removing the cover:
f Please see the chapter “TIRE FILLING
approx. 2 seconds to unlock the luggage h WARNING Battery Acid and
compartment lid. The alarm system is
COMPRESSOR” on page 198. Electrolyte Exposure
f Have the battery removed and installed only by f Wear eye protection.
switched off.
f Do not allow battery acid to come in contact

7. Disconnect the negative lead first, then the
positive lead. your authorized Porsche dealer.
with your skin or eyes.
h DANGER
f If you get electrolyte, which is an acid, in your
8. Push positive terminal C into the fuse box and Electric Shock
f Observe all warning notes on the battery.
fit the plastic fuse box cover.
eyes or on your skin, immediately rinse with
f Disconnect the negative terminal on the cold water for several minutes and call a
battery during all work on the electrical doctor.
system.
f Do not lay tools or other metal objects on the
battery as they could cause a short circuit
across the battery terminal.
Minor Repairs 271

Battery care If the vehicle was locked before the battery

NOTICE
f Ensure that battery is securely mounted. was disconnected, the alarm will be triggered
f Keep battery surface clean and dry.
Risk of damage to the fabric, metal or paint from when the battery is reconnected.
f Keep terminals and connections clean.
battery acid or electrolyte. To deactivate the alarm system:
f Do not allow battery acid to come in contact f Lock the vehicle and unlock it again.
Corrosion can be prevented by coating the
with fabric or painted surfaces.
f Spilled electrolyte must be rinsed off at once
terminals and connections with petroleum jelly
or silicone spray. Alarm system, central locking
with a solution of baking soda and water to
f Ensure that terminal clamps and the vent f The status of the central locking and alarm
neutralize the acid. system does not change when you disconnect
hose are firmly secured.
the battery.
Charge state Winter driving
A well-charged battery prevents starting problems The ability of the battery to deliver and store
Information
and has a longer service life. power decreases at low outside temperatures.
Moreover, the battery is more heavily loaded in the Even if you put your vehicle out of operation, the
In order to avoid unintentional battery battery still discharges.
f The battery must be charged, i.e. connected
winter months, e.g. by the heated rear window,
discharge:
f Switch off unnecessary electrical loads in city
the more frequent use of additional lights, the
blower and the windshield wipers, etc. to a charger, approximately every 6 weeks in
traffic, on short trips or in a line of traffic. f Have the battery checked before the start order to preserve battery function.
f Always remove the ignition key when leaving of winter. f Store a battery that has been removed in
the vehicle or a dark, cool place that is not exposed to frost.
switch off the ignition on vehicles with Porsche
Entry & Drive. Information Replacing the battery
f Avoid using the Porsche Communication Keep the battery fully charged to prevent it from The battery is subject to normal wear: its service
Management system and the audio system freezing. life depends heavily on the care you give it,
when the engine is not running. A discharged battery can already freeze at –5 ºC,
f Please see the chapter “CHARGING THE
climatic conditions and the conditions of use
but a fully charged one only freezes at –40 ºC. (distances, loads).
BATTERY” on page 274. f If the battery is frozen, thaw it out before It is not possible to use the details on the battery
connecting jump leads. case to determine a comparable battery that
Information meets all the specific requirements of Porsche.
In the cold season in particular or if the vehicle
Laying up the vehicle f Have the battery removed and installed only by
is used primarily for short distances, it may be If the vehicle is left for long periods in the garage your authorized Porsche dealer.
or workshop, the doors and lids should be closed. f Only use an original Porsche battery, with the
f Remove the ignition key or disconnect the
necessary to recharge the battery from time to
time. correct part number, as a replacement. Only
battery if necessary. this battery meets the specific requirements of
the vehicle.
Information
f When the battery is disconnected, the alarm
system ceases to function.
272 Minor Repairs

f After you install a new battery, it must be For information on storing the end positions for External Power Supply, Emergency
initialized in the control unit. the power windows:
f Please see the chapter “STORING END
Please contact your authorized Porsche
starting with jumper cables
dealer. POSITION OF THE WINDOWS AFTER If the battery is flat, the battery of another vehicle
f Please observe the disposal instructions for CONNECTING THE VEHICLE BATTERY” can be used for starting or as an external power
batteries. on page 63. supply with the help of jump leads.
6. Teach tires on vehicles with Tire Pressure Both batteries must be 12 V batteries. The
Putting vehicle into operation Monitoring. capacity (Ah) of the donor battery must not be
After the battery is connected or after a fully For information on teaching the Tire Pressure substantially less than that of the flat battery.
discharged battery is charged, the PSM warning Monitoring System (TPMS): The flat battery must be connected correctly to
light lights up on the instrument panel and f Please see the chapter “TIRE PRESSURE the vehicle’s electrical system.
a message appears on the multi-function display MENU (TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
in the instrument panel to indicate a fault. h WARNING Jumper Cable Hazards
This fault can be corrected with a few simple 7. Store end position on vehicles with a sunroof. A short circuit may be caused if unsuitable jumper
steps: For information on storing the end position for the cables are used or if jumper cable starting is not
1. Start the engine. sunroof: performed properly. Such short circuits can
To do this, turn the ignition key or the control f Please see the chapter “STORING END cause a fire.
unit (on vehicles with Porsche Entry & Drive) to POSITION OF THE SUNROOF” on page 66. f Use only standard jumper cables with sufficient
ignition lock position 2 twice. f Please see the chapter “STORING END cross section and completely insulated
2. With the vehicle stationary, perform a few POSITION OF THE ROLL-UP SUNBLIND” alligator clips. Follow the instructions provided
steering movements to the left and right and on page 67. by the jumper cable manufacturer.
then drive a short distance in a straight line f Route the jumper cables so that they cannot
until the PSM warning light goes out and the be caught by moving parts in the engine
message is erased from the multi-function compartment.
display in the instrument panel. The jumper cables must be long enough so
3. If the warnings do not disappear, then: that neither vehicles nor cables touch another.
Drive carefully to the nearest authorized f The vehicles must not touch, otherwise current
Porsche dealer. might flow as soon as the positive terminals
Have the fault corrected. are connected.
4. After the warnings go out: f Ensure that tools or conductive jewelry (rings,
Stop the vehicle in a suitable place. chains, watch straps) do not come into contact
5. Store the end position for the power windows. with the positive jumper cable, the positive
battery post or live parts of the vehicle.
f Improper hook-up of jumper cables can ruin
the alternator.
Minor Repairs 273

h WARNING
5. Start the engine.
Battery Acid Leakage
An attempted start using jump leads should
f Do not lean over the battery due to danger of not last more than 15 seconds. Then wait for
chemical burns from leaking acid. at least one minute.
6. With engine running:
h DANGER Battery Charging and Disconnect the negative lead from the ground
Jumping Hazards point B first, then from the negative terminal of
f Improper use of booster battery to start a the donor battery.
vehicle may cause an explosion. 7. With engine running:
f Keep sources of ignition away from the Disconnect the positive lead from the positive
battery, e.g. naked flame, burning cigarettes terminal of the donor battery first, then from
or sparks due to cable contact. the positive terminal A of the discharged
f Before connecting jumper cables, it is battery.
essential to thaw out a frozen battery. Charging the battery
Automotive batteries lose their efficiency when
NOTICE not in use. The charge available in your battery can
Risk of damage due to short circuit. be measured with a battery hydrometer. We
f Never connect jumper cables directly to the + = Battery positive terminal A recommend that the battery voltage be tested by
– = Ground point for external power supply/emergency
battery. Always connect jumper cables to the starting B your authorized Porsche dealer who has the
emergency starting terminals in the luggage appropriate equipment.
compartment. Supplying external power/ If the car is not driven for prolonged periods, the
Performing emergency starting with battery must be charged at least every 6 weeks.
jumper cables A discharged battery allows rapid formation of
Always observe the sequence below: sulfates, leading to premature deterioration of the
1. Remove cover in luggage compartment. plates.
To remove the cover:
Please see the chapter “TIRE FILLING
COMPRESSOR” on page 198.
2. Connect the positive lead (red) to the positive
terminal A of the discharged battery first, then
connect it to the positive terminal of the donor
battery.
3. Connect the negative lead (black) first to the
negative terminal of the donor battery, then to
the ground point B.
4. Leave the engine of the donor vehicle running
at a higher engine speed.
274 Minor Repairs

h DANGER Battery Explosion Changing Car Key

Hazards (Remote Control) Battery
f Charge battery in a well-ventilated area due to
hydrogen gas explosion risk. Information
f Never charge a frozen battery. It may explode f Please observe the regulations for disposing
because of gas trapped in the ice. Allow a
of batteries.
frozen battery to thaw out first.
Car key
h CAUTION Eye or Skin Contact If the battery in the remote control becomes too
f If you get electrolyte, which is an acid, in your weak, the message “Replace ignition key
eyes or on your skin, immediately rinse with battery” will appear on the multi-function display
cold water for several minutes. in the instrument panel.
The battery should be changed in this case.
Your authorized Porsche dealer will be pleased to
advise you about a suitable charger.
f Always observe the instructions provided by
the charger manufacturer.
f If the battery is frozen, thaw it out first before
Changing the battery (CR 2032, 3V)
charging it. 1. Remove the emergency key.
f When charging the battery, ensure adequate For information on the emergency key:
ventilation. f Please see the chapter “EMERGENCY KEY”
1. Connect the charger to the emergency starting on page 17.
terminals. 2. Lever off the cover on the back of the key
Only plug into the mains and switch the housing using a small screwdriver.
charger on when it is connected up correctly. 3. Change the battery (check polarity).
2. Switch on the charger. 4. Re-fit cover and press together firmly.
3. After charging the battery, first switch off the 5. Insert the emergency key.
charger and then disconnect it.
f Please see the chapter “PUTTING VEHICLE
INTO OPERATION” on page 273.
Minor Repairs 275

Replacing bulbs Headlights

Information
Replacing Light-Emitting Diodes and Bulbs must be clean and free from grease. NOTICE
Long-Life Bulbs f Never touch bulbs with your bare hands. Risk of damage to headlights due to abrasion and
The vehicle lighting as well as the interior lights Use a cloth or soft paper when replacing excessive temperatures.
have light-emitting diodes and long-life bulbs. bulbs. f Do not affix any coverings (e.g. “stone guards”
The LEDs cannot be replaced individually. f Always carry spare bulbs with you. or film) close to the headlights.
Replacement of the long-life bulbs involves In certain countries, it is mandatory to carry f Use soapy water only to clean light lenses and
a greater amount of installation work.
f Have defective LEDs and bulbs replaced at an
spare bulbs. plastic headlight lenses. In no case may
chemical cleaners or other volatile cleaning
fluids be used.
f To prevent scratches, do not rub with a dry or
h WARNING Headlight High Voltage merely moist cloth, tissue or insect sponges.
Hazard
The headlights are under high voltage when
installed. Information
f Exercise extreme care when working close to The headlights and tail lights can mist up due to
the headlights. temperature and humidity.
f To ensure optimum ventilation, do not cover
NOTICE the gap between light and body.
Risk of short circuit.
f Always switch off the relevant load when
changing bulbs.
NOTICE
Risk of damage.
Bulbs of a high wattage can damage the housing.
276 Minor Repairs

Headlight Adjustment For checking the headlight adjustment, the Floor

f Check tire pressure and adjust if necessary.
vertical position of the cutoff of the low beam (see The surface upon which the vehicle rests is flat
fig.) has to be projected on a vertical screen (wall) and approximately level.
in distance of 24.6 ft. (7.5 m) from the front lens
COLD TIRES (68 °F/ 20 °C)” on page 287. Screen
f Please see the chapter “REPLACING BULBS”
of the headlamp. The correct position of the cutoff
is 2.0 in. (5 cm) at 24.6 ft. or 7.5 m (0.4°) below The screen upon which headlamp beams are
on page 276. a horizontal line, x cm from ground to the center projected is perpendicular to the floor and the
Adjustment of the headlamp lens. vehicle's longitudinal axis, flat, uniformly light in
The adjustment is made with the vehicle ready to Lateral adjustment of the headlights should be color, unobstructed, and wide and high enough to
drive and the fuel tank completely filled. carried out at an authorized Porsche dealer. accommodate the vehicle beam patterns to be
aimed.
The driver's seat must be loaded by a person or a Distance
165 lbs. (75 kg) weight and the tire pressures The screen should be wide enough to provide at
Visual aim shall be performed at not less than least 3.3 ft. (1 m) of space outboard of the
must meet the prescribed values. After being 24.6 ft. (7.5 m) (this value is a rounded down
loaded, the car must be rolled a few meters so vehicle's headlamp spacing.
conversion from the 25-foot distance typical of
that the suspension can settle. field aim using a screen). The 24.6 ft. (7.5 m)
distance is measured from the headlamp lens to
the viewing screen.
Minor Repairs 277

Towing conditions are strictly met. Failure to meet these

conditions will result in serious and expensive
Certain state statutes and local ordinances
damage to the PDK transmission.
prohibit towing with a chain, rope or even a tow
If the vehicle's transmission or shifter is already
bar. In addition, damage to your vehicle may result
damaged, serious damage will result if the vehicle
from improper procedures. Consult your
is not towed with all four wheels off the ground.
authorized Porsche dealer for details.
Flatbed towing is the preferred type of towing to Porsche cannot be held responsible for damage
be used on Porsche vehicles. incurred in cases where a vehicle has been
transported on one or both of its axles.
Information Towing a vehicle on all four wheels:

f Always observe the laws governing towing and f The vehicle must not be towed if the PDK
tow-starting. transmission is in emergency operation mode
f Exercise extreme care when your vehicle is (“Transm. failure Park vehicle safely”). The
being towed. vehicle must be transported with a car
transporter or on a trailer.
h WARNING Towed Vehicle Hazards f If a selector lever emergency release was
A-Height adjustment No power assistance is available on the towed performed, the vehicle must not be towed.
vehicle when its engine is not running. Greater The vehicle must be transported with a car
Height adjustment
f Move PDK selector lever to position N.
1. Switch ignition on. force is therefore required when braking and
steering.
f Exercise extreme care when your vehicle is
2. Switch on low beam. To properly engage selector-lever position N
3. Open luggage compartment lid. on the display and at the selector lever, the
4. Remove the relevant toolbox. being towed.
engine must be started once before towing the
5. Open up the cover A for the adjusting screw. When the engine is not running, adequate vehicle.
6. Place Allen wrench (5 mm) on adjusting screw. lubrication of the transmission is not guaranteed. The vehicle can be towed as soon as the
7. Adjust low beam in the corresponding Observe the following points to avoid damage to selector lever is in position N and selector-
direction. the transmission. lever position N appears on the display.
Towing a vehicle on all four wheels f The vehicle must always roll on all four wheels
when towed.
NOTICE The ignition must be switched on so that the
brake lights and turn signal lights operate.
f Do not exceed a maximum speed of 30 mph
We urge that wherever possible, a car transporter
or trailer be used to transport a 911 Turbo vehicle
that cannot move under its own power. This is the (50 km/h).
safest way to transport a down vehicle. Maximum towing distance 30 miles (50 km).
If towing distances are greater, the vehicle
For those instances where a car transporter or
must be transported with a car transporter or
trailer is not available, the vehicle may be towed
on a trailer.
on all four wheels only, provided the following
278 Minor Repairs

Towing a vehicle on one axle: f Do not exceed a maximum speed of 30 mph

Raising an axle, irrespective of whether at the (50 km/h).
front or rear, is only permissible if the drive shaft Maximum towing distance 30 miles (50 km).
(cardan shaft) has been removed beforehand. The If towing distances are greater, the vehicle
ignition must be switched off. must be transported with a car transporter or
f The vehicle must not be towed if the PDK on a trailer.
transmission is in emergency operation mode Pulling out a vehicle stuck in snow,
(yellow or red “Transm. failure Park vehicle sand, etc.
f Always pull out the stuck vehicle with the
safely” warning message). The vehicle must
be transported with a car transporter or on
greatest care.
f Do not pull out the vehicle abruptly or at an
a trailer.
f If a selector lever emergency release was
angle.
f If possible, pull the vehicle out backwards in
performed, the vehicle must not be towed.
The vehicle must be transported with a car
its own tracks.
f Move PDK selector lever to position N.
To properly engage selector-lever position N
on the display and at the selector lever, the
engine must be started once before towing
PDK selector lever emergency release
the vehicle. In the event of an electronics failure, emergency
The vehicle can be towed as soon as the release of the selector lever must be performed in
selector lever is in position N and selector- order to move the selector-lever to the N position.
lever position N appears on the display. Releasing selector lever
f Switch ignition off. 1. Take the plastic wedge from the toolbox.
The ignition key must remain in the ignition lock 2. Carefully lever out the rear part of the selector
so that the steering lock does not engage. lever gate A on both sides (arrows) using the
The control unit must be removed from the plastic wedge.
ignition lock and the key inserted in vehicles 3. Carefully lever out the front part of the switch
with Porsche Entry & Drive.
panel B on both sides (arrow) using the plastic
wedge.
OPERATION – UNLOCKING THE IGNITION KEY/ 4. Remove the switch module B and place aside.
CONTROL UNIT” on page 28.
f Make sure that the vehicle is adequately
The cable C of the switch panel must not be
under tension.
illuminated.
Minor Repairs 279

5. Push the selector lever lock downwards and Installing the switch panel and selector lever
Towing lug
hold, then move the selector lever into the N gate
The towing lug is stored in the left tool box in the
position. 1. Make sure that the cable clip D engages luggage compartment.
correctly in the selector support. Then engage
the switch panel B into the front guides, fully NOTICE
insert the panel and press downwards until it
f Use the towing lug only for an emergency to
engages securely.
remove the vehicle off the road. The towing lug
2. Press down the selector lever gate A until it
is to be used only to pull the vehicle onto the
engages securely.
flat bed, tractor or towing apparatus if the
vehicle will roll freely. Under no circumstances
is the vehicle to be secured using the towing
lug.
f Never use the towing lug to tow this or any
other vehicle.
f Bear in mind the limited ground clearance of
your car on uneven surfaces,
Fitting the towing lug

When fitting on the rear of the vehicle, the license
plate must be removed.
280 Minor Repairs

1. Press the lower edge of the appropriate plastic

cover into the bumper until the cover
disengages.
2. Pull cover out of the bumper and let it hang by
its thread.
3. Screw in towing lug A as far as it will go
(left-hand thread) and tighten hand-tight.
Front towing lug Pulling vehicle onto flat bed

Removing the towing lug 1. Position wooden ramps at the base of the flat
1. Unscrew the towing lug A. bed to reduce the angle of the pull.
2. Insert plastic cover at the lower edge of the 2. Reel in the hoist cable and check the underside
opening. of the vehicle for any interference.
3. Fold the cover up and press on its upper edge
to engage it in the bumper.
4. Store the towing lug in the tool box.
Minor Repairs 281

Information
f Check the final inspection date on the fire
extinguisher. If the fire extinguisher is used
after its inspection interval has elapsed, it may
not work properly.
f Always read the operating instructions on the
fire extinguisher.
f Observe the fire extinguisher manufacturer’s
safety instructions on the label at the fire
extinguisher handle.
f The fire extinguisher should be checked to
ensure correct operation by a specialist
workshop every 1-2 years.
f Have the fire extinguisher refilled after use.
Tying down vehicle on flat bed Fire extinguisher

1. Carefully feed towing straps through the In cars with a fire extinguisher, the extinguisher is
opening in the rear wheels. located under the front passenger seat.
Make sure metal parts of straps do not f To remove the fire extinguisher in case of an
damage rim. emergency, hold the extinguisher with one
Make sure the strap is flat over the rim bead. hand and press the button PRESS on the fire
Make sure brake backing plate is not extinguisher holder with the other hand
damaged. (arrow).
2. Secure straps to rear of flat bed.
3. Reel in hoist cable only far enough to tension
tie-down straps.
Transporting the vehicle on car trains,
ferries and car transporters
f Tie the vehicle down only at its wheels.
f Deactivate interior surveillance and the
inclination sensor.
f Please see the chapter “ALARM SYSTEM AND
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT MONITORING”
on page 216.
282 Minor Repairs

Reifendruck_TechnischeDaten.fm Seite 283 Mittwoch, 9. April 2014 3:12 15
Tire Pressure and Technical Data

Vehicle Identification Data ............................284
Engine Data................................................285
Driving Performance....................................285
Wheels, Tires..............................................286
Tire Pressure for Cold Tires (68 °F/ 20 °C) ...287
Weights......................................................288
Dimensions.................................................288
Filling Capacities .........................................289
Tire Pressure and Technical Data 283

Vehicle identification number Safety compliance sticker Tire pressure plate
Vehicle Identification Data Safety compliance sticker Tire pressure plate

When ordering spare parts or making inquiries, The safety compliance sticker is your assurance The plate is attached to the door aperture area on
always quote the vehicle identification number. that your new Porsche complies with all applicable the driver’s side.
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards which
Vehicle identification number were in effect at the time the vehicle was
Vehicle data carrier
You will find the vehicle identification number at manufactured. You will find the vehicle data carrier in the
the bottom left behind the windshield and under The sticker also shows the month and year of “Maintenance” booklet.
the front passenger’s seat. production and the vehicle identification number of It contains all important data about your vehicle.
your car (perforations) as well as the Gross This data carrier cannot be re-ordered if it is lost
Vehicle Weight Rating and the Gross Axle Weight or damaged.
Rating.
284 Tire Pressure and Technical Data

Engine Data
911 Turbo 911 Turbo S
Number of cylinders 6 6
Displacement 231.9 cu. in. (3,800 cm3) 231.9 cu. in. (3,800 cm3)
Max. engine power
520 hp (338 kW) 560 hp (412 kW)
as per 80/1269/EEC
At engine speed 6,000-6,500 rpm 6,500-6,750 rpm
Max. torque 487 ftlb. (660 Nm) 553 ftlb. (700 Nm)
as per 80/1269/EEC Overboost: 524 ftlb. (710 Nm) Overboost: 553 ftlb. (750 Nm)
1,950-5,000 rpm 2,100-4,250 rpm
At engine speed
Overboost: 2,100-4,250 rpm Overboost: 2,200-4,000 rpm
Maximum permitted engine speed 7,000 rpm 7,200 rpm
Driving Performance
The specifications refer to a vehicle with DIN curb weight without performance-reducing additional equipment (e.g. special tires).
Acceleration 0–100 km/h (62 mph)

Maximum track speed (values in brackets
relate to “Sport Plus” mode)
911 Turbo Coupé 196 mph (315 km/h) 3.4 (3.2) seconds
911 Turbo S Coupé 198 mph (318 km/h) (3.1) seconds
911 Turbo Cabriolet 196 mph (315 km/h) 3.5 (3.3) seconds
911 Turbo S Cabriolet 198 mph (318 km/h) (3.2) seconds

Wheels, Tires
f Approval of tire and wheel sizes is granted based on extensive testing.
By fitting tires that have been approved by Porsche, you can be sure that you have the best possible tires for your Porsche.
The load capacity coefficient (e.g. “91”) and maximum speed code letter (e.g. “Y”) for permitted top speed are minimum requirements.
When fitting new tires or changing tires: Please see the chapter “TIRES AND WHEELS” on page 244.
f Snow chain clearance can only be guaranteed with the tires marked 1). Snow chains can only be fitted on the rear wheels. Observe state or province-
specific laws regarding maximum speeds with fitted snow chains. Only use Porsche approved fine-link cross-type or edge chains.
f Your Porsche dealer will be pleased to advise you about the current approval status for tires, wheels and snow chains.
20-inch wheel FA / RA
8.5J x20, RO51 / 11J x20, RO56 1) 9J x20, RO51 / 11.5J x20, RO56
5 holes and central lock
Summer tires FA / RA 245/35 ZR 20 (91Y) / 305/30 ZR 20 (103Y) XL 245/35 ZR 20 (91Y) / 305/30 ZR 20 (103Y) XL
Snow tires FA / RA 245/35 R 20 91V / 295/30 R 20 97V 1)
20-inch wheel FA / RA
8.5J x20, RO51 / 11J x20, RO59 1)
Winter wheel with central lock
20-inch winter wheel FA / RA,

5-hole
8.5J x20, RO51 / 11J x20, RO52
not for Turbo S,
not for vehicles with PCCB brake
Winter tires FA / RA 245/35 R 20 91V / 295/30 R 20 97V
FA = front axle, RA = rear axle
h DANGER Improper Tire Size

Installation of sizes not authorized by Porsche
may impair driving stability and could result in loss
of control of the vehicle.
f Before mounting new tires check with your
authorized Porsche dealer for a current list of
approved tires.

Tire Pressure for Cold Tires (68 °F/ 20 °C)

These standard and comfort tire pressures apply only to the tire makes and types approved by Porsche.
Standard tire pressure for summer tires
f The load condition of the vehicle must be set and comfort pressure/standard pressure selected on the multi-function display.
The tire pressure must be changed according to the vehicle load. Please see the chapter “SELECTING LOAD IN THE TPMS MENU” on page 110.
Part load Full load

FA RA FA RA
34 psi/ 43 psi/ 37 psi/ 47 psi/
911 Turbo, 911 Turbo S 2.4 bar/ 3.0 bar/ 2.6 bar/ 3.3 bar/
240 kPa 300 kPa 260 kPa 330 kPa
Standard tire pressure for snow tires

f The load condition of the vehicle must be set on the multi-function display. The tire pressure must be changed according to the vehicle load.
Please see the chapter “SELECTING LOAD IN THE TPMS MENU” on page 110.
Part load Full load

FA RA FA RA
31 psi/ 39 psi/ 34 psi/ 43 psi/
220 kPa 270 kPa 240 kPa 300 kPa
Comfort tire pressure for summer tires up to 165 mph (270 km/h)
The comfort tire pressure speed threshold permitted for your vehicle depends on the national type standardization and is displayed under
“Comfort pressure” in the “Tire pressure” menu on the multi-function display.
f The load condition of the vehicle must be set on the multi-function display. The tire pressure must be changed according to the vehicle load.
Please see the chapter “SELECTING LOAD IN THE TPMS MENU” on page 110.
Please see the chapter “SELECTING COMFORT/STANDARD PRESSURE IN THE TPMS MENU” on page 110.
Part load Full load

FA RA FA RA
31 psi/ 36 psi/ 33 psi/ 40 psi/
220 kPa 250 kPa 230 kPa 280 kPa
FA = front axle, RA = rear axle

Weights
911 Turbo Coupé 911 Turbo S Coupé 911 Turbo Cabriolet 911 Turbo S Cabriolet
Empty weight (depending on equipment) 3,516 lbs. to 3,704 lbs. 3,538 lbs. to 3,704 lbs. 3,814 lbs. to 3,671 lbs. 3,814 lbs. to 3,693 lbs.
per DIN 70020 (1,595 kg to 1,680 kg) (1,605 kg to 1,680 kg) (1,665 kg to 1,730 kg) (1,675 kg to 1,730 kg)
Empty weight (depending on equipment) 3,682 lbs. to 3,869 lbs. 3,704 lbs. to 3,869 lbs. 3,836 lbs. to 3,979 lbs. 3,858 lbs. to 3,979 lbs.
per 70/156/EEC1) (1,670 kg to 1,755 kg) (1,680 kg to 1,755 kg) (1,740 kg to 1,805 kg) (1,750 kg to 1,805 kg)
Maximum axle load, front2) 1,764 lbs. (800 kg) 1,764 lbs. (800 kg) 1,786 lbs. (810 kg) 1,786 lbs. (810 kg)
Maximum axle load, rear2) 2,690 lbs. (1,220 kg) 2,690 lbs. (1,220 kg) 2,778 lbs. (1,260 kg) 2,778 lbs. (1,260 kg)
Maximum Gross vehicle weight2) 4,387 lbs. (1,990 kg) 4,387 lbs. (1,990 kg) 4,508 lbs. (2,045 kg) 4,508 lbs. (2,045 kg)
Maximum roof load3) 165 lbs. (75 kg) 165 lbs. (75 kg) – –
1) Curb weight includes 165 lbs. (75 kg) driver and baggage share.
2) The maximum vehicle weight and maximum axle loads must not be exceeded.
Notice: If additional accessories are installed, the maximum load will be correspondingly less.
3) Only use Roof Transport Systems from the Porsche Tequipment product range for your car or Roof Transport Systems that have been
tested and approved by Porsche.
Dimensions
911 Turbo Coupé 911 Turbo S Coupé 911 Turbo Cabriolet 911 Turbo S Cabriolet
Length 177.4 in. (4,506 mm) 177.4 in. (4,506 mm) 177.4 in. (4,506 mm) 177.4 in. (4,506 mm)
Width without exterior mirrors 74.02 in. (1,880 mm) 74.02 in. (1,880 mm) 74.02 in. (1,880 mm) 74.02 in. (1,880 mm)
Width with exterior mirrors 77.87 in. (1,978 mm) 77.87 in. (1,978 mm) 77.87 in. (1,978 mm) 77.87 in. (1,978 mm)
Height at DIN curb weight 51.02 in. (1,296 mm) 51.02 in. (1,296 mm) 50,87 in. (1,292 mm) 50,87 in. (1,292 mm)
Wheelbase 96.46 in. (2,450 mm) 96.46 in. (2,450 mm) 96.46 in. (2,450 mm) 96.46 in. (2,450 mm)
Ground clearance
4.17 in. (106 mm) 4.09 in. (104 mm) 4.17 in. (106 mm) 4.09 in. (104 mm)
at maximum gross weight
Turning circle 34.8 ft. (10.6 m) 34.8 ft. (10.6 m) 34.8 ft. (10.6 m) 34.8 ft. (10.6 m)

Filling Capacities
Only use fluids and fuels approved by Porsche. Your Porsche dealer will be pleased to advise you.
Engine oil change quantity with oil filter approx. 1.98 US gallons (7.5 liters)
approx. 18.0 US gallons (68 liters),
Fuel tank
including approx. 3.17 US gallons (12 liters) reserve
The engine is designed to provide optimum performance and fuel consumption if unleaded
premium fuel with 98 RON/88 MON (93 CLC or AKI) is used.
If unleaded fuels with octane numbers of less than RON 98/MON 88 (93 CLC or AKI) are
Fuel octane rating
used, the engine’s “Electronic Octane™ knock control” automatically adapts the ignition timing.
Porsche recommends that you use fuel with at least 95 RON/85 MON (90 CLC or AKI) in your
vehicle.
Windshield/headlight washer system approx. 1.59 US gallons (6 liters)

Index
A Air-conditioning system Opening .......................................................... 195
Automatic load switch-off ................................... 55 ASR (Anti-slip control)
A/C button Extended ventilation panel .................................. 59 Functional description....................................... 182
Air-conditioning system .......................................56 Information on air-conditioning compressor.......... 55 Assigning MFS button (◊) ............................................. 127
A/C MAX button Setting air distribution ........................................ 58 Assistance systems
Air-conditioning system .......................................56 Setting air quantity............................................. 58 Active Safe (PAS) ............................................. 128
ABD (automatic brake differential) Setting automatic air-recirculation mode .............. 57 Assistance when driving uphill
Functional description.......................................182 Setting temperature........................................... 58 Functional description....................................... 184
ABS (anti-lock brake system) Switching A/C MAX mode on/off......................... 56 Audio
Functional description.......................................184 Switching A/C mode on/off ................................ 56 Tips ................................................................ 168
Warning light on instrument panel ......................185 Switching air-conditioning compressor on/off....... 56 Audio interface, installation position .............................. 171
ACC Switching air-recirculation mode on and off .......... 57 AUTO (light switch) ........................................................ 79
Adaptive cruise control .....................................157 Temperature sensor........................................... 55 Driving light assistant ......................................... 79
Active Safe (PAS) Air-recirculation button Auto Start Stop function
Settings in multi-purpose display........................128 Air-conditioning system ...................................... 57 Display............................................................ 151
Adaptive cruise control ................................................157 Alarm button................................................................. 17 Exceptions ...................................................... 149
Display principle...............................................160 Alarm system Operating principle........................................... 149
Exceptions.......................................................165 Avoiding false alarms ....................................... 217 Preconditions................................................... 149
Functional description.......................................157 Functional description ...................................... 216 Starting engine automatically ............................ 149
Interrupting/resuming control ............................164 Persons/animals remaining in the locked vehicle 216 Stopping engine automatically........................... 149
Operating principle ...........................................159 Switching off ................................................... 216 Switching on and off................................. 150, 175
Operating states ..............................................161 Switching off interior surveillance and Automatic brake differential (ABD)
Porsche Active Safe .........................................167 inclination sensor............................................. 216 Functional description....................................... 182
Radar sensor ...................................................158 Switching on ................................................... 216 Automatic Coming Home lights, courtesy lighting
Setting the desired distance..............................162 Alcantara, care instructions ......................................... 237 Entry function .................................................... 80
Setting/changing desired speed ........................161 Alloy wheels Welcome Home function ..................................... 80
Switching on/off...............................................161 Care instructions ............................................. 235 Automatic driving light assistant
Adaptive light system, driving light assistant ....................79 Inscription ....................................................... 253 High Beam Assistant .......................................... 81
Adhesive foils, care instructions....................................235 Allwheel drive Automatic speed control (cruise control)
Adjusting seat position ...................................................32 Functional description ...................................... 180 Accelerating .................................................... 156
Aftermarket Alarms......................................................169 Torque distribution ................................... 114, 116 Decelerating .................................................... 156
Air cleaner, maintenance instructions ............................244 Alternator Functional description....................................... 155
Air distribution ...............................................................58 Vehicle electrical system warning........................ 95 Interrupting operation ....................................... 156
Air vents Aluminum rims Storing speed.................................................. 156
Adjusting ...........................................................59 Care instructions ............................................. 235 Switching off ................................................... 157
Opening/closing.................................................59 Inscription ....................................................... 253 Switching on.................................................... 156
Airbag Ambient lighting ............................................................ 84 Automatic transmission................................................ 172
Airbag warning light on the tachometer ................42 Antifreeze AUX interface, installation position ................................ 171
Automatic deactivation of the passenger airbag....41 in coolant........................................................ 242
Care instructions ..............................................237 In washer fluid ................................................. 224
Disposal ............................................................39 Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
B
Function ............................................................39 Functional description ...................................... 184 Baby seat
Functional description.........................................38 Anti-slip control (ASR) Installing with LATCH system............................... 46
Installation location.............................................38 Functional description ...................................... 182 LATCH restraint system ...................................... 46
Passenger airbag warning light............................42 Armrest Prescribed installation direction (depending on
Air-conditioning compressor Opening front oddments tray ............................ 194 weight of child) .................................................. 43
Information on air-conditioning compressor ..........55 Ashtray Battery
Emptying ........................................................ 195 Care ............................................................... 272
290 Index
Changing in car key..........................................275 Engine compartment lid ..................................... 26 Center armrest

Charging..........................................................274 Opening convertible top ..................................... 68 Opening front oddments tray.............................194
Emergency starting with jumper cables..............273 Roll-over protection ............................................ 48 Central bolt tightening torque (wheels)...........................262
General information ..........................................271 Car care Central locking ......................................................23, 258
Installation position...........................................271 Airbags ........................................................... 237 Emergency operation in the event of a fault ..........29
Procedure after connection ...............................273 Alcantara ........................................................ 237 Locking vehicle door with car key
Replacing ........................................................272 Alloy wheels .................................................... 235 (remote control) .................................................22
Vehicle electrical system warning ........................95 Fabric linings ................................................... 237 Locking vehicle door with Porsche Entry & Drive...22
Winter driving...................................................272 Headlights, plastic components, adhesive foils... 235 Opening and locking vehicle door from inside .......23
Before driving off.............................................................5 Leather ........................................................... 236 Unlocking vehicle door with car key
Belts Leather care for seats with seat ventilation ........ 236 (remote control) .................................................21
Care instructions ..............................................237 Paint............................................................... 234 Unlocking vehicle door with
Fastening ..........................................................37 Safety belts..................................................... 237 Porsche Entry & Drive ........................................21
Opening belt buckle............................................38 Seals .............................................................. 236 Central locking system
Safety-belt pretensioners, functional description ...37 Underbody protection ...................................... 235 Functional description.........................................18
Warning light on the tachometer ..........................37 Use of high-pressure cleaning equipment ........... 232 Changing button assignment on multi-function steering
Brake booster .............................................................154 Washing the vehicle, instructions....................... 232 wheel..........................................................................127
Brake disks.....................................................................3 Wheel attachment faces ................................... 257 Changing car key (remote control) battery .....................275
Brake fluid ......................................................................3 Wheel bolts ..................................................... 257 Changing wheels .........................................................254
Changing .........................................................243 Windows ......................................................... 234 Chassis control systems
Warning light on speedometer ...........................243 Car key (remote control) Overview (PTM, PSM, PASM, PDCC, PTV Plus) ....179
Brake pads .....................................................................3 Changing battery ............................................. 275 Chassis number, position .............................................284
Breaking in new brake pads ..................................6 Emergency operation of key/control unit in Chassis setup
Warning message, brakes.................................154 ignition lock....................................................... 28 Functional description.......................................185
Brake pedal ................................................................153 Locking vehicle door .......................................... 22 Selecting .........................................................186
Brake wear Unlocking vehicle door ....................................... 21 Check Engine (emission control)
Warning message.............................................154 Car Telephone............................................................. 169 Functional description.........................................95
Brakes Care instructions Warning light......................................................95
Applying/releasing parking brake.......................151 Airbags ........................................................... 237 Checking pressure.......................................................256
Brake pad warning message .............................154 Alcantara ........................................................ 237 Child restraint anchorages..............................................47
Brake pedal .....................................................153 Alloy wheels .................................................... 235 Child restraint system
Brake wear warning message ...........................154 Car washing .................................................... 232 Installing with LATCH system ...............................46
Break in new brake pads.......................................6 Carpet ............................................................ 236 LATCH restraint system ......................................46
Footbrake........................................................152 Fabric linings ................................................... 237 Child seat
Test stand ...............................................221, 241 Headlights, plastic components, adhesive foils... 235 Installing with LATCH system ...............................46
Break in hints ..................................................................6 Leather ........................................................... 236 LATCH restraint system ......................................46
Breaking in Leather care for seats with seat ventilation ........ 236 Prescribed installation direction (depending on
Engine.................................................................6 Mats ............................................................... 236 weight of child)...................................................43
Engine oil and fuel consumption during Paint............................................................... 234 Child seat bracket .........................................................46
break-in period .....................................................6 Radar sensor................................................... 235 Chrono .......................................................................114
Hints ...................................................................6 Safety belts..................................................... 237 Cigarette Lighter .........................................................196
New brake pads and brake disks...........................6 Seals .............................................................. 236 Cleaning the air deflector ...............................................67
New tires.............................................................6 Ultrasound sensors, ParkAssist......................... 235 Clock..................................................................114, 124
Brief overview Underbody protection ...................................... 235 Closing
Opening and locking the vehicle from outside .......19 Use of high-pressure cleaning equipment ........... 232 Locking vehicle door from inside .........................23
Wheel attachment faces ................................... 257 Persons/animals remaining in the vehicle .............22
C Wheel bolts ..................................................... 257 Vehicle door with car key (remote control) ............22
Windows ......................................................... 234 Vehicle door with Porsche Entry & Drive (keyless) .22
Cabriolet Carpet, care instructions ............................................. 236 Closing convertible top ..................................................69
Closing convertible top .......................................69 Catalytic converter ...................................................... 226 Coasting .....................................................................150
Convertible top care .........................................233 Emission control (Check Engine) ......................... 95 Coasting mode ................................................174
Emergency operation .........................................70
Index 291
Coasting mode............................................................150 D E
Cockpit.........................................................................10
Adjusting lighting................................................82 Data carrier for vehicle data ........................................ 284 Electric parking brake
Cooling system, temperature gauge ....................92 Daytime driving lights .................................................... 79 Automatic parking brake release upon
Engine oil temperature gauge .............................92 Diagnostic socket ............................................... 146, 267 driving off........................................................151
Fuel gauge ........................................................94 Digital speedometer...................................................... 93 Emergency braking function..............................151
Odometer..........................................................93 Dimensions ................................................................ 288 Operating ........................................................151
Speedometer.....................................................92 Dimming Releasing ........................................................151
Tachometer .......................................................92 Adjusting brightness of instrument lighting........... 82 Testing on brake test stand.......................221, 241
Warning and indicator lights, overview .................90 Adjusting brightness of interior lighting................ 84 Warning light....................................................151
Comfort Entry function...................................................34 Direction indicator, stalk ................................................ 82 Electrical System
Comfort memory.........................................................143 Displacement, Technical data....................................... 285 Emergency unlocking, front luggage
Comfort pressure Door compartment lid ..............................................270
Selecting.........................................................110 De-icing door lock............................................ 232 Emergency flasher.........................................................83
Speed warning.................................................111 Locking if persons/animals are remaining in Emergency key .......................................................17, 29
Comfort settings vehicle.............................................................. 22 Emergency operation
Storing on memory buttons ..............................143 Locking with car key (remote control).................. 22 Filler flap .........................................................229
Storing on the car key ......................................143 Locking with Porsche Entry & Drive (keyless) ....... 22 of ignition key/control unit in ignition lock.............28
Comfort tire pressure Malfunctions when opening and closing ............... 26 of luggage compartment lid ................................26
Speed warning.................................................111 Opening and locking from inside ......................... 23 of sunroof..........................................................65
Compressor Unlocking with car key (remote control) ............... 21 of tailgate..........................................................26
Tire pressure ...................................................198 Unlocking with Porsche Entry & Drive (keyless) .... 21 Emergency operation convertible top ..............................70
Control systems Door locking, automatic ................................................ 22 Emergency release
Overview (PTM, PSM, PASM, PDCC, PTV Plus) ....179 Door opening in an emergency situation ......................... 22 Lids ................................................................270
Convertible top .............................................................67 Doors Emergency starting for flat battery ...............................273
Care ...............................................................233 Cabriolet windows ............................................. 68 Emergency starting with jumper cables .........................273
Closing..............................................................69 Drink holder................................................................ 194 Emission control (Check Engine)
Emergency operation .........................................70 Drive Functional description.........................................95
Opening ............................................................68 The vehicle cannot be unlocked .......................... 26 Engine
Convertible-top compartment lid Drive-Off Assistant....................................................... 184 Break in hints.......................................................6
Service position .................................................26 Driver memory package .............................................. 143 Checking oil level .....................................101, 222
Coolant Driving Cooling system ..................................................92
Checking level .................................................242 In Sport mode ..................................................... 3 Oil-level gauge .................................................101
Topping up ......................................................242 On the race circuit ............................................... 3 Starting...........................................................148
Cooling system Driving light assistant Starting engine automatically
Warning on multi-function display .........................92 Daytime driving lights......................................... 79 (Auto Start Stop function)
Cornering light Dynamic cornering light ..................................... 80 Starting manually (Auto Start Stop function) .......150
Dynamic ............................................................80 Low beam......................................................... 79 Stopping .........................................................148
Countersteering assistance ..........................................182 Switching on ..................................................... 79 Stopping automatically (Auto Start Stop function)149
Courtesy lighting, Entry function .....................................80 Driving off Technical data..................................................285
Crankcase ventilation...................................................226 Automatic parking brake release upon Topping up oil ..................................................222
Cruise control driving off ....................................................... 152 Engine compartment lid
Accelerating ....................................................156 Launch Control ................................................ 175 Cabriolet ...........................................................26
Decelerating ....................................................156 Driving performance, Technical data............................. 285 Service position .................................................26
Functional description.......................................155 DVD Engine drag torque control (MSR)
Interrupting operation .......................................156 Installation location .......................................... 170 Functional description.......................................182
Storing speed ..................................................156 Navigation....................................................... 170 Engine oil....................................................................221
Switching off ...................................................157 Player............................................................. 170 Change quantity ...............................................289
Switching on....................................................156 Dynamic cornering light................................................. 80 Checking level .................................................222
Cupholder...................................................................194 Dynamic Engine Mounting (PADM)................................. 188 Checking oil level .............................................101
Consumption ...................................................285
Engine oil pressure...........................................129
292 Index
Filler opening ...................................................223 Particle filter, maintenance instructions.............. 244 Ground clearance ............................................................4
General information ..................................221, 222 Fire extinguisher, storage location ................................ 282
Oil-level warning on the multi-function display ......222 Floor mats, care instructions........................................ 236 H
Pressure gauge..................................................93 Fluids and fuels
Temperature gauge ............................................92 Coolant ........................................................... 289 Handbrake (electric parking brake)
Topping up.......................................................222 Engine oil ........................................................ 289 Operating ........................................................151
Entry & Drive Fuel ................................................................ 289 Releasing ........................................................152
Locking vehicle door with Porsche Entry & Drive...22 Washer fluid .................................................... 289 Head restraints..............................................................32
Switching off interior surveillance with Folding rear seat backrests forward ............................... 35 Headlights
Porsche Entry & Drive ......................................217 Folding the seat backrest forward .................................. 34 Adjusting .........................................................277
Unlocking vehicle door with Footbrake Care instructions ..............................................235
Porsche Entry & Drive ........................................21 Safety notes.................................................... 152 Operating washer system ...................................87
Entry function, courtesy lighting when entering Four-wheel drive Heated rear window
the vehicle ....................................................................80 Allwheel display ....................................... 114, 116 Switching on/off.................................................60
Ergonomic settings Functional description ...................................... 180 High Beam Assistant......................................................81
Storing on memory buttons...............................143 Front seat Activating/deactivating .....................................120
Storing on the car key ......................................143 Adjusting seat position ....................................... 32 High-beam headlight ......................................................82
Exhaust pipes..................................................................4 Front spoiler ............................................................... 190 Stalk .................................................................82
Extending spoilers Fuel High-pressure cleaning equipment
Extending and retracting ...................................191 Economy ........................................................ 226 Instructions for use ..........................................232
Operating principle ...........................................190 Evaporation control.......................................... 231 Hillholder (Drive-off Assistant)
Exterior mirror Fuel can .......................................................... 229 Functional description.......................................184
Adjusting ...........................................................49 Fuel gauge ........................................................ 94 HOLD function
Adjusting as parking aid......................................50 Fuel reserve warning .......................................... 94 Functional description.......................................184
Folding in...........................................................50 Fuels containing ethanol ................................... 230 HomeLink (garage door opener)
Storing settings (memory)...................................50 Octane rating .................................................. 227 Deleting programmed signals............................212
Exterior mirror heating Portable fuel containers ....................................... 4 Functional description.......................................211
Switching on/off.................................................60 Quality ............................................................ 227 Operating ........................................................212
External audio source, interface....................................171 Recommendation............................................. 230 Programming signal (changeable code system) ..213
Refueling......................................................... 227 Programming signal (fixed code system) ............212
Tank capacity .................................................. 289 Hot exhaust pipes............................................................4
F Fuel can ..................................................................... 229
Fabric linings (care instructions)....................................237 Fuel container ............................................................. 229 I
Faults Fuel containers, portable ................................................. 4
Emergency operation of ignition key/control Identification number, position ......................................284
Fuel gauge ................................................................... 94 Ignition lock
unit in ignition lock..............................................28 Fuel level indicator
Emergency operation of powerlift tailgate ............26 Emergency operation of the key ..........................28
Fuel gauge ........................................................ 94 Functional description.......................................146
Emergency operation of slide/tilt roof ..................65 Fuse, changing electric fuses....................................... 267
Emergency operation of the filler flap.................229 Removing ignition key, PDK transmission ...........174
ParkAssist .......................................................209 Immobilizer
Power windows ..................................................63 G Functional description.......................................217
Slide/tilt roof .....................................................65 Garage door opener Switching on/off...............................................217
When opening and closing ..................................26 Deleting programmed signals ........................... 212 Inclination sensor
Filler flap, emergency operation ....................................229 Functional description ...................................... 211 Function indication............................................217
Filling capacities Operating........................................................ 212 Switching off with button in door handle
Coolant ...........................................................289 Programming signal (changeable code system).. 213 (Porsche Entry & Drive).....................................217
Engine oil ........................................................289 Programming signal (fixed code system) ........... 212 Switching off with car key (remote control) .........216
Fuel.................................................................289 Gear display ................................................................. 94 Instrument cluster
Overview of fluids and fuels...............................289 G-Force display ........................................................... 116 Adjusting lighting................................................82
Washer fluid.....................................................289 Glove box Cooling system, temperature gauge ....................92
Filter Locking........................................................... 193 Engine oil temperature gauge..............................92
Air cleaner, maintenance instructions .................244 Opening .......................................................... 193 Fuel gauge.........................................................94
Index 293
Odometer..........................................................93 Prescribed installation direction of child seat Topping up engine oil........................................222

Speedometer.....................................................92 (depending on weight of child) ............................ 43 Malfunctions
Tachometer .......................................................92 Lateral acceleration forces Emergency operation of ignition key in
Warning and indicator lights, overview .................90 Display ........................................................... 116 ignition lock .......................................................28
Instrument lighting .........................................................82 Launch Control ........................................................... 175 Emergency operation of luggage
Instrument Panel ...........................................................11 Leather, care instructions ............................................ 236 compartment lid ................................................26
Instrument panel Seats with seat ventilation ................................ 236 Emergency operation of sunroof..........................65
Adjusting lighting................................................82 Lids Emergency operation of tailgate..........................26
Cooling system, temperature gauge ....................92 Emergency unlocking, luggage compartment lid 270 ParkAssist .......................................................209
Engine oil temperature gauge .............................92 Light Power windows..................................................63
Fuel gauge ........................................................94 Headlight flasher ............................................... 82 Storing end position of the sunroof......................66
Odometer..........................................................93 Switching on courtesy lighting when Storing end position of the windows ....................63
Speedometer.....................................................92 entering the vehicle ........................................... 80 When opening and closing ..................................26
Tachometer .......................................................92 Switching on Welcome Home function ................. 80 Memory ................................................................34, 143
Warning and indicator lights, overview .................90 Light switch Minor repairs
Interior lighting AUTO function ................................................... 79 In the event of a flat tire....................................265
Ambient lighting .................................................84 Overview........................................................... 79 Mirrors
Interior lights .....................................................84 Lights Adjusting exterior mirrors ...................................49
Orientation lighting .............................................84 Care instructions ............................................. 235 Adjusting exterior mirrors as parking aid ......50, 210
Interior lights.................................................................84 Replacing bulbs ............................................... 276 Exterior mirror heating........................................60
Interior mirror Switching interior lights on/off automatically ........ 84 Folding in exterior mirrors...................................50
Switching automatic anti-dazzle function on/off ....50 Switching on when entering the vehicle ............... 80 Storing exterior mirror settings (memory) ............50
Interior surveillance .....................................................217 Switching on when leaving the vehicle ................. 80 Switching automatic anti-dazzle function on and
Switching off with button in door handle Limp-home mode, PDK ................................................ 178 off ....................................................................50
(Porsche Entry & Drive) ....................................217 Loading information .................................................... 204 Vanity mirror ......................................................53
Switching off with car key (remote control).........216 Locking Motion sensor (interior surveillance)
iPod interface, installation position................................171 Closing sunroof ................................................. 63 Switching off with button in door handle
Emergency operation in the event of a fault ......... 29 (Porsche Entry & Drive) ....................................217
J Locking vehicle door from inside......................... 23 Switching off with car key (remote control).........216
Locking vehicle door with car key Multi-function display
Jump-lead starting, external power supply .....................273 (remote control)................................................. 22 Activating functions, opening menus and
Locking vehicle door with Porsche Entry & Drive .. 22 viewing options ..................................................98
K Persons/animals remaining in the vehicle ............ 22 Browsing through long lists .................................98
Key Storing personal settings on the key ................. 143 Checking oil level .............................................101
Changing battery .............................................275 Vehicle door with car key (remote control) ........... 22 Display areas .....................................................97
Emergency operation, ignition lock ......................28 Vehicle door with Porsche Entry & Drive (keyless) 22 Menu overview...................................................99
Locking vehicle door ..........................................22 Longitudinal acceleration forces Operating navigation system .............................104
Removing emergency key .............................17, 29 Display ........................................................... 116 Operating principle .............................................96
Replacement keys..............................................17 Luggage compartment.................................................. 30 Operating with multi-function steering wheel .........97
Storing and retrieving personal settings .............143 Emergency release .......................................... 270 Operating with steering wheel lever .....................96
Unlocking vehicle door .......................................21 Opening ............................................................ 25 Retrieving vehicle information............................100
Keys.............................................................................16 Overview......................................................... 197 Selecting a radio station ...................................102
Kickdown Sport Chrono...................................................115
Porsche Doppelkupplung ..................................176 M Tire Pressure Monitoring System .......................105
Tire pressure warnings .....................................111
Maintenance work Trip information................................................105
L Adding washer fluid ......................................... 224 Using the phone...............................................103
LATCH system ..............................................................46 Changing Air Cleaner ....................................... 244 Multi-function steering wheel
Fastening ..........................................................46 Changing Particle Filter .................................... 244 Assigning diamond button (◊) ...........................127
Installing a child seat ..........................................46 Checking engine oil level .................................. 222 Functional description.........................................52
Checking the Coolant Level and Adding Coolant . 242 Multif. key (◊) ....................................................97
Notes on maintenance ............................. 219, 240
294 Index
Operating principle .............................................97 Orientation lighting ........................................................ 84 PCCB (Porsche Ceramic Composite Brake)
Telephone function .............................................53 Overboost function...................................................... 188 General information ..............................................4
Oxygen sensor............................................................ 226 PCM (Porsche Communication Management) .................170
N PDCC (Porsche Dynamic Chassis Control) .....................187
P Functional description.......................................187
Navigation system .......................................................170 Overview .........................................................179
Using via multi-function display ..........................104 PADM, Dynamic Engine Mounting ................................. 188 Warning message on the multi-function display ...187
Paint PDK
O Care instructions ............................................. 234 Coasting..................................................150, 174
Polishing ......................................................... 234 Coasting mode ................................................174
Octane rating ..............................................................230 Preserving....................................................... 234
Octane rating, petrol....................................................227 PDK selector lever
Removing spots and stains............................... 234 Emergency release...........................................279
Odometer Repairing damage............................................ 234
Display ..............................................................93 PDK selector lever emergency release ..........................279
Panic button ................................................................. 17 PDK transmission ........................................................172
Resetting...........................................................93 ParkAssist
Off delay Faults ..............................................................173
Functional description ...................................... 207 Kickdown.........................................................176
Switching on ......................................................80 Sensors .......................................................... 207
Oil ..............................................................................221 Limp-home mode .............................................178
Switching off ................................................... 209 Selector-lever Positions ....................................174
Change quantity ...............................................289 Parking
Checking level..........................................101, 222 Shifting gears on the steering wheel ..................176
Applying the parking brake ............................... 151 Sport mode .....................................................175
Consumption .......................................................6 Locking the vehicle ............................................ 22
General information ..................................221, 222 Warning messages ...........................................178
PDK transmission ............................................ 172 Performance ...............................................................116
Level gauge.....................................................101 Parking aid
Oil pressure .....................................................129 Performance tests on roller-type test stands..........221, 241
Sensors for ParkAssist..................................... 207 Performance, Technical data ........................................285
Oil-level warning on the multi-function display ......222 Swivelling down mirror glass............................... 50
Pressure gauge..................................................93 Petrol
Parking brake Fuel gauge.........................................................94
Temperature gauge ............................................92 Automatic parking brake release upon
Topping up.......................................................222 Fuel reserve warning ..........................................94
driving off ....................................................... 152 Octane rating...................................................227
On-board computer Engaging the parking brake automatically when
Measuring oil level............................................101 Portable fuel container......................................229
the vehicle is stationary.................................... 152 Portable fuel containers ........................................4
Menu overview ...................................................99 Operating........................................................ 151
Multi-function display ..........................................96 Quality.............................................................227
Releasing ........................................................ 151 Refueling .........................................................227
Operating principle .............................................96 Testing on brake test stand ...................... 221, 241
Storing and retrieving personal settings .............143 Tank capacity...................................................289
Parking/pulling out Plastic components, care instructions ...........................235
Tire Pressure Monitoring ...................................105 Functional description, ParkAssist ..................... 207
Opening and closing Porsche Active Safe.....................................................167
Sensors for ParkAssist..................................... 207 Porsche Active Suspension Management (PASM)
Brief overview ....................................................19 Particle filter, maintenance instructions ......................... 244
Engine compartment lid ......................................24 Functional description.......................................185
PASM (Porsche Active Suspension Management) Overview .........................................................179
Locking vehicle door with car key Functional description ...................................... 185
(remote control) .................................................22 Warning message on the multi-function display ...186
Overview......................................................... 179 Porsche Ceramic Composite Brake (PCCB)
Locking vehicle door with Porsche Entry & Drive...22 Selecting chassis setup.................................... 186
Opening and locking vehicle door from inside .......23 General information ..............................................4
Warning message on the multi-function display... 186 Porsche Communication Management (PCM) .................170
Unlocking vehicle door with car key PASS AIR BAG OFF
(remote control) .................................................21 Porsche Doppelkupplung
Warning light in the center console...................... 42 Coasting..........................................................174
Unlocking vehicle door with Passenger airbag
Porsche Entry & Drive ........................................21 Porsche Doppelkupplung (PDK).....................................172
Automatic deactivation of the passenger airbag ... 41 Coasting..........................................................150
Opening and closing engine compartment lid ...................24 Warning light in the center console...................... 42
Opening and locking Faults ..............................................................173
Passenger mirror Kickdown.........................................................176
Storing/retrieving personal settings ...................143 Adjusting........................................................... 49
Sunroof .............................................................63 Launch Control.................................................175
Adjusting as parking aid ..................................... 50 Limp-home mode .............................................178
The vehicle cannot be unlocked...........................26 Folding in .......................................................... 50
Operating in other countries .........................................227 Selector-lever position ......................................172
Index 295
Shifting gears on the steering wheel ..................176 PTV/PTV Plus Roof transport system
Sport mode .....................................................175 Porsche Torque Vectoring ................................ 186 Safety notes ....................................................200
Porsche Dynamic Chassis Control (PDCC) .....................187 Pulling out/parking Running in
Functional description.......................................187 Functional description, ParkAssist..................... 207 Tires ...................................................................6
Overview .........................................................179 Sensors for ParkAssist..................................... 207
Warning message on the multi-function display ...187 S
Porsche Dynamic Light System (PDLS)............................80 R
Porsche Dynamic Light System Plus (PDLS Plus) .............81 Safety belts ..................................................................36
Porsche Entry & Drive Race circuit .................................................................... 3 Care instructions..............................................237
Inclination sensor .............................................217 Racing Tires ............................................................... 1, 3 Fastening ..........................................................37
Interior surveillance ..........................................217 Radio Safety-belt pretensioners, functional description ...37
Locking the vehicle ............................................22 Tips................................................................ 168 Warning light on the tachometer ..........................37
Unlocking the vehicle..........................................21 Radio remote control..................................................... 16 Safety compliance sticker ............................................284
Porsche Stability Management (PSM) Rain sensor Safety-belts
Functional description...............................180, 181 Adjusting........................................................... 87 Opening belt buckle............................................38
Multi-function light in the tachometer..................183 Switching on ..................................................... 86 Sealant/sealing set for defective tires ...........................265
Overview .........................................................179 Rear axle steering Seals, care instructions................................................236
Switching off ...................................................182 Function.......................................................... 191 Seat heating
Switching on....................................................183 Rear fog light Switching off......................................................35
Porsche Torque Vectoring (PTV)/(PTV Plus) Functional Adjusting the driving light ................................... 80 Switching on......................................................35
Description .................................................................186 Switching on ..................................................... 79 Seat memory ........................................................34, 143
Porsche Torque Vectoring Plus (PTV Plus) Rear seat storage space ............................................... 35 Seat ventilation..............................................................35
Overview .........................................................179 Rear spoiler................................................................ 190 Switching off......................................................35
Porsche Traction Management (PTM) Rear window wiper Switching on......................................................35
Functional description.......................................180 Switching on intermittent operation ..................... 88 Seat-belt pretensioner
Portable fuel container.................................................229 Window wiping .................................................. 88 Functional description.........................................37
Power Steering ...........................................................244 Rear-axle load............................................................. 204 Seats
Power windows Refueling .................................................................... 229 Adjusting seat position .......................................32
Adjusting after connecting battery .......................63 Relays Adjusting the front seat.......................................32
Malfunctions ......................................................63 Replacing........................................................ 267 Child restraint system.........................................42
Opening/closing windows with rocker switch........62 Remote control ............................................................. 16 Head restraints ..................................................32
Overview of driver’s door control panel ................62 Changing battery in car key .............................. 275 Seat adjustment.................................................32
Overview of passenger’s door control panel .........62 Locking vehicle door.......................................... 22 Storing/retrieving seat position .........................143
Storing end position ...........................................63 Unlocking vehicle door ....................................... 21 Security wheel bolts
Pressure Replacement keys......................................................... 17 Storage...........................................................198
Tires (bar/psi)..................................................287 Restraint systems for children Selector lever position display ........................................94
Protection against towing (inclination sensor) Installing with LATCH system .............................. 46 Selector-lever position display, PDK transmission ...........173
Switching off with car key (remote control).........216 LATCH restraint system...................................... 46 Setting air quantity
Switching off with Porsche Entry & Drive............217 Prescribed installation direction (depending on Air-conditioning system.......................................58
PSM (Porsche Stability Management) weight of child) .................................................. 43 Setting automatic air-recirculation mode
Functional description...............................180, 181 Reversing camera ....................................................... 209 Air-conditioning system.......................................57
Multi-function light in the tachometer..................183 Rim Cleaner................................................................ 263 Setting fan
Overview .........................................................179 Roll stabilisation Air-conditioning system.......................................58
Switching off ...................................................182 Porsche Dynamic Chassis Control (PDCC) ......... 187 Setting temperature
Switching on....................................................183 Roll-over protection, Cabriolet ........................................ 48 Air-conditioning system.......................................58
Warning light on the multi-function display ..........273 Roll-up sunblind............................................................. 65 Setting the date ..........................................................124
PTM (Porsche Traction Management) Roof load ................................................................... 288 Setting the time...........................................................124
Functional description.......................................180 Roof Transport System................................................ 200 Settings
PTV Plus (Porsche Torque Vectoring Plus ) Fitting basic carrier.......................................... 200 Adjusting on multi-function display .....................117
Overview .........................................................179 Roof load ........................................................ 288 Retrieving when opening the vehicle ..................144
Weights .......................................................... 288 Storing on the key............................................143
Storing personal settings..................................143
296 Index
Storing vehicle settings ......................................34 Stopping engine automatically (Auto Start Stop Theft protection.....................................................16, 217
Why have the settings changed? ........................144 function).......................................................... 149 Tire
Shifting gears Stopwatch .................................................................. 114 Care................................................................248
Porsche Doppelkupplung (PDK) .........................172 Storage Life .................................................................248
Shift prompt ......................................................93 Glove box........................................................ 193 Traction...........................................................247
Side lights Opening storage compartment in front armrest.. 194 Wear ...............................................................248
Switching on ......................................................79 Storage options............................................... 193 Tire filling compressor .................................................198
Slicks .............................................................................1 Storage compartment Tire pressure
Snow chains Glove box........................................................ 193 Air pressure (bar/psi)........................................287
General information ..........................................251 In front armrest, opening .................................. 194 Comfort pressure.............................................110
Snow tires...................................................................250 Storage .......................................................... 193 Comfort pressure speed warning.......................111
Socket (12 V) ..............................................................196 Storing Current settings ...............................................108
Speed code letter on tire .............................................252 Personal settings............................................. 143 Data (bar/psi) ..................................................287
Speed control (cruise control) Storing end position of the sunroof................................. 66 Fill info ............................................................108
Accelerating ....................................................156 Storing the end position for the power windows............... 63 Speed warning .................................................112
Decelerating ....................................................156 Summer tires System learning ...............................................111
Functional description.......................................155 Changing tires ................................................. 256 Tire pressure plate ...........................................284
Interrupting operation .......................................156 Storage .......................................................... 250 Warnings .........................................................111
Storing speed ..................................................156 Sun visor ...................................................................... 53 Tire pressure monitoring
Switching off....................................................157 Sunblind ....................................................................... 65 Warning light....................................................106
Switching on ....................................................156 Sunroof Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) .......................105
Speed limit..................................................................252 Cleaning the air deflector ................................... 67 Tire pressure plate.......................................................284
Speedometer ..........................................................92, 93 Emergency operation ......................................... 65 Tire sealing compound/sealing set for defective tires .....265
Spoiler, operating principle...........................................190 Functional description ........................................ 63 Tires
Sport Chrono ..............................................................114 Malfunctions...................................................... 65 Breaking in new tires ............................................6
Sport mode ....................................................................3 Storing end position........................................... 66 Changing .........................................................256
Porsche Doppelkupplung ..................................175 Switching automatic anti-dazzle function on and off.......... 50 Checking pressure ...........................................256
Switching on/off...............................................188 Switching emergency flasher on/off................................ 83 Damage ..........................................................248
Sport tires ......................................................................2 Switching on air-recirculation mode Fixing a flat tire ................................................265
Stainless steel tailpipes Air-conditioning system ...................................... 57 General information ..........................................244
Care instructions ..............................................236 Switching on parking light .............................................. 83 Inscription on radial tire ....................................252
Standstill management Replacing ........................................................249
Functional description.......................................184 T Sealant............................................................265
Start/Stop function......................................................149 Setting type and size ........................................109
Starting Tachometer Sidewall...........................................................252
Engine.............................................................148 Display.............................................................. 92 Snow chains (general information) .....................251
Steam-jet cleaners, instructions for use .........................232 Tailpipes Snow tires (general information) ........................250
Steering......................................................................244 Stainless steel, care instructions....................... 236 Sport ..................................................................2
Countersteering assistance...............................182 Tank Storage ...........................................................250
Steering torque pulse...................................................182 Ventilation system............................................ 231 Tire pressure plate ...........................................284
Steering wheel Technical data Tire pressure, data (bar/psi)..............................287
Adjustment ........................................................51 Driving performance ........................................ 285 Valves .............................................................249
Multi-function steering wheel with Engine ............................................................ 285 Tool kit........................................................................198
telephone function..............................................53 Tire pressure (bar/psi) ..................................... 287 Tools ..........................................................................198
Multi-function steering wheel, functional Tires, wheels ................................................... 286 Torque ........................................................................116
description ........................................................52 Weights........................................................... 288 Torque display .............................................................116
Switching Easy Entry function on/off....................34 Technical modifications to the vehicle, information ......... 220 Torque, Technical data .................................................285
Switching heating on/off .....................................51 Telephone................................................................... 169 Towing
Stopping Using via multi-function display.......................... 103 Screwing in towing lug......................................280
Engine.............................................................148 Test stands Towing lug
Brake test ............................................... 221, 241 In the tool kit....................................................198
Performance test..................................... 221, 241
Index 297
TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) .......................105 Adjusting volume of warning and Inscription on alloy wheels ................................253
Transmission information tones ............................................ 126 Inscription on radial tire ....................................252
Porsche Doppelkupplung (PDK) .........................172 Air-conditioning settings ................................... 123 Overview .........................................................286
Transmission and chassis control systems Changing button assignment on multi-function Replacing tires (general information) ..................249
Overview (PSM, PASM, PDCC, PTV Plus) ............179 steering wheel................................................. 127 Rim offset .......................................................286
Transport (on car trains, ferries, etc.) Changing the language .................................... 126 Security wheel bolt (wrench socket)...................257
Securing the vehicle .........................................282 Light and visibility settings................................ 120 Size ................................................................286
Switching off inclination sensor .........................216 Locking settings .............................................. 122 Snow chains (general information) .....................251
Trip counter Porsche Active Safe settings ............................ 128 Snow tires (general information) ........................250
Display ..............................................................93 Resetting to factory settings............................. 117 Storage...........................................................250
Resetting...........................................................93 Selecting settings menu ................................... 117 Tightening torque .............................................258
Trip information ...........................................................105 Setting date and time....................................... 124 Tire pressure plate ...........................................284
Trunk entrapment ..........................................................30 Setting units.................................................... 125 Tire pressure, data (bar/psi) .............................287
Turn signal, stalk ...........................................................82 Storing on person buttons.......................... 34, 143 Tire sealant .....................................................265
Storing on the key ..................................... 34, 143 Wheel attachment faces ...................................257
U Vents Wheel balancing ...............................................250
Adjusting........................................................... 59 Wheel bolts (care instructions)...........................257
Ultrasound sensor, ParkAssist ......................................207 Opening/closing ................................................ 59 Windows
Underbody protection, care instructions ........................235 Voice control .............................................................. 171 Adjusting after connecting battery .......................63
Universal audio interface, installation position ................171 Care instructions..............................................234
Unlocking Heated washer jets ............................................86
Opening vehicle door from inside.........................23 W Opening/closing with rocker switch .....................62
Retrieving personal settings from the key...........143 Warning messages Storing end position ...........................................63
The vehicle cannot be unlocked...........................26 Tire pressure................................................... 112 Windshield washer system
Unlocking and opening tailgate............................25 Washer fluid Adding washer fluid ..........................................224
Unlocking vehicle door from inside ......................23 Antifreeze ....................................................... 224 Windshield wiper/washer stalk
Unlocking vehicle door with car key Topping up ...................................................... 224 Adjusting the rain sensor sensitivity .....................85
(remote control) .................................................21 Washer jets Windshield wiper/washer system.........................86
Unlocking vehicle door with Heating............................................................. 86 Windshield, fast wiping .......................................86
Porsche Entry & Drive (keyless)...........................21 Washing the vehicle, instructions.................................. 232 Windshield, slow wiping ......................................86
Upshift prompt ..............................................................93 Weights Wiping windshield once (one-touch operation) .......86
USB interface, installation position ................................171 Definitions....................................................... 204 Windshield wipers
Weights, Technical data ............................................... 288 Care instructions..............................................234
V Welcome Home function Stalk .................................................................86
Switching on ..................................................... 80 Windstop
Vanity mirror .................................................................53 Wheel
Vehicle Closing..............................................................69
Attachment faces ............................................ 257 Lowering ...........................................................69
Keys .................................................................16 Central Bolts ................................................... 258
Vehicle data ................................................................284 Opening ............................................................69
Central locking ................................................ 258 Raising ..............................................................69
Vehicle door Changing ........................................................ 258
Locking from inside............................................23 Winter driving ..............................................................272
Checking pressure........................................... 256 Winter tires
Locking with car key (remote control) ..................22 Security wheel bolts......................................... 198
Locking with Porsche Entry & Drive (keyless)........22 Changing tires .................................................256
Wheel alignment ......................................................... 250 General information ..........................................250
Malfunctions when opening and closing................26 Wheel attachment faces .............................................. 257
Unlocking with car key (remote control) ...............21 Storage...........................................................250
Wheel change ............................................................. 251 Wiper blades
Unlocking with Porsche Entry & Drive (keyless).....21 Wheels
Vehicle information Care instructions..............................................234
Adjusting......................................................... 250 Replacing ........................................................224
Retrieving on multi-function display ....................100 Central Bolts ................................................... 258
Vehicle settings Wrench socket for security wheel bolt
Central locking ................................................ 258 Using ..............................................................257
Adapting multi-function display ..........................118 Changing ........................................................ 254
Adjusting on multi-function display .....................117 Fixing a flat tire................................................ 265
General information ......................................... 244
298 Index

911 Turbo Main Manual 144

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

911 Turbo Main Manual 144

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Umschlag_U1+U4_aussen.fm Seite 1 Mittwoch, 9.

April 2014 3:09 15

Engine Exhaust Hot Exhaust Pipes Porsche Ceramic Composite Brake

Tire Pressure and Technical Data ..... 283

Index .............................................. 290

Steering Wheel and

Opening and Locking

Opening and Locking 15

16 Opening and Locking

Opening and Locking 17

Central Locking System Your vehicle is equipped with a central locking

18 Opening and Locking

Brief Overview – Opening and

Key Porsche Entry & Drive

What do I want to do? What do I have to do? What happens?

Unlocking Using the key:

With Porsche Entry & Drive:

Locking Using the key:

Lock if persons/animals Please see the chapter “SWITCHING OFF INTERIOR

Switching off alarm Unlock the vehicle.

Opening and Locking 19

With the key

20 Opening and Locking

Opening and Locking 21

22 Opening and Locking

In the multi-purpose display of the instrument Unlocking doors

Opening and Locking 23

Opening and Closing the Luggage

Opening luggage compartment lid

24 Opening and Locking

Opening and Locking 25

26 Opening and Locking

Opening and Locking 27

28 Opening and Locking

3. Lift the door handle on the driver’s door

Opening and Locking 29

30 Opening and Locking

Seats, Mirrors and Steering Wheel

Seats, Mirrors and Steering Wheel 31

32 Seats, Mirrors and Steering Wheel

Seats, Mirrors and Steering Wheel 33

Comfort Entry Function Entering the vehicle

34 Seats, Mirrors and Steering Wheel

Seat Heating Seat Ventilation Rear Seat Backrests

Seats, Mirrors and Steering Wheel 35

36 Seats, Mirrors and Steering Wheel

Seats, Mirrors and Steering Wheel 37

38 Seats, Mirrors and Steering Wheel

Seats, Mirrors and Steering Wheel 39

40 Seats, Mirrors and Steering Wheel

Seat adjustment for the passenger’s seat Vehicle modifications to accommodate

Seats, Mirrors and Steering Wheel 41

Airbag Warning light Child Restraint Systems

42 Seats, Mirrors and Steering Wheel

Seats, Mirrors and Steering Wheel 43

44 Seats, Mirrors and Steering Wheel

Seats, Mirrors and Steering Wheel 45

Activating the automatic locking retractor LATCH Child Seat System

46 Seats, Mirrors and Steering Wheel

Child Restraint Anchorages

Seats, Mirrors and Steering Wheel 47

Roll-Over Protection h DANGER Airbag Warning light

48 Seats, Mirrors and Steering Wheel

Seats, Mirrors and Steering Wheel 49